Introduction Websites, such as Alibaba.com, create a great opportunity for SMEs to expand their sales and production. Alibaba.com and Trade-india.com have similar features on selecting products and suppliers. The usefulness of the information to a buyer is that it offers a wide range of companies and products that an individual can select. The websites lower the cost of marketing, labor, and retailing.
The three sites offer a simple path of registering a seller. A single click is enough to put the seller on a page where he can begin the registration process. Fraud can come from the ordering procedures that require customers to make payment before goods are delivered.
Fraud can be reduced by using a third party to hold money on behalf of customers. The third party can release the money once all the terms of trade have been met by the supplier. In the short run, the problem caused by lack of infrastructure can be solved by convenience stores.
Ease, usefulness and potential value of the website The product I would like to purchase is genuine leather. I type genuine leather on the advanced search field and look if there are categories that match my search. I click on search, since there are no direct matches. Most of the categories are about finished goods.
I want genuine leather material that I can use in the fashion industry to make items such as jackets, wallets, belts, and shoes. I choose suppliers and the gold standard criteria. The list of companies that qualify is large. The selection shifts to lower prices, and suppliers with a wide range of colors. There are about 38 companies per page, and there are 90 pages. Most companies are located in Asia.
There is a large of number of suppliers, which may increase the difficulty in choosing one supplier. The two companies that I select are Jinjiang King Lion Garment Trading Co., in China Mainland, and E.F.A International (SMC-Private) Ltd., in Pakistan.
I select Jinjiang King Lion Garment Trading Co. because of its low prices. The material costs US$ 2.5 – US$ 4.5 per square meter of genuine leather (Alibaba fig. 1).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The material can be used for making handbags and shoes. The delivery time is also a factor in the selection. Jinjiang King Lion Garment Trading Company delivers a package between 10 and 15 days. It offers a wide variety of colors, which makes it easier for a fashion designer (Alibaba fig. 1).
E.F.A International is selected because it offers a wide range of genuine leather with a light weight that can be used for apparel. It offers a wide variety of colors. It is chosen for sheep, goat and pig leather. The price is higher than the price offered by companies operating in China.
The price ranges from US$ 1.99 to US$ 2.75 per square foot (Alibaba fig. 2). The goods are delivered in a period of 30 days. Selecting a product and a company, based on price and ratings given to the supplier, is an easy process.
The usefulness of the information to a buyer is that it offers a wide range of companies and products to select. One can choose a company based on the years that it has retained membership. Some of the companies have been verified by Alibaba.com.
Potential value comes from the information obtained without physically visiting stores to make selections. The potential value is also created when the supplier makes arrangements using existing logistics companies that are more efficient through specialization.
Benefits and costs of using sites such as Alibaba
Benefits Costs 1. The Web offers manufacturers and traders a larger market for their products. A larger market offers an opportunity to spread fixed costs over a larger number of products. 2. Payments can be made quickly using electronic means. 3. SMEs can use fewer resources to reach the global market, which was once only accessible to big corporations (Manzoor 22). 4. Suppliers can hire logistics firms with more efficient operations. Suppliers can share logistics infrastructure. 5. The Internet is accessible from any country. 6. The system of payment used is more convenient. Most of the firms that supply may use online money transfers. 7. Competitive pricing is beneficial to customers. 8. There is a wide variety of products to select. 9. There is reduced cost of doing business. Marketing, workforce and warehousing costs are reduced. 1. A large market comes with a large number of suppliers. Countries with high variable costs are likely to lose in the pricing competition. 2. The ease of making payment opens opportunity for fraudsters. 3. Customers may prefer well-known brands, which becomes a limitation for SMEs. 4. There are costs associated with building infrastructure for logistics (Gupta and Bijlani 1). 5. There are costs associated with purchasing electronic devices that can access the Internet. It limits the number of people that can access the Internet in emerging markets. 6. Most emerging economies do not have a developed system of making payment electronically. Suppliers still rely on cash collection on delivery (COD) method of payment. Some customers also distrust electronic methods of money transfer. 7. Competitive pricing and price sensitive customers, especially in emerging markets, makes suppliers to generate low profit margins (Gupta and Bijlani 5). 8. There is a wide range of products whose quality standards cannot be guaranteed. 9. Trade in different jurisdictions makes it difficult to enforce contracts. Laws may be unclear or conflicting in different countries (Manzoor 24). Refunds may not be easy to make. An SME, such as SpinCent, has an opportunity to grow at a higher rate by satisfying needs of customers in a larger market. SpinCent manufactures laboratory and industrial centrifugal devices that experience a slower growth rate. Slower economic growth rate has its effects on the domestic market.
We will write a custom Essay on Alibaba
Food and Drink Report: Hotpot Report essay help site:edu
Executive Summary Hotpot refers to a meal whose origin is in China, East Asia. This paper will introduce the food by providing its definition and later discussing its history.
The historical perspective covers the changes that occurred in the industry making hotpot reach the European markets in the past few years. Its role and value follows the discussion by mentioning the significance of the food in brand positioning various East Asian countries in the world. Another area of focus is the importance of hotpot supply chains in the world with a particular focus on legal, environmental, and physical issues.
In addition, the technological improvement over the years seems to have a direct impact on the food and the subsequent section provides an in-depth discussion of the same. Finally, the submission discusses gastronomic elements revolving around the issues. This explains the biological influences on the marketing strategy for hotpot across the world.
Introduction Hotpot is a delicacy mostly enjoyed in parts of East Asia; the Thai people refer to it as Suki. Most Asian States known to enjoy the hotpot include the Chinese, Singapore residents, the Malaise, the residents of Brunei, and Philippines (Tan 1989). Besides the Thai, other communities equally refer to the hotpot as the steamboat.
This food consists of different types of stew options prepared in tradition metal pots explaining the different names it has across the Asian countries. The Vietnamese also prepare the hotpot from a variety of different ingredients used in making stew.
At the centre of a nearly ready meal is the hotpot that keeps simmering while waiting for the cook to add different meat, vegetable, or other food pieces to the arrangement in the dining table (Ehrlich 1997). Depending on the culture involved, the outcome of the entire set-up differs.
However, cross cultural integration in the 21st century leads to idea sharing enabling different communities to come up with an almost similar hotpot stew dish (Triggs 1986). This explains the rationale of this submission because it intends to provide socio-economic, political, environmental, technological, and gastronomic elements surrounding the culture of hotpot preparation.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Historical and Current Developments The hotpot culture shows significant improvement since its inception creating a balance between its history, the present, and the future. Its role keeps changing through history making it possible for people to name food storage equipment after the delicacy and even eateries. The intention is to create a correlation between the stew mixture and the equipment or food outlet (Goodman 2008).
Hospitality industries across the world are the greatest embracers of the eatery art helping it improve tourism, retail, and event sectors in East Asia and across the world in general. Currently, East Asia enjoys an undisputable global presence because of such culinary habits and appreciation of unique eating cultures.
This makes it possible for people from different countries to relate with East Asia by adapting the cooking styles embraced by the communities.
Hotpot preparation cuts across cultures enabling people from Japan, China, Vietnam, and Thailand to engage in the culinary habit in attracting tourists from different countries (Tannahill 1973). The preparation style is almost the same, but the outcome slightly differs because of the ingredients used for the hotpot.
The history of the Chinese hotpot goes back to the past 1000 years even though the roots of the delicacy are in Mongolia. The principal component of the meal was meat, while different ingredients only helped in improving its taste. The taste of the hotpot varies depending on the meat used and this explains why hotpot made from beef, seafood, horse, pork, ham, or chicken would automatically differ in taste (Slack 2001).
The Chinese mostly used seafood during the Tang Dynasty because it was the most readily available main dish for the hotpot. Preparation improved under different leadership structures and it was until the 16th to 18th century that China incorporated other meat samples into the hotpot (Newman 2004).
This happened under the Qing Dynasty in which the Chinese became one of the most popular countries in the world before the Japanese attacked the Manchuria (Francis 1880).
We will write a custom Report on Food and Drink Report: Hotpot specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In the 21st century, there is a slight difference in preparation considering that few people use fresh herbs due to a high demand for products, which have a long shelf life in the market. As such, the spices are in packed portions and preserved in order to enable easy export of the same to other countries.
In addition, most East Asian States no longer used the coal heated metallic coal because induction or infrared cookers exist for a similar purpose. The Chinese and people can also gas cookers as a replacement for the traditional hotpot (Needham and Wang 2008).
The hotpot cooking technique accords its name to the pot used in preparation, the style incorporated, and the cultural influences to the same. As such, the cultures are bound to change in order to satisfy the demands of emerging markets and to make the culture sustainable over time.
Role and Value of Hotpot The role of hotpot varies across cultures even though intercultural interaction is an ambassador of change to the involved communities. Today, it is normal for communities to combine hotpot and barbecue even though the two have different origins (Feldner 2012). In China alone, different cities and communities have diverse varieties of hotpot. In Beijing, many Chinese cultures meet enabling them create a cocktail of the hotpot.
In modern food outlets, the hotpot cooks incorporate diverse flavours in order to meet the demands of consumers.
However, there are a section of the same population that require traditionally prepared hotpot in the coal pots because in the 21st century, people display more concerns for health as opposed to taste and preference (Hulin 2006). They believe that traditionally prepared hotpot has no processed spices, cooks prepare it under low heat, and its mildness restores its value content.
In China, the most preferred hotpot variety is the spicy chili with beef instead of seafood. This happens in China because the country has a history of integration with different countries over the past few years enabling it to learn many things from Western, Arabic, and African States. In Manchuria, China, people prefer the sour version of the hotpot, but in the Hainan Island, beef is the main ingredient.
Notably, Hainan hosts the Chinese Hawaii (Sanya). This represents the most visited part of China because of the beautiful islands existing in the part of the land explaining why meat hotpot gains popularity in the region occasioned by tourists from different parts of the world.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Food and Drink Report: Hotpot by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Restricting them to vegetable or seafood hotpot would reduce consumer attention in the cuisine. The Japanese and the Tai mostly prefer egg hotpot even though they incorporate different spices and flavours to improve the taste of each hotpot variety (Buck, Dawson, and Wu 1966). The inclusion of different tastes is to attract the consumer base while taking into consideration the fact that visitors would want something new and edible.
This explains the incorporation of different cultures in the preparation and presentation of the hotpot across different cultures in East Asia and beyond. In Thailand, the cooks are likely to use seafood or beef while incorporating lime, chili, or coriander (Terrific teaching: a hotpot of tried and tested classroom activities 1990). On the other hand, Vietnamese are likely to use seafood and pickled vegetables as the main ingredients.
Importance of Hotpot Supply Chains Fish markets including Tsukiji in Japan enjoy a global presence because of its supply of fresh fish used for different purposes. Hotpot supply chains have great socio-economic importance to East Asia and other parts of the world that adopted the same culinary culture.
Eateries are overly careful about the foods they supply to the target populations because failure to observe ethics might cause lawsuits and the legal measures faced for food poisoning might be detrimental to the survival of such food outlets. Safety is very important even before considering other things.
Safety in terms of using the best meat or seafood pieces is paramount and the same applies to the spices and vegetables because they should not contain toxins. In East Asia, there are also legal concerns about extinction, which also takes an environmental perspective.
Japan takes centre stage for such discussions because of the Tsukiji fish market in Tokyo that is the avenue of purchasing both mature and immature fish for the preparation of different delicacies. The Japanese government intervened in the case of the endangered Bluefin Tuna by imposing stringent legal measures on fish vendors that violate the principle of not selling immature fish (Allen, Joseph, and Squires 2010).
Such restrictions often limit supply chains from providing the main ingredient for the Japanese and Vietnamese hotpot, but the intention is to create a sustainable culture for the future of the community. Clearly, legal supply chains are important for environmental and ethical conservation.
Supply chains equally show concerns for environmental issues revolving around this subject. There is an extensive use of spices even though the production levels of the same are low. Most consumers complain that hotpot varieties are less spicy lately because of the diminishing levels of the supplies over the past few years.
There are replacements for spices that initially helped in the preparation of excellent hotpot varieties including chili that most eateries replace with processed black pepper. In addition, extinction is a major concern for hotpot producers who use fish and mutton products (Young 2011).
The vegan community uses such avenues to blame meat consumers of degradation of the ecosystem. This explains why suppliers of the food prefer using vegetables lately because of growing cultural, religious, and culinary concerns for such diets.
The West is a likely consumer of beef, pork, vegetables, and less spicy hotpot, thus explaining why it contributes towards such discussions at a global platform. Through such supply chains, it becomes easy to market the hotpot at a global level. Many eateries advertise products through social media and hotpot companies equally achieve their objectives through such socialisation avenues.
Like other avenues of income generation, such culinary habits earn East Asia the greatest number of tourists across the world, hence enabling the countries to develop mutually beneficial relationships with the west and other continents (Prittie 1949).
At the global level, there is an opportunity for different countries to identify mistakes in East Asia and to correct the involved countries, especially when such issues revolve around environmental conservation (Shibuya and Rolfe 2003).
Technology is the core aspect of improvement in various industries, including tourism and hospitality among others. Technological appraisal plays significant roles in improving preparation and consumption of the hotpot. At the Hainan Island in China, many people use chopsticks because the country adores its culture. However, in terms of preparation of hotpot, there are many changes.
For instance, instead of using coal in heating the metal pot, the Chinese and the Japanese use solar-powered infrared cookers, gas cookers, and electric cookers; this helps in reducing energy consumption. In addition, it reduces environment degradation because many people cut down trees in order to make charcoal to act as a source of fire.
Outside East Asia, there are communities that equally enjoy hotpot, but they cannot use chopsticks and traditional techniques of consumption; they use forks. Another improvement is in terms of packaging. The spices were initially very fresh, tasty, and were in abundance. Through technological appraisal, it became important to increase their lives by drying most of them through different preservation techniques.
Spices might retain the flavours for a limited period and later lose the taste after a long time (Taylor 2012). There are even companies that package cooked hotpot and preserve the same for export purposes.
Therefore, technology is responsible for the improvement in storage, eating techniques, preparation, and marketing of hotpot and the scenario is likely to change in the future. In essence, the world is volatile and technology keeps improving daily.
Gastronomy concentrates on linking different fields of science. In biological studies, it provides an avenue through which people can understand the way the human brain makes different choices within the controlled and natural environments. In the food industry, gastronomy mostly creates a connection between psychology, biology, and chemistry.
There is an ardent need to provide consumers with edible products that have not biological effects on their bodies. In order to achieve the same, manufacturers influence consumer decisions by convincing them that the products under discussion have various health benefits (Hunt and Ruttle 2011). In Sichuan, China, the Chongqing hotpot is famous for various health benefits.
It has the ability to treat cold because of the fresh herbs used in its preparation. In addition, it controls human weight by increasing metabolism. This reduces the chances of getting high blood pressure and ailments related to obesity and lifestyle change.
The Chongqing hotpot is just one variety that marketers have in store. For packaged hotpot dishes, the health benefits follow the inscription of ingredients indicated behind the package (Brereton 1993). Different hotpot varieties target diverse consumers and this explains the different biological appeals used to convince the markets (Klever and Klever 1984).
Conclusion In summary, hotpot keeps improving over the centuries because of the cross-cultural integration. However, it maintains originality since many East Asian communities have eateries that use fresh spices for the food. Prices of dishes differ depending on cooking techniques incorporated, the health benefits of the hotpot, and the ingredients used in the cooking process.
References Allen, R. L., Joseph, J., and Squires, D 2010, Conservation and management of transnational tuna fisheries, Wiley-Blackwell, Ames, Iowa.
Brereton, B. G 1993, HOTPOT: Analysis of output variability due to uncertainty in lithology composition: British Geological Survey, Onshore Geology Series, Technical Eeport WA/93/83, Oxford University Press, Oxford.
Buck, J. L., Dawson, O. L., and Wu, Y 1966, Food and agriculture in Communist China, Wiley and Sons, New York.
Ehrlich, G 1997, Questions of heaven the Chinese journeys of an American Buddhist, Beacon Press, Boston.
Feldner, S. M 2012, A cook’s journey to Japan fish tales and rice paddies: 100 homestyle recipes from Japanese kitchens, Tuttle Publishers, New York.
Francis, F 1880, Hotpot; or, miscellaneous papers, “The Field” Office, London.
Goodman, P 2008, Food in China, PowerKids Press, New York.
Hulin, B 2006, The everything fondue party book: cooking tips, decorating ideas, and over 250 crowd-pleasing recipes, Adams Media, Avon, Mass.
Hunt, R., and Ruttle, K 2011, Leek hotpot, Oxford University Press, Oxford.
Klever, E., and Klever, U 1984, Fondues from around the world: nearly 200 recipes for fish, cheese and meat fondues, oriental hotpots, tempura, sukiyaki, dessert fondues, Barron’s, Woodbury, N.Y.
Needham, J., and Wang, L. 2008, Science and civilisation in China, Cambridge University Press, London.
Newman, J. M 2004, Food culture in China, Greenwood Press, Westport, Conn.
Prittie, T. C 1949, Lancashire hotpot, McGraw-Hill, Chicago.
Shibuya, E., and Rolfe, J 2003, Security in Oceania: in the 21st Century, Asia-Pacific Centre for Security Studies, Honolulu, Hawaii.
Slack, S. F 2001, Fondues
Importance of Ethics in Merck Research Paper essay help: essay help
Introduction Ethics is an important concept which enables people to observe high moral standards in all their dealings. In the case of Merck Company, the firm took important steps to address different problems that resulted from selling a defective drug known as Vioxx to various consumers in the market.
The aftermath of the scandal elicited different reactions from both consumers and other organizations due to negative effects that were experienced by some patients after taking it. This case shows that modern organizations need to be more responsible in their dealings to avoid selling products which are likely to endanger their customers’ health.
Vioxx was sold to more than twenty million during the four year period it was in the market that is from 1999 to 2004. Consequently, it earned the firm more than 2.5 billion dollars in sales by the time it was withdrawn from the market in 2004. However, the negative publicity associated with the firm’s unethical practices made it lose a significant portion of its market value by more than 27 billion dollars.
. The failure by the firm to implement high ethical practices had a negative impact on its image in the market. Therefore, the firm found itself on the defensive due to its failure to take its moral and ethical obligations in the industry seriously. Even though it later used product labels to warn customers about the side effects of Vioxx, the firm continued to reap rewards from the drug despite the dangers it posed to consumers.
Therefore, the firm’s failure to address safety concerns associated with the product before it was launched into the market exposed it to many risks which were harmful to its long term operations. This paper will discuss various ethical factors which can be associated with Merck Company and how they impacted on the firm’s operations in the industry (Giacalone
Supply Chain Management of NPW Essay college essay help online
Table of Contents Introduction
Outsourcing of IT versus manufacturing
Introduction NPW is an organization that is involved in providing toy products to children in different markets across the world. In the recent past, the firm has witnessed a sharp rise in demand due to increase in population, which implies more consumers and markets. NPW has to fulfil its pledge to provide high quality products to kids on Christmas day.
However, Santa can hardly keep up due to many changes in the supply chain of the business establishment. In fact, the company is facing the following problems in its endeavors to achieve its business objectives: demand planning, logistics, supply chain unpreparedness, production, information technology, and production. In order for the business enterprise to gain competitive advantage, it should work toward resolving its challenges.
This paper focuses on selecting the best strategy that would have the greatest impact on future operations and performance outcomes of NPW. It also suggests the better approach between outsourcing of IT and manufacturing. The main goal of the paper is to help the management to fix the dilemma of the company.
Strategies In order to select the best approach among the three proposed strategies for fixing the dilemma of the firm, it would be important to analyze them in detail. One of the experts in supply chain management has proposed that Santa should be at the forefront in creating fads with regard to the use of toys among children.
In fact, the expert argues that Santa should stop reacting to fads because this would not help the firm to identify solutions to the dilemma that is facing. The toy business is characterized by a considerable amount of research that helps to understand the needs of children.
For example, research is critical in assessing the types of toys that children in a particular market would require, which would certainly be different from other markets. With regard to this approach, it has been shown that even the best IT applications cannot be applied in predicting market demands due to the uniqueness that is associated with toy business.
Thus, the expert contends Santa should focus on investing heavily on aiding children to comprehend cool toys in the market, which would be followed by the creation of an agile supply chain that would support the delivery of cool toy products. Old-fashioned advertising might be an ideal approach for the firm.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More For example, the management many focus on sending workers to children’s playgrounds where they could interact with children and learn about their toy needs. Thereafter, the business establishment may link toys with certain movies that children adore.
The expert clearly states that NPW should focus on outsourcing its products from established firms in foreign countries. For example, Mattel sourced from China, a practice that enabled it to gain more market share and competitive advantage.
Another expert believes that Santa can best respond to the current dynamics in customer demand by applying planning methodology in its operations. However, the approach is based on a sound platform of point forecasting for demand. The Newsvendor model, which has four distinct steps, would be applied in the organization.
First, a bell-shaped curve would be plotted to represent uncertainty with regard to demand. Second, the cost of underage would assessed. Third, the cost of overage would be determined. Fourth, in order to minimize expected costs, an economic balancing study would be conducted. It is important of the management to understand that it cannot satisfy a hundred percent of demand.
In fact, this is supported by the orientation of the curve that is inclined toward the right. After the model is successfully adopted, Santa can think about ways of dealing with toy shortage in the market, which might be solved through product substitution, hedging and postponement.
The third expert contends that NPW should do away with real-time technology and, instead, focus on effective planning. In fact, the company, in order for it to meet the demand of customers, should adopt this approach. One of the most important aspects in planning is effective execution. During this process, the items that are associated with the best value in the business establishment should be identified.
Thereafter, demand prediction of such products should be conducted. Some of the essential aspects that cold be applied in this context could include unit sales, frequency of sales of certain products, inventory costs, and net profit. The management should focus on establishing a matrix that groups toys based on the aspects of demand and expected sales.
We will write a custom Essay on Supply Chain Management of NPW specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In fact, production would be based on the matrix because the units of toys to be produced by the firm would be based on the two parameters of the matrix adopted. This would result in considerable production cost savings, as it would only produce toys that would have substantial demand in the market.
Planning is a process framework that would not require substantial investment, unlike the adoption of a new technology, which would have little impact with regard to meeting customer demand.
Outsourcing of IT versus manufacturing Some experts in supply chain management have proposed bringing more activities in house while others have asserted that additional outsourcing should be adopted. This paper recommends that outsourcing of IT should used by the firm. Outsourcing of IT by NPW would imply that the company would contract out the processes supported by the applications of IT to a third party.
This approach would allow the firm to focus on core activities that would result in meeting customer demand. In fact, manufacturing in house might lead to the consumption of resources, a fact that might negatively impact activities. Examples of core functions include human and financial activities. Staffing flexibility could be associated with adopting outsourcing of IT by NPW.
The strategy would require that seasonal demands be correlated with additional staffing resources. It is worth noting that outsourcing of IT by the business enterprise would be important in protecting the organization against currency risk and political risks, which could negative impact the performance outcomes of the business.
Thus, it would be essential for the management to consider reducing overhead costs by contracting IT processes to other businesses that have better experience and technical expertise. The reduction of overhead costs would culminate in significant savings, which can be used to support other activities with the firm.
Conclusion The management of NPW should conduct an effective research to understand the needs of customers. Effective planning, which uses the Newsvendor model, should be adopted. In addition to planning methodology, NPW should also consider utilizing outsourcing of IT, which would result in substantial savings and concentration on core activities.
The firm should be active toward executing approaches that would help it to meet demand from consumers.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Supply Chain Management of NPW by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More
Mobile Social Media Marketing Report essay help: essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Why the shift towards mobile marketing
Challenges of mobile social media marketing
Trends in mobile social media marketing and change management
The essence of mobile social media marketing
Introduction Marketing professionals all over the world are constantly adjusting their business strategies to reach out to the ever-changing demands and needs of customers (Lamarre, Galarneau, and Boeck 2012, p. 1). With the modern day shift to adoption of media services in the concept of marketing, Khalifa and Shen (2008, p. 112) opine that mobility is rapidly becoming an ordinary way of life.
Innovative business mind-sets that have effectively incorporated e-commerce in their marketing strategies view mobile social media marketing as the next best exhilarating business prospect that will enable businesses to relate to their customers successfully through new communication channels (Lamarre, Galarneau, and Boeck 2012, p. 1).
Mobile social media marketing differentiates itself from other marketing mediums such as newspapers, radio, and television. This arguably is due to its highly interactive nature supplied by web browser advantages and mobile device interfaces that make it possible to offer continuous access to prospective customers (Davis and Sajtos 2009, p. 16).
These rare advantages effectively suffice as one of the most robust, dynamic, and personal mediums that continue to shape modern day marketing in all corners of the world (Jadhav, Kamble, and Patil 2012, p. 45).
Mobile social media marking has the ability to integrate several forms of mobile device technology and practices such as the Internet, VoIP, mobile SMS, the Bluetooth, mobile e-mail, as well as concepts such as SMS marketing, mobile gaming, mobile advertising, and location based marketing (Lamarre, Galarneau, and Boeck 2012, p. 2).
Why the shift towards mobile marketing As Lamarre, Galarneau, and Boeck (2012, p. 2) note, Mobile social media marketing taps abundantly into the massive reservoir of potentials that cut mobile service provision across the globe. These provisions have become used commonplace with consumers of all ages and by customer personal mobile interfaces.
In recent times, mobile social media marketing has been comprehensively discussed in modern day marketing ventures and has passed the test of management philosophy pigeonholed on its practices, principles, and strategies that underscores its consistent quality delivery.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Of much consideration has been the increased employees involvement, employee empowerment, top management commitment, benchmarking, team spirit, rewards and recognitions, quality leadership, consistent feedback mechanism and a healthy liaison between companies and consumers, as well as between businesses and their suppliers (Jadhav, Kamble, and Patil 2012, p. 45).
Most of the research on mobile social media marketing has majored in the manufacturing sector. Lately, however, they have spread over the service industry and public administration, each of which has proved to have travelled a robust trajectory towards the empowerment of e-commerce (Abbass and Akram 2010, p 30).
The advancements in the service sector, therefore, have occasioned the increased attention to the modern implementation of the mobile social constructs as better ways for companies to develop and enhance the global marketing trends.
For corporations, therefore, this new shift in the marketing trends holds an appealing assurance of being in constant and direct touch with their clienteles, thus helping them to nurture a repeated and robust rapport with the potentiality of brand. The move amplifies sales with an express competitive advantage (Lamarre, Galarneau, and Boeck 2012, p. 2).
In addition, given that the younger customers could be problematic to reach by means of traditional networks of communication. Mobile social media marketing readily offers an effective appeal, especially with the increased need to reach out to the younger consumer segment (Gao, Sultan, and Rohm 2010, p. 578).
This is because this consumer segment continues to be the brain behind the modern day business success. As such, they have to be lured in keeping with the social trends in the market (Jadhav, Kamble, and Patil 2012, p. 45).
Challenges of mobile social media marketing Although mobile social media marketing hypothetically implies a prodigious deal of business opportunities, harnessing such possibilities continues to prove somewhat challenging (Aldás-Manzano, Ruiz-Mafé, and Sanz-Blas 2009, p. 745). Numerous obstacles relating to consumer behaviour continue to characterise it in ways that are yet to be resolved.
We will write a custom Report on Mobile Social Media Marketing specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More As Beck et al. (2008, p. 420) note, it is a forgone conclusion that a great number of consumers often have their mobile devices within reach, thereby establishing a robust network of communication between consumers and companies.
Over time, the challenge that has characterised mobile social media marketing revolves around the hitches in linking these two entry points by developing a craving from the prospective consumers to generate access to their mobile devices, whereby such consumers not only gain privilege, but also confidence in the company (Aldás-Manzano, Ruiz-Mafé, and Sanz-Blas 2009, p. 745).
The other challenge that is often encountered in the managing of the consumer’s interaction with the company’s communication facilities is whether this might be perceived as being explicitly intrusive on such mobile social media marketing platforms. These contests, according to Davis and Sajtos (2009, p. 15), are pointers that validate the fact that research into this particular zone is necessary, pertinent and well-timed.
Trends in mobile social media marketing and change management It increasingly becomes very imperative for organisations to gain competitive advantage by nurturing a culture that guarantees businesses the ability to survive and manage change effectively (Jadhav, Kamble, and Patil 2012, p. 46).
Mobile social media marketing trends, according to Cao and McHugh (2005, p. 475), warrant the drive to carry out commerce that seeks to explore the domains of developmental paradigms which are in pursuit of the ever-changing buyer behaviour, habits and consumerism in general.
Trends in global trade offer valuable lenses through which organisational leaders with the necessary business zest could monitor their business growth, respond amicably to the demands and mitigate uncertainties within their business structures (Abbass and Akram 2010, p 30).
These newfound marketing trends are particularly useful in the concept of organisational intelligence, knowledge management, organisational design, and corporate strategy to reach out to the global consumers.
Given that the most widespread trends in the contemporary market are towards an all-pervasive and continuous change, as well as expanding the scope of interdependencies, close parallelism can be amicably drawn between the public and private sectors with the denominator being the propensity towards environmental change (Cao and McHugh 2005, p. 475).
Not sure if you can write a paper on Mobile Social Media Marketing by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Within these considerations, private and public sector organisations seek to thwart the approaching turbulent environmental glitches that are characteristic of traditional marketing. These marketing glitches are contained by dramatic technological changes, as well as socio-economic and political developments that continue to shape global trade.
In order to help shape, understand and manage change conduits and its processes more effectively, a comprehensive outlook of change management in global marketing often suffices as the best alternative in keeping with the ever changing market trends (Cao and McHugh 2005, p. 480).
The essence of mobile social media marketing Mobile social media marketing is a venture of management that is concerned primarily with supervising, designing and controlling processes within a production function. The essence of this is to transform business operations especially in light of producing goods while tendering services that seek to meet the demand of consumers’ needs anywhere at all times (Choi et al. 2008, p. 320).
Mobile social media marketing as a concept of management, observe Bauer, Reichardt, Barnes, and Neumann (2005, p. 185), takes into consideration the responsibility of underscoring the efficacy of specific business functions that must be realised by way of using the limited resources as possible to meet customers’ satisfaction within a given timeline.
This archetypical business venture is also concerned with the efficacy that involves the conversion of inputs such as raw materials, energy and labour into outputs such as goods and services (Bauer et al. 2005, p. 185).
Succinctly, the essence of mobile social media marketing is its capacity to utilise capital and human resources such as technology and knowledge to convert raw materials and services into either tangible or intangible products in the forms of goods and services.
The basis of mobile social media marketing is to design the systems that control an enterprise such as arranging the facilities, coming up with procedures that align the business with mobile device inventory acquisition and scheduling business tasks and outputs while providing a safe passage that guarantees the smooth sail of business towards customers.
Standardisation lenses The modern day consumer views business organisations through the lenses of standardisation and businesses that explore the domains of mobile social media marketing as a way of reaching out to their customers, so it normally gets a head-start in the populous market niche (Bouhlel et al. 2009, p. 705). This is so due to the fact that such businesses’ products and services are usually available to the consumers at the click of a call button.
Alternatively, prospective buyers could always browse, view and verify the specifications of a product or service offered by the company, thereby saving both time and money. To a spectacular advantage, the authors opine that prospective customers could make on-line requests and be served with various services and products instantaneously (How to make effective disclosures in digital advertising 2013, p. 1).
Mobile social media marketing, just like any other business venture, as argued by Josler and Burner (2005, p. 5), falls under categorisation schemes that classifies it within the highly sought after business motifs.
These consist of the conceptualisation of higher degree of communication, standardisation levels, production and service delivery functions, as well as entertainments (Kim, Kim, and Kil 2009, p. 142). Marketing within this business model, for example, offers tangible goods that must reach out to consumers. As such, a distribution system is often upped to get them to their targeted destination.
Service industries tend to deal directly with their customers, thus making distribution a less likely challenge at the behest. Here, the concern, however, is to make the services available to the consumers regardless of their global positioning and trends in time (Pisano and Shih 2009, p. 117). Broadly speaking, the focus is on what businesses can do in order to attain a high rate of production in a marketing function.
According to recent research in this area, the high-involvement media services by businesses can, for example, create positive attitudes and spellbinding confidence on the part of consumers (Demchenko 2004, p. 24).
Massey, Montoya-Weiss and O’Driscoll (2002, p. 275) and Soupata (2005, p. 25) concur that increased media marketing and its practices help generate the types of flexible behaviours that may lead to enhanced performance by businesses.
Social media applications embrace a wide collection of elements including collaborating projects, content communities, social networking interfaces, and virtual worlds, which essentially continue to factor in within the standard repertoire of communication for many businesses (Kaplan 2012, p. 1).
Currently, with the endowment of powerful mobile device to every consumer, several social media applications are gradually becoming mobile, as new entrants in the market persistently appear.
Conclusion Mobile social media marketing is rapidly becoming the new face of modern world marketing trends allowing organisations in all parts of the world to effectively reach out to customers and meet their demands beforehand. For many businesses, it will continue to evolve as an integrating tool in communications and marketing strategies.
The continued use of mobile social media marketing is expected to expand the scope of global buying and consumption trends for companies and consumers that embrace it. Although mobile social media marketing offers the ability to create new and impressive opportunities, it also comes with challenges including demands for a rapid shift in the thinking skills – especially about marketing mix and market measurement stratagems.
Today, companies that are most effective in the frontiers of mobile social media marketing are not only experimenting with several business opportunities; they are equally empowered to create institutional metrics to quantify the impacts of their market energies.
In the years to come, effective use of mobile social media tools for marketing will be guided by the very businesses that have the ability to enter into this promising relationship with consumers, employees, supplies, and other stakeholders.
References Abbass, B., and Akram, I 2010, ‘Mobile marketing: Examining the impact of trust, privacy concern and consumers’ Attitudes on intention to purchase’, International Journal of Business and Management, vol. 5, no. 3, pp. 28-41.
Aldás-Manzano, J., Ruiz-Mafé, C., and Sanz-Blas, S 2009, ‘Exploring individual personality factors as drivers of M-shopping acceptance,’ Industrial Management and Data Systems, vol. 109, no. 8, pp. 739-757.
Bauer, H. H., Reichardt, T., Barnes, S. J., and Neumann, M. M 2005, ‘Driving consumer acceptance of Mobile marketing: A theoretical framework and empirical study,’ Journal of Electronic Commerce Research, vol. 6, no. 2, pp. 181-192.
Beck, R., Beimborn, D., Weitzel, T., and König, W 2008, ‘Network effects as drivers of individual technology adoption: Analyzing adoption and diffusion of mobile communication services,’ Information Systems Frontiers, vol. 10, no. 13, pp. 415-429.
Bouhlel, O., Mzoughi, N., Hadiji, D., and Slimane, I. B 2009, ‘Brand Personality and Mobile Marketing: An empirical investigation,’ Proceedings of world academy of science, engineering and technology, vol. 41, no. 3, pp. 703-711.
Cao, G., and McHugh, M 2005, ‘A systemic view of change management and its conceptual underpinnings’, Systemic Practice and Action Research, vol. 18, no. 5, pp. 475-490.
Choi, J., Seol, H., Lee, S., Cho, H., and Park, Y 2008, ‘Customer satisfaction factors of mobile commerce in Korea,’ Internet Research, vol.18, no. 3, pp. 313-335.
Davis, R., and Sajtos, L 2009, ‘Anytime, anywhere: Measuring the ubiquitous consumer’s impulse purchase behavior,’ International Journal of Mobile Marketing. vol. 4, no. 1, pp. 15-23.
Demchenko, Y 2004, ‘Virtual organizations in computer grids and identity management’ Information Security Technical Report. vol. 9, no. 1, pp. 59-76.
Gao, T., Sultan, F., and Rohm, A. J 2010, “Factors influencing Chinese youth consumers’ acceptance of mobile marketing,” Journal of Consumer Marketing, vol. 27, pp. 574-583.
How to make effective disclosures in digital advertising 2013. Web.
Jadhav, N., Kamble, S., and Patil, M 2012, ‘Social Media Marketing: The next generation of business trends’, Journal of Computer Engineering, vo. 2278, no. 8727, pp. 45-49.
Josler, C. and Burner, J 2005, ‘Project Management methodology in human resource management’. College and University Professional Association for Human Resources. vol. 56, no. 2, 1-7.
Kaplan, M 2012, ‘If you love something, let it go mobile: Mobile marketing and mobile social media 4×4,’ Business Horizons, vol. 55, no. 2, pp. 129 – 139.
Khalifa, M., and Shen, K. N 2008, ‘Drivers for Transactional B2C M-commerce Adoption: Extended Theory of Planned Behaviour,’ Journal of Computer Information Systems, vol. 48, no. 14, pp. 111-117.
Kim, K., Kim, G. M., and Kil, E. S 2009, ‘Measuring the Compatibility Factors in Mobile Entertainment Service Adoption,’ Journal of Computer Information Systems, vol. 50, no. 9, pp. 141-148.
Lamarre, A., Galarneau, S. and Boeck, H 2012, ‘Mobile marketing and consumer behaviors current research trend’. Int. J. Latest Trends Computing, vol. 3, no. 201. pp. 1-9.
Massey, A, Montoya-Weiss, M, and O’Driscoll, T 2002, ‘Knowledge Management In Pursuit Of Performance: Insights From Nortel Networks’, MIS Quarterly, vol. 26, no. 3, pp. 269-289.
Pisano, G.P. and Shih, W.C 2009, ‘Restoring American competitiveness’. Harvard Business Review. vol. 7, no. 8, pp. 114-125.
Soupata, L 2005, ‘Engaging employees in company success: The ups approach to a winning team’, Human Resource Management, vol. 44, no. 1, pp. 95-98.
Socrates on Teaching and Learning Critical Essay college application essay help: college application essay help
Introduction Socrates is one of the greatest philosophers known in the modern history whose work impacted on various areas of knowledge, from metaphysics, to philosophy, and even religion. Scholars have considered him one of the founding fathers of the abstract reasoning in the modern world. The works of this great philosopher is well documented in the works of Plato, who was one of his best students.
Klein (1989) says, “Plato’s dialogues are among the most comprehensive accounts of Socrates to survive from antiquity.” Plato compiled this information in the form of dialogue to bring out the information in its most authentic form. Plato believed that presenting the teachings in the form of dialogues was the best way of documenting the teachings of Socrates for the benefit of the future generations.
The teachings of Socrates to Plato closely relates to the modern day classroom teaching and learning. An analysis of Socrates-Theaetetus dialogue and other dialogues with Meno, Lysis, and Phaedrus reveals that Socrates teachings were full of satire, dialogue, and rhetorical questions. These three factors formed the basis of his teachings as a way of evoking abstract reasoning from his students.
It also helped in developing a philosophical reasoning among the learners. Socrates had the capacity of making words that appear simple in meaning become ambiguous philosophically. This approach of teaching forms the basis of the modern day classroom teaching and learning. This research paper is a reflection on the Socrates-Theaetetus dialogue and hot it relates to the modern day classroom teaching and learning.
Discussion Socrates great teachings and philosophies are presented in the works of Plato. Waterfield (2005) says, “Through his portrayal in Plato’s dialogues, Socrates has become renowned for his contribution to the field of ethics, and it is this Platonic Socrates who lends his name to the concepts of Socratic irony and the Socratic Method, or elenchus.”
The Platonic Socrates, as presented in the Socratic dialogues, clearly demonstrates that Plato had a massive impact on the modern day teaching environment. Plato authored thirty-six Socratic dialogues and about 13 letters to present the works of this great philosopher. In this research paper, a few of these dialogues will be analyzed in order to determine how they relate to the modern day classroom teaching and learning.
Theaetetus Dialogue and How it Relates to Modern Day Classroom Teaching and Learning In Plato’s Socratic dialogues, Theaetetus was one of the best students of Socrates. In this dialogue, Socrates is discussing three main definitions of knowledge with Theaetetus. As Klein (1989) records, this dialogue defines knowledge as “Nothing but perception, knowledge as a true judgment, and, finally, knowledge as a true judgment with an account.”
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This scholar observes that this dialogue occurred when Theaetetus was a young scholar who was interested in learning abstract reasoning. Socrates introduced the word ‘knowledge’ which Theaetetus thought was a simple word. He had used the word severally and he wondered why the Great Teacher introduced the word as a focal point of discussion.
His parents sent him to school in order to become knowledgeable. His teachers worked hard to impart knowledge in him. For this reason, the word ‘knowledge’ was a common term that formed the basis of learning.
However, when Socrates gave him an opportunity to define knowledge, he found it very challenging as he could not find the exact definition that befits this word from a philosophical point of view. It is at this stage that Socrates gave three perspectives through which, knowledge can be defined.
Knowledge as nothing but perception
Socrates’ dialogue with Theaetetus first focused on knowledge as a perception of an individual or a group of people towards what they view as knowledge. Using Heracliteanism, Socrates says that what an individual would describe as nothing would mean everything to another individual. For this reason, what one person or a group of people may classify as knowledge may be very different from what another group thinks.
For this reason, knowledge would basically be defined according to an individual’s perception. The way we perceive things in the society is very different based on the social background and other demographical factors. Socrates believed that it would be unfair for him to use a common bar to rigidly define knowledge because a section of the society may not agree with the definition.
This definition of knowledge given by Socrates closely relates to the modern day teaching and learning. According to Waterfield, (2005), knowledge in the modern learning environment entails sitting in a classroom setting, receiving the information that is given by the teacher, internalizing it in order to become knowledgeable.
However, this is what Socrates defined as a rigid definition of knowledge that may not be universally accepted. Sometimes knowledge may be gained out of experience, without having a teacher-learner setting.
We will write a custom Essay on Socrates on Teaching and Learning specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Knowledge as true judgment
In this dialogue, Socrates and Theaetetus argue about true knowledge and true judgment. According to Theaetetus, true judgment is always based on true knowledge. However, Socrates disputes this idea. He explains that there are cases when the jury would be persuaded by the lawyer about a case using untrue lawyer.
However, the lawyer will present the false knowledge in a way that would convince the jury that it is the true knowledge. For this reason, the jury will make true judgment based on untrue knowledge.
This means that while the jury would be made to think that they are making a fair judgment based on the information presented, they will actually be sending an innocent person to jail, or freeing the guilty person unfairly. For this reason, Socrates insisted that true knowledge and true judgment are very different, and should be treated as such.
This philosophical reasoning is very common in the modern day classroom teaching and learning, especially in the field of law. According to Waterfield (2005), courts are considered institutions of justice. When resolving conflicts in court, it is always expected that the true judgment will be based on true knowledge. However, this is not always the case, and that is why people always look for good lawyers.
As a law student, this dialogue demonstrates that it is important to present information to the court in a manner that would convince everyone that it is the true knowledge. This way, the jury would make a favorable decision believing that it is the true judgment.
Knowledge as a true judgment with an account
Socrates finally settles on what he believes is the definition of a true knowledge in his dialogue with Theaetetus. According to Klein (1989), Socrates says, “Things without an account are unknowable, while things with an account are knowable.”
After analyzing the two definitions, their dialogue finally settles on the definition that emphasizes on accounts to back up the knowledge. He insists that the difference between knowable and unknowable is defined by the account. It helps substantiate the knowledge in a manner that is convincing to the audience.
In the modern day learning environment, a learner must understand that the society needs an account to support a claim or a definition of something, especially in a court of law.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Socrates on Teaching and Learning by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Waterfield, (2005) says, “The principles of definition, the law of contradiction, the fallacy of arguing in a circle, the distinction between the essence and accidents of a thing or notion, between means and ends, between causes and conditions depends on the account.” For this reason, any piece of knowledge must be backed up by some strong foundations of the account in order for it to be valid.
Dialogues with Meno The dialogue between Socrates and Meno focuses on the meaning of virtue. According to Meno, virtue would be defined differently based on the individual on focus. According to Waterfield (2005), Meno says, “Every age, every condition of life, young or old, male or female, bond or free, has a different virtue.” According to Meno, the virtues of a woman would be different from that of a man.
Similarly, the virtues of a slave would be different from that of a master. However, Socrates disagrees with this reasoning. He argues that a virtue should mean the same thing when talking about a human being irrespective of any demographical classification.
As Waterfield (2005) notes, he asks Meno, “And will not virtue, as virtue, be the same, whether in a child or in a grown-up person, in a woman or in a man?” Socrates disputes the attempt by Meno to define a virtue differently based on different personalities. Doing what is good is a universal practice that cannot be defined by age, sex, race, or any other demographical factors.
Socrates uses satire and rhetorical questions to drive his point. He says that a crime committed by a person would remain a crime before a court of law irrespective of all these demographical factors, and the judgment may likely be the same, only that a child would be sent to a juvenile court. The dialogue with Meno compares closely with the dialogue with Theaetetus in the figurative of the speech and the use of rhetoric.
Another common factor is that the dialogues seeks to emphasize on need to develop an analytical reasoning when defining some of the terms considered common in the society.
The two dialogues also focus on the perception, and it is clear that Socrates feel that the perception of people towards different things in the society will always differ, and this is always the genesis of conflicts. Unless people accept to base their perceptions on a factual account, the conflicts in the society may not be easily resolved.
Dialogues with Lysis The dialogue with Lysis focused on friendship, a common term that is often used to define the relationship between people close to one another. This dialogue involves Socrates and two young boys named Lysis and Menexenus. The two boys wanted Socrates to tell them what the true meaning of friendship is, and how they can detect a true friend from opportunistic individuals who would easily disappear when one is in trouble.
Socrates challenges the two boys to explain what they feel friendship is because they already had friends (Waterfield, 2005). Given the ambiguity of the definition of friendship given by the two boys, Socrates proposes four notions of true friendship, each with specific principles that makes it necessary to be defined as such.
He then emphasizes on the need to understand the drive that brings two or more individuals into a relationship that can be defined as friendship. According to Socrates, when the friendship is motivated by the pure personal desires by either or all of the parties, then it may not be classified as a true friendship.
This dialogue, just as that with Theaetetus, reveals that before making a judgment, it is important to determine the motive that drives someone to act. Sometimes people fail to understand the motives that make others behave in a particular manner, and this makes it difficult to unearth the truth.
Dialogues with Phaedrus The dialogue between Socrates and Phaedrus focuses on love, the art of rhetoric, and the figurative speech. In this speech, Socrates and Phaedrus try to discuss issues about emotion and the divine world. Their discussion focuses on divine inspiration, soul, madness, and mastery of art. This dialogue uses rhetoric to define issues related to feelings.
Socrates asks Phaedrus to define madness. Phaedrus says that one would be considered mad if he or she does something that is abnormal. Socrates then asks him to define what he means by abnormal. The definition of abnormality given by Phaedrus is unsatisfactory to Socrates. He says that what one may describe as abnormal in one context may be very normal in another context.
It means that madness as a definition of a person’s character may fit in different contexts. Similarly, the word love may not be easy to define in clear terms because what one may consider love may be defined by factors such as desire.
Werner (2012) says, “Let me not to the marriage of true minds admit impediments, love is not love which alters when it alteration finds.” This seeks to affirm that love is firm enough to withstand various forces that may act against it. This dialogue shares philosophical reasoning with that between Socrates and Theaetetus. The use of rhetoric is common in both cases.
Dialogues with Protagoras The dialogue between Socrates and Protagoras is one of the popular Platonic dialogues that talks about virtue. Protagoras argues that virtue is a series of personal attributes which define the character of a person. With his rhetoric skills and his old age, Protagoras seem to be able to convince the audience that a virtue involves a number of attributes that act in different ways to define the character of a person (Zilioli, 2007).
However, Socrates believes that virtue is knowledge, and for this reason, cannot be defined as a series of attributes. It is knowledge to do what is right, and to avoid actions that may be harmful to others. It is a knowledge that helps one to know how to act in the best interest of everyone. Just like the dialogue with Theaetetus, this dialogue emphasizes on knowing what is right and doing it for the benefit of everyone.
References Klein, J. (1989). A commentary on Plato’s Meno. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Waterfield, R. (2005). Meno and other dialogues. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Werner, D. S. (2012). Myth and philosophy in Plato’s Phaedrus. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Zilioli, U. (2007). Protagoras and the challenge of relativism: Plato’s subtlest enemy. Aldershot, England: Ashgate Publishers.
“Systematic Theology: An Introduction to Christian Belief” by John M. Frame Essay (Critical Writing) essay help online free
Table of Contents Introduction
Key Learning from the Book: Chapters 13-22
Introduction The book “Systematic Theology: An Introduction to Christian Belief” by John M. Frame can help Christians and believers understand the teachings of God. The author presents his mature thoughts as a seasoned theologian. The reader can use this book to understand why God has a good plan for every person on earth.
The author addresses the challenges affecting different Christians across the globe. The ideas and thoughts in this book encourage human beings to become strong believers. This essay presents the lessons and insights gained from John Frame’s book.
Key Learning from the Book: Chapters 13-22 Frame’s book begins by identifying the unique attributes of God. I have understood why God is righteous and holy. God has always done wonderful things in order to help his people. Every reader understands why God is love. The book also explains why God’s righteousness is immeasurable. Christians should follow God’s words and promises in order to see his kingdom1.
The reader also understands why human beings should never take God’s wrath and hatred for granted. God expects every person to live in accordance with his commandments. Human beings should always be ready to worship God. I have understood why we should embrace these attributes. The practice will make it easier for us to see God’s kingdom.
Evil and sin are common in our world. I have gained new insights about the nature of evil. Evil takes different forms in order to confuse God’s followers. Human beings will encounter evil in their lives. These ideas encourage believers to appreciate Frame’s book. Every believer should use this knowledge in order to have a righteous life. Some forms of evil can affect our beliefs and expectations from God.
The chapter “The Problem of Evil” has equipped me with the best concepts and knowledge about the nature of evil2. According to this book, Christians should always be ready to serve their God. This approach will ensure every person sees God’s kingdom.
The other important attribute is God’s knowledge. God knows every about our universe. God is aware of the past, the future, and the present. His Lordship is something outstanding in this world. Human beings have always ignored God’s teachings. Christians have never taken God’s knowledge and wisdom seriously. The reader should use this chapter in order to embrace the best ideas and practices.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The approach will ensure every person benefits from God’s knowledge3. God can use this knowledge to guide or punish humankind. The book is a useful source of knowledge towards a religious life. The book goes further to analyze God’s will and power. I now understand what God can do. I also understand why God wants every person to be happy. God’s will is to rescue humankind and make him happy.
God has always been faithful. God has always kept his promises. John Frame gives some of the best ideas towards understanding God’s expectations. I am looking forward to use this knowledge as a believer. Such insights will make it easier for me to realize my religious goals.
According to the author, God is the Lord of all time. Christians should use the concept of futurism to embrace every good practice. The ideas obtained from this chapter encourage every Christian to work hard in order to see God’s kingdom4. The author also discusses new concepts such as futurism and process theology (PT). I will use these teachings to make the best decisions about my religious life.
The author also explains how God has established his position in the universe. He created the universe and humankind. This explains why he has gained the best reputation. God’s glory is immeasurable and timeless. Christians should embrace these ideas whenever making their religious decisions. Christians should understand the position of God before committing themselves to him5.
Such teachings have strengthened my beliefs as a Christian. I now understand why God will always be my redeemer. The book goes further to analyze the concept of the trinity. I have gained new memory verses (MVs) to use whenever reading the Holy Bible.
Such verses explain why Jesus Christ and the Holy Spirit form the Holy Trinity. I will always use this information to strengthen my religious faith. The Holy Trinity also plays a critical role towards forming the Lordship of God. The author has supported the above ideas and discussions using the best verses from the Holy Bible.
Conclusion Christians should use this book in order to establish the best relationships with their God. The author uses the best biblical verses to support his arguments. I will use these concepts to establish a better relationship with my God. God has always supported his people.
We will write a custom Critical Writing on “Systematic Theology: An Introduction to Christian Belief” by John M. Frame specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More God has also kept his promises. God expects every human being to worship and respect him. Such ideas will play a major role towards supporting my spiritual knowledge and growth. Human beings should read these chapters in order to become better and responsible Christians.
Reference List Frame, John. Systematic Theology: An Introduction to Christian Belief. New Jersey, NJ: P
Sustainability and Slums Problem Solution Essay essay help: essay help
Introduction Sustainable development is one of the core strategies of development adopted by many countries across the world. Although this awareness has reached that level, sustainability was not considered profoundly in the past. In that time, people focused on economic development without considering other crucial aspects such as environmental awareness, sociology and humanity.
The introduction of sustainability closed that gap by developing initiatives that integrate the three aspects. In the modern world, governments are dedicating their efforts towards sustainable development in sectors such as real estate management, infrastructural development and health issues. In essence, they focused profoundly on real estate since it was one of the vital sectors of economic development.
However, the authorities experience many challenges because the increasing population has led to high demand of rental houses. As a result, the worldwide emergence of slums has posed economic, health, social and environmental threats.
In fact, slums have affected many countries such as the UK, the USA, India, China and most countries in Africa. Bearing in mind that slums have emerged extensively, this paper seeks to create a sustainability agenda in relation to four main aspects, including health, economy, environment, and social factors of sustainability.
Development of Sustainability Agenda in Real Estates Slums contravene the ideologies of sustainable development in many ways. The life that people experience in slums is barely sustainable in regard to the aspects such as economy, health, sociology and environmental awareness. This implies that there is a need to develop the sustainability agenda in the slums.
In the light of developing the sustainability agenda, this paper seeks to elucidate the sustainability in relation to the four mentioned aspects. Under each aspect of sustainability, the discussion will touch the expectation of sustainability, the policies that focus on the issues, the problems experienced in comparison to those policies, and the solutions to those afflictions.
Health Health Concerns in Sustainable Development
While thinking about the sustainability agenda in the slums, one of the most critical aspects that must be considered is the condition of health within the residences. In accordance to the principles of sustainability, development must focus on creating a healthy society. In other words, development cannot be realised when the society is unhealthy.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This implies that development of sustainable agenda in slums must purport good health among the residents. It introduces the aspect of purporting development that focuses on people’s satisfaction. This development does not concentrate on building prestigious houses or infrastructure only. Instead, it focuses on satisfying the needs of people holistically.
As a result, it seeks to reduce morbidity, purport good health, and strengthen people’s relationships within their residences. Failure to purport these aspects could prevent the realisation of development.
Moreover, development should neither isolate humanity nor compromise the needs of human beings. In line with this principle, there are various policies that have been developed to attain sustainable health in the real estate as discussed in the next paragraph.
Additionally, health concerns are conjoined to the principle of a scientific approach to issues. It states that sustainable development should be based on strong scientific evidence (Earleywine 2002). In this light, decisions on whether or not to implement a policy should be inspired by strong scientific evidence. This implies that decisions should not be based on myths, misdirected theories and speculations.
A detailed scientific evaluation should be conducted before introducing any policy or building any infrastructure. This ideology is evident in the real estate sector where scientific evidence is required in order to determine the appropriateness of using some building materials.
For instance, the government of the USA conducts profound research in order to determine the appropriateness of paints supplied by foreign manufacturers. This undertaking helps the country to avoid harmful paints that could cause health problems. In this regard, some paints have been prohibited because they contain ingredients that release bad odour in houses (Cacace
Whole Foods Market Strategic Analysis Analytical Essay scholarship essay help
Company Background Headquartered in Austin, Texas, Whole Foods Market Inc. is a publicly traded American food supermarket chain, which specializes in the sale of natural as well as organic foods. The firm was established in 1980. Specifically, the incorporation trades in grocery, meat, poultry, bakery, beer, wine as well as body, floral and pet products.
Over the years, maintenance and adherence to quality standards in the industry have formed the cornerstone of the firm’s operation. The firm operates in over 300 stores in the United States, Canada and the United Kingdom (Whole Foods Market, 2012).
Values of the Firm Whole Foods Market Inc. conducts and operations are based on the provision of the highest quality natural as well as organic produce. Besides, gratification and captivation of consumers through meeting the expectation of clients are also core values of the firm. Additionally, wealth creation through profits and growth via voluntary exchanges with guests is a significant value of the firm.
Moreover, the corporation engages in environmental stewardship through supporting sustainable agriculture, participating in recycling programs along with encouraging environmentally sound cleaning programs.
The philosophy of mutual dynamism and the abilities of team members are essential for the success of the firm (Whole Foods Market, 2012). As such, Whole Foods Market Inc. inspires contentment and distinction of the team members.
Mission and Vision The firm’s mission is centered on the stimulation of liveliness along with the comfort of every individual by offering the highest quality, least processed, most flavorful and naturally preserved foods. On the other hand, the vision of the enterprise entails becoming the nationwide trademark, which is indistinguishable with natural and organic foods in addition to growing into the finest food chain store.
The definition of the firm’s mission encompasses the slogan of ‘Whole Foods’, ‘Whole People’ and ‘Whole Planet’. In principle, ‘Whole Foods’ indicate that the firm obtains products both locally and internationally from small and distinctively committed food specialists. ‘Whole People’ entails that the firm’s team is made up of qualified individuals.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Regarding ‘Whole Planet’, the corporation acknowledges the existence of an association amongst individual lives, communities along with the environment. Essentially, ensuring a sustainable future characterized by human resourcefulness, multiplicity along with individual choice forms the basis of the firm’s vision (Whole Foods Market, 2012).
Current Set of Strategic Goals Provision of Healthy Products to Clients
The fundamental tactical goal of operations encompasses the provision of products that have no additives, oil and sugar as well as other chemical elements, which are normally present in treated foods. In other words, the firm aims to offer natural foods that have low calorie levels. Over the last two decades, the firm has continued to encourage naturally raised meat along with poultry products.
The corporation has also been involved in enlightening clients on the side effects of added hormones and antibiotics in products. As such, the firm in conjunction with ranchers and farm producers undertakes the development of hormone and antibiotic-free products for clients to purchase.
In fact, the enterprise ensures that manufacturers deliver goods that meet the quality standards of the firm (Hill
Nike Penetration Strategy in Brazil Essay college essay help near me
International market expansion is the primary mode of entry for Nike in Brazil. It allows the company to get an opportunity to locate in a region that has low production and labor costs, locate close to its target market and provide an opportunity for profit maximization.
Historically, most American corporations seeking to enter world markets, especially in the emerging economies, use an international market expansion approach (Daniels, Radebaugh,
Albaco Shoes Ltd Export Strategy Report (Assessment) college essay help online: college essay help online
Introduction The purpose of this paper is to develop an export strategy for the board of directors of Albaco Shoes Ltd. Albaco is a leading manufacturer and distributor of footwear in Albania.
Thus, the export strategy is expected to enable it to export its products to Norway. SWOT analysis will be used to assess the company’s ability to export to Norway. In addition, Porter’s five forces framework will be used to assess the suitability of Norway as an export destination.
Brief Synopsis of the Issue Globalisation continues to enhance trade between countries through economic liberalisation policies. Norway and Albania have focused on liberalising their economies through removal of tariff and non-tariff barriers to trade. This helps the countries to create jobs and increase the growth rate of their economies (Carbaugh 2012, p. 67).
Albania signed a free trade agreement with the European Free Trade Association (EFTA) in 2009 (AIDA 2014). Since Norway is a member of the EFTA, Albaco can access its market without facing entry barriers such as high import taxes. Norway is a developed country with a high per capita GDP, whereas Albania is a developing country (IMF 2014).
However, Albania has an absolute advantage in producing footwear because it can access cheap labour and raw materials (Buxey 2013, pp. 100-133). By contrast, over 50% of footwear products in Norway are imported from other countries. Thus, exporting to Norway is a huge growth opportunity that will enable Albaco to increase its revenue and share of the global market.
Recommendations The company should consider the following strategies to export its products. First, it should adopt the direct exporting strategy by collaborating with independent distributors in Norway to sell its products. This strategy will reduce Alaco’s operating costs since activities such as marketing will be shifted to distributors (Hamilton
Does Blogging Increase the Motivation of Boys in Class Dissertation writing essay help
Table of Contents Implementation of the Research Action
Conclusion and Recommendations
Implementation of the Research Action My interest in this area is to prove the hypothesis of the research that the use of blogging in Design and Technology will increase boys’ motivation, diversify their knowledge, and improve their literacy in school. In this regard, the featured research questions that revolve around the use of blogging as a pedagogical approach will play a crucial role in providing a strong basis for the research.
In this research, I would be investigating how different people tend to view the use of blogging as a useful tool that can be used to boost boys’ understanding in design and technology classrooms.
In order to achieve this goal, I conducted an extensive research on various sources of information that included, but were not limited to, internet sources, government publications, and interviews on students and teachers from different learning institutions.
The main reason behind this research was to determine whether blogging can serve as a pedagogical approach that can be used to promote boys’ understanding when it comes to design and technology. More importantly, this research will help to pave way for future studies in the field.
As it is shown in the methodology section, this research was carried out using various research approaches to determine the impact that blogs and blogging activities would have on boys’ understanding in school, especially when it comes to matters of design and technology.
For instance, I made great use of the World Wide Web to identify similar studies which had been conducted previously and see what the researchers behind those works had to say in regard with the research hypothesis. The findings and observations made by other researchers on this subject matter as it was revealed through various publications would serve as a big inspiration towards this research.
Moreover, I also dedicated sometime to search and analyse various government publications on the subject, especially ones that offered important guidelines on the use of blogs and other social media websites for pedagogical purposes.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More A primary survey on the policies of about ten learning institutions was also conducted to determine whether the use of blogs had a positive impact on boys when it comes to class work.
It is always wise for researchers to focus their studies on various subjects, considering the dangers that can be associated with a single study as far as the credibility of outcome is concerned (Luo 2010). In this regard, it was necessary to investigate various schools and individuals from different regions.
Among the various research approaches used in this study, surveys on learning institutions and individuals proved to be the most suitable and reliable method to apply here owing to a number of reasons. For example, through this approach, the participants in the study were engaged in a direct way and this helped to minimise cases of biased information or responses on the subject.
More importantly, institutions and people from different regions were interviewed, and this increased the diversity of the study, thus helping me to gain a deeper insight of how the idea of using blogging for pedagogical purposes was perceived in different regions and by people of varied cultural tastes.
In this regard, I visited various schools in different regions whereby I interviewed teachers and students regarding their take on the impacts of blogging on the literacy of boys.
Quantitative and qualitative approaches were used for the research. These approaches included focus group interviews on students and semi-structured interviews on members of the teaching staff, whereby the participants were required to give their views on whether blogging helped to increase boys’ motivation and literacy in class.
Simple random technique was applied for this exercise whereby the participants would be chosen from large groups of students from selected schools. The interview for the students was boy-focused, considering the fact that this was a study to determine the impact of blogging on male students, and it featured closed-ended questions.
We will write a custom Dissertation on Does Blogging Increase the Motivation of Boys in Class specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In this case, participants are required to respond with a simple ‘yes’ or ‘no’ to various survey questions in regard with the subject matter (Krause 2002). The feedback received from the students was directly filled on the structured survey templates. As Leech (2002) observes, ‘semi-structured interviews are usually simple and direct’ and this enabled the students to respond to the survey questions without any complications.
More importantly, this approach provided the students with an equal opportunity to give relevant information, thus proving to be more helpful in determining the accuracy of the acquired feedback.
On the other hand, open-ended questions were used to interview teachers and other persons in the learning institutions who were mature enough to offer deeper answers to the interviews. A number of themes on the use of blogs and blogging in schools, and how these would tend to increase boy’s motivation and literacy or ways in which it will tend to affect their studies otherwise were widely explored.
The interview on teachers was guided by a framework of key ideas and themes which had been prepared earlier on. Possibly, the feedback received from the teachers was of greater importance, since it elaborated more on the questions.
The questions meant for the teachers were a bit general compared with the ones used for the students, and this prompted a two-way communication, thus providing a better understanding of the views given. Through this approach, people can provide reasons for their answers, thus giving a perfect presentation of their opinions (Rapley 2001).
In this regard, it was easy to determine the reasons as to why people agreed or disagreed with the use of blogging for pedagogical purposes. The feedback received was recorded in notebooks for comparison at the end of the exercise. In both cases, the participants were interviewed on the benefits associated with blogging as well as its problems when used as a pedagogical approach.
Results Findings acquired from this study strongly seemed to support the research hypothesis in all aspects. For instance, this was evident from the vast studies that were observed from the World Wide Web, whose findings had indicated a positive impact of blogging on school boys, among other students.
The same observation would be made from the government publications where it was perceived that the use of blogging and other effective social media channels will tend to have significant influence on learners in all levels of education, as long as the platforms were used wisely.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Does Blogging Increase the Motivation of Boys in Class by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More It was also noticeable from the interviews conducted on teachers and students from different schools that blogs play a crucial role in increasing boys’ motivation and literacy in school, particularly in design and technology lessons.
The idea of using blogging as a pedagogical approach was highly supported by majority of those interviewed. Even though some negativity was expressed on blogging, such as it being distractive and unethical when used for pedagogical purposes, the concern about blogs being a powerful tool of communication in today’s educational settings seemed to outweigh the disadvantages expressed.
Considering their ability to enhance students’ social skills and promoting effective learning experiences, blogs are crucial sites that can be of great importance to boys at school (Conole et al. 2008). More importantly, the sites provide the students with opportunities to explore things from a very wide diversity, thus making learning easy, interactive, and more interesting (Cochrane 2010).
As a result of the many benefits that come with blogging, many students and teachers have fully embraced the trend. This was evident from the responses expressed in the interviews conducted on the students and teachers from various learning institutions where most interviewees appeared to support the claim that blogging played a significant role in improving classroom literacy among the boys.
On the question about what they read and write about mostly, many students would chose blogs among other forms of social media. What would be more interesting, however, was the fact that many students don’t just read blogs, but they also own their own blogs where they can directly interact with other bloggers from across the world, particularly in matters to do with education.
Based on the observations made by majority of the teachers, lessons meant for students can be executed from just anywhere through the power of blogging, and this ensures that students are taken through their learning needs in a more effective and efficient manner. There is no doubt that blogging is an effective way that can be used to motivate boys in school (Ellison
Audience Analysis: US / Stafford Research Paper essay help free: essay help free
Table of Contents View of the Audience on the Written Profile
Community Stakeholders Analysis
Recommendations to Improve the Profile
View of the Audience on the Written Profile Stafford is an appropriate county for living and doing business. According to Chamber of Commerce, Stafford is a community with diverse business environment (Virginia, 2013). It is necessary to note that the profile provides extensive information on major spheres of people’s life.
It is mentioned that the community has a developed infrastructure and all groups of people can be happy there. Thus, business people can find lots of business opportunities in such spheres as industry, farming, real estate, health care, entertainment and so on. It is stressed that the community is famous for its highly professional workforce.
The profile also sheds light on numerous educational opportunities for young people and children. Apart from this, there is information on a variety of recreational facilities available in the community as well as certain non-profit organisations which focus on numerous issues.
There is little information on cultural diversity in the region, though. It is possible to assume that the community stakeholders are people of all ages and pertaining to middle-class.
Community Stakeholders Analysis To understand whether the profile provided corresponds to the real data, it is necessary to implement a brief analysis of the community stakeholders involving demographics, geographics, psychographics, sociographics, usergraphics, and webographics. The county’s population is not large, almost 137,000 (Stafford County, 2014).
It is necessary to note that almost 65% of the population are between 18 and 65 years old, almost 75% are white and more than 90% have high school or higher education (Stafford County, 2014). Therefore, it is possible to conclude that the population is not culturally diverse. It is clear that the vast majority of population are employed adults with high income.
The community has a favourable location for business as it is situated near one of main transportation arteries and is near such cities as Washington and Richmond (Virginia, 2013).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The number of recreational facilities (including parks, sport centres, art centres, and theatres and so on) shows that people in the county have active lifestyles and invest their time in their physical as well as cultural development. They also value education as the county is famous for its educational establishments and a huge number of people having high school or higher education.
There are loads of non-profit organizations in Stafford and this fact suggests that another important value of people living in the county is being responsible and helping the community to develop (Stafford, VA volunteering opportunities, 2014).
This value can also be traced with the help of webographics as there are a variety of blogs on social issues (Fredericksburg blogs, 2014). Notably, users reveal their concern about others and try to come up with solutions to a wide range of issues which are apparent in the county as well as more distance areas.
It is also possible to note that a brief analysis of Facebook pages of people living in the county will draw a picture of an active educated person who participates in the community’s life. People often have numerous friends in their Facebook accounts (or other social networks). This fact may also suggest that there are quite close ties within the community.
Recommendations to Improve the Profile It is possible to consider two recommendations which could improve the existing profile. First of all, it is possible to pay more attention to volunteering and activities aimed at development of communities. The profile includes this information but it does not reflect the real situation in the county.
The second improvement should address the way to promote educational establishments. One of community’s values is education and this can be transferred to other areas. The profile should have more detailed information on educational establishments and a variety of training opportunities for different groups of people.
Rationale The new profile will provide more precise information about the community and, hence, will be more helpful for its readers. People reading the profile will be able to make up their minds whether they will benefit from living, doing business or training in the county. More so, the profile is a way to attract new people and the two improvements suggested can fit this purpose.
We will write a custom Research Paper on Audience Analysis: US / Stafford specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Admittedly, the US society is now paying more attention to education and the government as well as each American invest time and money into this sphere. More and more young people decide to continue their studies, which is a favourable trend for the development of the US society. The community can be regarded as an illustration of this success.
Finally, close ties in community can help people feel at home right after their moving in. Close ties are always good for business as they contribute to promotion of services and products.
Besides, being responsible and active is a nationwide trend and young people are ready to become a part of a larger movement. Clearly, people should know about these two facets of life in the county in order to make the right decision and start their life or business in Stafford, Virginia.
Reference List Fredericksburg blogs. (2014). Web.
Stafford county, Virginia. (2014). Web.
Stafford, VA volunteering opportunities. (2014). Web.
Virginia. (2013). Web.
An Analysis of Tarmac Group Limited Report essay help online free: essay help online free
Executive summary This paper analyses the human resource department at Tarmac Group Limited. The analysis focuses on Tarmac’s strategic human resource management approach, and notes that the company has lived up to the theoretical conceptualizations of effective SHRM.
The paper notes that SHRM includes hiring the right employees, planning, forecasting HR needs, arranging for training and development programs, and managing recruitment and selection processes.
Further, the paper notes that Tarmac links its human resources to the company’s objectives through several strategies. Such include hiring the right employees and enhancing their performance by enrolling them in training programs.
The paper identifies Tarmac’s mission and vision and indicates how HR has been strategically used to ensure that the mission and vision are attained. The paper also notes that the company uses different methods to attract, recruit, and select the right talent based on current and future HR needs.
Advertising job vacancies in relevant publications and on the company’s website are some of the dominant ways through which Tarmac attracts qualified employees. Employee retention at Tarmac is done through a combination of good employee relations, motivation, and activities that bolster their satisfaction in the job.
As Part of SHRM, Tarmac engages in performance management. Additionally, the leadership approach at Tarmac has a positive impact on employees’ job satisfaction. Moreover, the culture at Tarmac is developmental since it revolves around developing employees and the company.
The paper argues that major transitions at Tarmac were inspired by the need to be remain competitive.The paper concludes by noting that Tarmac has linked its different HRM processes with its vision. The paper thus indicates that the company has successfully implemented SHRM.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Introduction This paper provides a human resource department analysis of Tarmac Group Limited (hereunder Tarmac). Tarmac is rated as the largest supplier of construction materials in the United Kingdom. Since 2013, the company has been operating as Lafarge Tarmac.
This analysis will, however, concentrate on the human resource management practices at Tarmac up until 2013 mainly because of the availability of information about the company. The analysis will focus on Tarmac’s strategic HR approach, and notes that the company has lived up to the theoretical conceptualizations of effective SHRM.
SHRM at Tarmac As a leading supplier of building products and quarry materials in the UK, Tarmac realized early enough that the success of its business depended on hiring people who had the right skills for the job (The Times 100 145). Tarmac has a core belief that indicates that “people make the difference and enable the business to be the leader in its chosen markets” (The Times 100 145).
Additionally, it recognizes the HR function as one of the key areas that supports operations in the company. In Tarmac, HR’s roles include planning staff requirements, forecasting HR needs, and managing the recruitment and selection processes (The Times 100 145).
Additionally, once people are hired, the HR department ensures that they enrol in professional development programs that include training and participating in team building efforts (The Times 100 145).
A strategic approach to HRM refers to “a managerial process requiring human resource policies and practices to be linked with the strategic objectives of the organization” (Bratton and Gold 38). At Tarmac, the strategic approach to HRM is evident in the manner that the organization links its human resources to the company’s main objective.
The objective is identified as delivering “the highest value from our resources for our customers, communities, employees and investors” (Business Case Studies 1). Linking its human resource to the foregoing objective has led Tarmac to adopt several measures that include hiring specialist employees to handle different roles in the company.
We will write a custom Report on An Analysis of Tarmac Group Limited specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Such include marketers, customer service representatives, information technology specialists, financial accountants and management accountants. Tarmac also creates programs that enhance employees’ capabilities (e.g. through engaging, developing and motivating employees) (Business Case Studies 1).
Tarmac’s vision and mission Tarmac indicates its vision as ‘achieving the exception’. To link its human resource to the foregoing vision, the company created a plan through which employees could make different contributions to the company.
The plan is indicated in figure 1 below. As indicated in the plan, employees are engaged in everything, including managing assets, reducing costs, developing markets, working as a team, and acting responsibly to ensure safe and sustainable business practices.
Figure 1: A plan detailing employees’ contributions at Tarmac
Source: (Business Case Studies 2)
Development and learning opportunities To contribute to the larger organizational vision, Tarmac understands the role of development and learning for its human resource. It is noted that the company has a motivational approach that makes all objectives simple and clear so that they are easily understood by the employees (Business Case Studies 2). Additionally, Tarmac has training programs that help employees acquire new skills and improve on existing skills.
The foregoing is done with the intention of helping employees perform their duties more effectively. Lastly, Tarmac recognizes and rewards employees for their performances (Business Case Studies 2). The development and learning opportunities in Tarmac can therefore include training opportunities and performance measurement programs that recognize well-performing employees.
Tarmac’s approach to resourcing Tarmac approach to resourcing its HR is pegged on the organization’s larger need to plan its workforce for current and future needs (Business Case Studies 4). The company thus starts by identifying employment needs (see figure 2 below), and then sets in place strategies for attracting, recruiting and selecting the right talent.
Not sure if you can write a paper on An Analysis of Tarmac Group Limited by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Figure 2: The resourcing process at Tarmac
Source (Business Case Studies 4).
Advertising employment opportunities at Tarmac As evident from figure 2 above, Tarmac advertises employment opportunities after providing a job description and specifying the kind of people and the skills most suited for the jobs. It has been noted that the main channels of advertising used by Tarmac include relevant publications mainly in the construction industry. Such include the Construction Weekly Journal (Business Case Studies 4).
Another advertising avenue for Tarmac is its website, https://tarmaccareers.com/. The choice of advertising medium is made because they target people who have specific interest in the construction industry. The construction weekly is, for example a journal that appeals to an audience that is interested in what is happening in the construction industry.
More general employment opportunities are advertised in magazines such as ‘Personnel Today’ (Business Case Studies 1). The foregoing is because Tarmac also targets people who may not have an interest in the construction industry, but whose skills and expertise may be valuable for the company’s back office operations.
Performance management at Tarmac Tarmac encourages all its employees to embrace a personal development plan as indicated in figure 3 below.
Figure 3: The personal development plan at Tarmac
Source: (Business Case Studies 5)
The last step in the development plan seeks to determine how an employee measures their success. From figure 3 above, it is evident that employees need to pursue skills and/or behaviours that not only benefit their development, but also help Tarmac in attaining its business objectives.
Employees’ personal initiative notwithstanding, Tarmac (and especially in its current state as Lafarge Tarmac) has taken performance management a step further by contracting an independent company named Investors in People (IIP) to review its performance (Lafarge Tarmac Contracting 1-2).
IIP’s mandate is to review employees’ performance, improve employee engagement and recommend management and leadership approaches that are more suitable in motivating employees to be better performers in their respective jobs.
HR leadership style at Tarmac At Tarmac, managers have a responsibility to set up organizational development teams, which promote learning and development in the company. The foregoing is done through coordinating training programs and fostering a culture where employees are aware of the need to improve themselves perpetually (The Times 100 147).
As leaders, managers have to agree (in consultation with employees) on a set of key performance indicators for use in relation to identified targets (The Times 100 147).
It is the managers’ role to help employees meet set KPIs, through identifying and setting priorities, coaching and leading employees, encouraging new ideas and actions of employees, and emphasizing the need to use skills and capabilities that employees possess to attain set targets (The Times 100 148). The leadership approach that is used in Tarmac is cited as having a positive impact on employees’ job satisfaction.
Specifically, the leadership approach shows appreciation to employees’ contribution to the company. At the same time, the HR manager has a role of leading the business managers in the company in the application of human resource policies (The Times 100 148).
The foregoing not only helps in attaining consistency in Tarmac’s HR processes, but also enhances the development of partnerships across business teams in the organization. Effectively, such partnerships ensure that all teams work towards the attainment of the company’s vision and objectives.
The culture at Tarmac The culture at Tarmac can be defined as developmental since it revolves around a specific focus which is identified as “setting clear objectives, employee development, and recognition and award” (Truss, Mankin and Kelliher 89).
The foregoing focus has led to a culture of trust and teamwork, since managers and employees work together to ensure that objectives are clearly understood and that the right processes are adopted in order to attain those objectives. Additionally, employees have learnt to trust that Tarmac wants the best for them (at least career wise) through the learning-oriented culture that emphasizes the need for training and retraining.
Recognition and reward is an approach that is further used to enhance the trusting relationship that exists between Tarmac and its employees (Business Case Studies 4). On one hand, Tarmac trusts that employees who are recognized and rewarded for their input in the company will stay longer in their jobs. On the other hand, the recognition and rewards makes employees more satisfied in their jobs and as such, they stay longer.
Major transitions at Tarmac Since its establishment in 1903, Tarmac has no doubt gone through many changes. In the last decade, however, the company made major transitions in ownership, when it was first sold to Anglo American, and later when it got into a joint venture with Lafarge. In 2010, the company underwent restructuring which was intended to make it more responsive to prevailing market needs, and also got a new chief executive officer (Tarmac 1).
The change in ownership and leadership marked a major transition in Tarmac, and understandably, employees needed assurance that their jobs would be stable and/or even better. Among the strategies that the HR department at Tarmac adopted in order to get through the transition included building engagement with employees, and sustaining “employee motivation and morale at a time of change” (Tarmac 1).
In order to uphold the team culture that was dominant in the organisation, the company contracted an external consultant who helped with team management and development. In the end, the teams and individual employees sailed through the transition successfully.
Although it is hard to pinpoint what triggered the transition, getting ready for a more competitive market is one possible reason why Tarmac got into a joint venture with Lafarge, got a new CEO and even restructured its operations.
Change implementation at Tarmac From the start, Tarmac had realized that if successful change was to occur, employees needed to be consulted, and made to agree with the goals intended to be attained during and after the changes (Tarmac 3). The foregoing would take leadership, which Tarmac offered through properly coordinating the employees.
The implementation of change is therefore indicated as starting with proper coordination within Tarmac’s management. Next, employees were made to understand the goals of change. The foregoing was done in order to attain their support (or buy-in) during the change process. Next, managers ensured that changes were reflected in work teams, which had to conform to new strategies.
Finally, the company adopted methods of measuring progress in different functional and operating areas. For example, employees would be asked to indicate who their new CEO was and what his vision for the company was. Ideally, the vision of the company had not changed when the new CEO took over leadership.
The foregoing strategy was meant to ensure that employees remain aware that the change in leadership did not translate into any changes in what the organization wanted to achieve in the market.
Working environment offered by Tarmac Tarmac arguably offers a supportive working environment, which is characterized by training and development programs as well activities meant to boost the morale of employees. Something worth noting is that the company offers its employees training on safety (Tarmac 3), and this can be interpreted to mean that the company does indeed care about the welfare of its workforce.
Employee feedback is also another strategy that the company uses to gauge its working environment by allowing employees to voice their opinions on matters that are of interest to them and the company (Tarmac 3).
Working in teams has also enhanced the supportive work environment, since issues are dealt with in groups, and with the leadership that is offered by team leaders. In cases where a problem proves too hard to handle in a group setting, it is escalated to the department manager, who then provides direction on how best to handle the issue.
Discussion The analysis above indicates the different aspects of the strategic human resource management approach adopted by Tarmac. As noted in the introductory part of this paper, SHRM requires an organization to link and /or align its HR practices and policies to organizational objectives.
At Tarmac, such linking has been done through ensuring that all departmental managers understand the HRM policies and procedures, and that they implement them in a manner that ensures that they contribute to the overall organizational vision of ‘achieving the exception’.
Achieving the exception is a blanket term that indicates Tarmac’s mission not only to become a market leader, but also be a company that satisfies all its stakeholders. The stakeholders include its employees, shareholders, customers, and the general public, especially those who use facilities constructed using the inputs obtained from Tarmac (Tarmac 2).
Tarmac has also linked its HRM policies and procedures with its vision by ensuring that employees remain focused on what the larger organizational vision is. By so doing, employees always gauge their contribution to the organization based on the impact they have towards the realisation of the overall organisational vision.
Arguably, it is possible that activities that do not contribute to Tarmac’s intention to be a market leader in its provision of satisfactory products and services to its customers are discarded. Activities that do not enhance shareholder value are also discarded, while policies and procedures that are not employee-friendly are also dismissed.
Conclusion Strategic human resource management intends to link the HRM aspect of a firm with its larger vision and objectives. In the analysis above, Tarmac is seen to have linked its different HRM processes with its vision. It must however be underscored that the analysis herein is based on publicly accessible information regarding the company.
The foregoing notwithstanding, Tarmac can be regarded as a firm that has successfully implemented SHRM, and perhaps that explains why the company was regarded as the leading supplier of construction materials in the UK prior to its merger with Lafarge.
Works Cited Bratton, John and Jeff Gold. Human Resource Management: Theory and Practice. Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan, 2007. Print.
Business Case Studies. Developing a Human Resource Strategy: a Tarmac Case Study. n.d. Web.
Lafarge Tarmac Contracting. IIP is a Key Way to Achieve Feedback on Organisational Effectiveness. 2014. Web.
Tarmac. Concrete Results. 2012. Web.
The Times 100. “Tarmac – How Roles and Functions Contribute to Organisational Performance.” The Times Newspaper Limited. 2009. Web.
Truss, Catherine, David Mankin and Clare Kelliher. Strategic Human Resource Management. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2012. Print.
The Recommendations of the American Welding Association Descriptive Essay scholarship essay help
Table of Contents Confined Spaces
Chromium and Nickel Fumes
Thoriated Tungsten Electrodes
Confined Spaces Confined spaces has been defined by Mahmoudi (2009) as a working environment with only one or limited points of entry and exit. Confined spaces have also been defined by other scholars as working environments which are poorly ventilated. There are recommendations on how such confined spaces should be designed, and the safety measures that should be taken, as indicated in chapter thirteen of the coursework book.
The recommendations made in this book closely compares with the recommendations made by the American Welding Association. One of the common recommendations that have been made by this association and the book is that people working in confined spaces should have a special training and a permit before they can be allowed to enter or work in such settings.
According to American Welding Society (2013b), there have been cases in the past where people perish in confined spaces because of limited knowledge on how to deal with emergency.
In confined spaces, it is always very important to know how to respond to emergency because it could be the difference between life and death. People with limited knowledge about working in such environments may make rush decisions that may harm them or others within the working environment.
The association and the book give a similar recommendation about the need to keep away any unauthorized individuals from the confined spaces. It is not possible to determine when a disaster would strike. In case of a disaster, it is always difficult to rescue such unauthorized individuals.
Sometimes their reaction to an emergency may jeopardize the ability to rescue other people who are within the confined space, leading to casualties that would have been easily avoided.
Both sources agree that all the people working in a confined space should be very alert to a sign of trouble within their working environment. Any unusual movements or sound should be investigated immediately, and during such cases, most of the workers should start evacuating from the facility.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Effective communication is another common recommendation that is found in the two sources. It is clearly stated that at any time when workers are within the confined spaces, there should be a clear communication system by voice or sight. This is important to ensure that whenever there is an emergency in the workplace, the possibility that some workers will not be informed is eliminated.
It means that all workers can easily be informed of the dangers in case the facility is under any form of threat. The two sources also propose that any confined space must have emergency exists that can be used in case of occurrence of unexpected accident that needs speedy escape. This may include extra doors that are not in use under normal circumstances, but can be opened whenever there is an emergency.
The doors should be easy to open by people within or outside the confined space. Finally, these two sources agree on the fact that there should be trained personnel on rescue and evacuation manning the facility at every moment whenever there are employees within the facility.
The attendants should be responsible for ensuring that whenever there is an emergency within the confined space, an appropriate communication is made to everyone so that they can leave the facility as soon as possible to avoid casualties. In case there is something that he or she can do to help those who are in danger, then he or she should move with speed and help them before the disaster can strike.
The recommendations in the book and those given by the American Welding Association had some minor variations. For instance, the American Welding Association recommends that all the confined spaces should have special gadget that would continuously monitor air quality to ensure that poisonously gases and fumes do not exceed the specified limits. This recommendation is conspicuously missing in the book.
Chromium and Nickel Fumes Chromium and nickel fumes are very poisonous if they are inhaled for a prolonged period. However, welders and other industrial workers are forced to work in environments where the threat of exposure to these fumes is real.
The American Welding Association- and many other organizations in this country- has proposed ways through which such fumes should be managed, and how people working in such environments should behave in order to ensure that they are protected from the hazards of the fumes.
We will write a custom Critical Writing on The Recommendations of the American Welding Association specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The report by American Welding Society (2013a) gives a series of recommendations on how the danger from these fumes can be controlled, and their recommendations closely compare to that given by other reliable sources of information.
One of the recommendations that are common in most of the sources analyzed in this research is that anyone working in an environment where there is a risk of chromium and nickel fumes should make a personal effort not to breathe the gas. There should be a concerted effort by the concerned individuals to keep their head away from the fumes that occur sporadically within the environment.
As Mahmoudi (2009) puts it, the protection against chromium and nickel fumes starts with an individual’s effort. American Welding Association and the above source both agree that there should be proper ventilations within working environment that are prone to production of chromium or nickel fumes.
This is to ensure that whenever these poisonous gases escape from the system by mistake, they can easily be diffused out of the working environment easily.
They also recommend that there should be a properly fitted exhaust that would ensure that chromium and nickel gases in the system are properly eliminated without penetrating into the working space. This is meant to ensure that people are protected from the fumes that may otherwise leak and affect them without their knowledge.
According to Asfahl, Hammer and Price (2004), it is important to note that sometimes the gases may leak and contaminate the air within the workplace without the knowledge of the people who are concerned. It may not be easy to determine if the level of chromium or nickel fumes in the workplace is within or above the accepted limits.
The American Welding Association recommends a regular sampling and testing of air within the workplace on a regular basis, especially whenever the air quality becomes questionable. When this takes place, measures should always be put in place to ensure that workers remain protected from the fumes just in case the test confirms that the levels of the poisonous fumes are above the accepted range.
The association also recommends that exposure to chromium and nickel fumes should be kept as low as it can be possible. This is to ensure that people are protected from these dangerous fumes when they are working within the facility.
Not sure if you can write a paper on The Recommendations of the American Welding Association by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The research by Asfahl, Hammer and Price (2004) say that employees working in an environment where they are exposed to chromium or nickel fumes should frequently take fresh milk, especially when leaving the workplace. This is to help dilute the effect of the poisonous gas in the body. This recommendation is missing in the information given by the American Welding Association.
Mahmoudi (2009) says that government, through the right departments, should make regular inspection on facilities that are prone to the production of chromium and nickel fumes to ensure that they are adhering to the standard rules and procedure of dealing with the poisonous fumes within their working environment.
Those found to have ignored some of the set policies should be subjected to serious disciplinary actions which may include fines or termination of a company’s operating license. Sometimes it may even be necessary to sue those who were expected to be responsible in this safety management.
This will help promote a sense of responsibility among the concerned stakeholders. It will deter acts of carelessness among the owners of these facilities, their supervisors, and other employees who should be managing the fumes. This recommendation is missing among those proposed by the American Welding Association.
Thoriated Tungsten Electrodes Thorium is one of the most hazardous substances within the working environment. According to American Welding Society, (2014), “Thoriated tungsten electrodes contain thorium, a radioactive material that can pose health and environmental risks at elevated exposure levels.” As stated by this organization, thorium is a radioactive material.
It emits gamma and beta radiations which can pose a series of health problems to the internal organs of the body. According to Mahmoudi (2009), sometimes it is possible for one to inhale particles of dust during the grinding process that may expose him or her further to this poisonous gas.
Although dangers of exposure to thorium is minimal during the welding process, Asfahl, Hammer and Price (2004) say that radioactive dust is always created during the process of grinding thoriated tungsten electrodes.
When this poisonous gas is inhaled or ingested, it may cause serious damage to various internal organs, including the lungs. When using thoriated tungsten electrodes, Asfahl, Hammer and Price (2004) advise that it would necessary to understand the source of thorium exposure.
According to Mahmoudi (2009), a radioactive dust is always created during the process of grinding thoriated tungsten electrodes. This dust is rich in thorium, a highly poisonous substance that may cause serious health problem if it is inhaled in a substantial quantity. This is one of the hazardous substances that the American Welding Association has been dealing with in order to protect the welders.
Thorium has been suspected to be the cause of lung cancer, although this claim is yet to be confirmed by medical researchers. Its radioactive nature is known to have serious medical complications, especially when one is exposed to it for a long period. The association has made a series of recommendations that are focused on ensuring that welders are protected from this harmful substance.
At this stage, it would be necessary to determine some of the control measures that would be appropriate. The first control that the researcher proposes is the use of thorium-free tungsten electrodes which would not emit the poisonous dust during the grinding process. The welders should choose tungsten electrodes which contain cerium, zirconium, yttrium, or lanthanum instead of those that contain thorium.
These substances are not as poisonous as thorium. The researcher recommends that information in the safety data sheet should be read by the welders in order to understand the procedures and requirements when using this tungsten electrode.
When the use of thoriated tungsten electrodes cannot be avoided, then it is recommended that an efficient system of collecting dust particles should be used to ensure that they do not pose threat to the welders. It would also be necessary to inspect the ventilation system to ensure that such radioactive dust can be eliminated from the workplace within the shortest time possible.
All the workers who are responsible for the process of grinding the tungsten electrodes should have the knowledge of the dangers that this dust contain, and measures that should be taken to ensure that they remain safe from the poisonous gases.
If possible, they should be regularly trained on how to manage this dust through the use of protective clothing and responsible behavior within such a sensitive working environment. There should be standard procedures set by the relevant government department that will be responsible to ensure that welders are not subjected to dangerous working environment.
The recommendations given by the American Welding Association will have to be implemented by various entities. The individual welders will be expected to ensure that they follow the recommended dress code and behavioral pattern when working in these sensitive environments.
The organizations will need to observe the structural recommendations and the issue about training and qualifications of their employees. The relevant government department will need to ensure that they set the right policies, and have enough officers to ensure that firms follow these policies.
References American Welding Society. (2013a). Chromium and Nickel in Welding Fume. Safety and Health Fact Sheet, 9(4), 1-3.
American Welding Society. (2013b). Hot Work in Confined Spaces. Safety and Health Fact Sheet, 9(11), 1-3.
American Welding Society. (2014). Thoriated Tungsten Electrodes. Safety and Health Fact Sheet, 3(27), 1-2.
Asfahl, C. R., Hammer, W.,
Personality Assessment and Test Classification best college essay help: best college essay help
The methods to assess personality can be discussed as numerous while referring to the variety of tests proposed to draw inferences about the client’s personality traits and psychological state. However, there is the issue which is associated with the necessity to classify tests used by psychologists in order to assess personality.
The terms ‘objective’ and ‘projective’ are traditionally used in practice and theory in order to distinguish between two groups of tests developed to assess personality, and these tests are different in relation to the utilized data and approaches.
Nevertheless, in their article “Advancing Personality Assessment Terminology: Time to Retire “Objective” and “Projective” as Personality Test Descriptors” (2006), Meyer and Kurtz state that it is necessary to avoid using these terms in order to classify the tests because the use of this terminology leads to misunderstanding the nature of tests and expected results (Meyer
Google Corporation in Japan Research Paper scholarship essay help
Introduction Google is a US-based global company with extensive operations around the around. Established in 1998, the tech-giant is among the biggest search engine companies in the world. Although the company specializes in this market, today, it produces other products, such as Gmail, Google-plus, and Google Drive. The company manages these products through more than 1,000,000 servers around the world (Hrones
Marketing Communication Plan: Mobile Native APP Report online essay help
Integration and Innovation Advertisement and social media
Advertisements are very manipulative and use tactics that directly and involuntarily appeal to the mind of the target person. Despite ignorance of the same and disbelief in their effects, advertisements remain complex and significant in choice of products owned by an individual. Usually, advertisements appeal to memory or emotional response (Birdsall
Luxury Travel Services Report essay help online free: essay help online free
Executive Summary A detailed marketing plan for creating awareness about Travel Attache’s luxury travel services in Dubai has been presented in this report. The company will provide an integrated luxury travel package that includes accommodation, travel, entertainment, and tour guide services. The main distinctive feature of the package is that personalized services will be provided to suit each customer’s needs.
The value provided by the package include access to the best tourist destinations, comfortable accommodation in over 200,000 hotels, flexible travel plans, and competitive prices. The targeted customer segments include families, the old, and the youth. The brand will be promoted through advertising, public relations, and loyalty programs. Implementing these strategies will require a budget of $795,000.
Value-based pricing will be used to sell the services. In the first year, the main marketing objective will be to increase sales and market share by 10% and 5% respectively.
In future, the brand can be stretched by introducing luxury gift products such as wristwatches and souvenirs. This can be achieved through the brand image transfer model where the gift products will be associated with the superior characteristics of the travel services.
Introduction This report presents a detailed marketing plan for creating brand awareness for luxury travel services in Dubai. The services will be provided by Travel Attache, which is a leading international luxury travel agency (Travel Attache, 2014). The marketing plan will begin with a situation analysis that will focus on the macro-environmental factors that are likely to affect the demand for luxury travel services in Dubai.
The industry, customer needs, and other brands will also be analyzed. This will be followed by a discussion on the marketing strategy that will be adopted to create brand awareness. The last part of the marketing plan will present the budget and pro-forma income statement for the company.
Situation Analysis Macro-environmental Factors
Rapid growth in per capita GDP is the main economic factor that will positively affect the demand for luxury travel services in Dubai. The GDP of the UAE is expected to grow by 4.4% in 2014 and at an average rate of 4% in the next three years (IMF, 2014).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The number of millionaires in Dubai and other parts of the UAE is expected to increase by 12% in the next three years. These economic trends will boost the demand for luxury travel services.
Changing demographics will affect the type of services that customers will demand due to varying tastes and preferences. For instance, the old are increasingly showing interest in large rooms, whereas the youth are interested in short holidays and memorable travel experiences.
Education is one of the major social factors that influence the demand for luxury travel services. Upscale travelers are often sophisticated and have in-depth knowledge of the products that they need. Thus, players in the industry have to understand the needs of the customers to succeed. Customers are increasingly becoming interested in learning about local cultures as part of their travel experience.
High penetration of smartphone, computers, and the internet is the main technological factor that drives growth in the industry. In the last decade, the internet and mobile phones have emerged as the main delivery channel through which customers purchase luxury travel services.
The stable political environment in the UAE continues to attract foreign direct investment (FDI) in the travel and hospitality industry in Dubai (IMF, 2014). This facilitates provision of luxury travel services by enhancing access to high quality accommodation, tourist attractions, and transportation services.
The luxury travel industry in Dubai was worth $72 billion in 2013. The industry recorded $15.33 billion in profits in 2013 (Dubai Chamber, 2014).
The number of tourists is expected to increase from 10 million in 2013 to 20 million in 2020 (Dubai Chamber, 2014). Upscale travelers will account for 30% of the total number of tourists in the next five years. Overall, the luxury travel industry is expected to grow at an average rate of 9% in the next five years.
We will write a custom Report on Luxury Travel Services specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The main critical success factors in the industry include ability to differentiate products and to connect with customers. Effective management of the value chain also leads to success. Upscale customers are interested in tailor-made products. Thus, only companies that are able to achieve high product differentiation are likely to succeed.
Ability to connect with customers helps in understanding the salient product features that determine customer loyalty. Effective management of the value chain enables luxury travel agencies to collaborate with the right service providers such as high-class hotels and airlines to deliver their value proposition.
The luxury travel industry has four main segments namely, the old, business travelers, families, and the youth. In the old and family market segments, customers are interested in travel packages that offer personalized services and privacy. The customers are often interested in staying in high quality villas or private islands and tours that last for several days. The youth prefer simplicity and perfection.
They are interested in travel packages that guarantee access to several destinations, cultural immersion, and high quality recreational facilities. In the business market segment, customers are interested in comfort, safety, and timeliness. Most business travelers are interested in short holidays.
Customers usually begin the purchasing process by making inquiries about the services that are offered by various agencies. After identifying a suitable agency, the customer discusses his/ her needs with the sales team so that the travel service can be arranged. Once the customer pays for the selected package, the travel agencies and their partners such as hotels deliver the services.
The brands that Travel Attache competes with in Dubai include Sovereign Luxury Travel, Linara Travel, and Kuoni Travel. These brands are associated with high quality, reliability, and memorable travel experiences. The brands are well funded and have branches in nearly all continents.
As a result, they are able to offer access to a large number of destinations. Travel Attache also symbolizes excellent quality, reliability, and unique destinations. In addition, it is associated with affordability.
Marketing Strategy Marketing Objectives
The first objective will be to increase sales for the luxury travel services by 10% in the next 12 months. The expected robust economic growth and expansion of the industry will facilitate achievement of the sales target through high demand. The second objective will be to increase market share by 5% in the next 12 months.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Luxury Travel Services by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This objective is reasonable due to the fact that increased competition from foreign firms will limit the potential for increasing market share. The last objective will be to increase the number of destinations by 5% in the next 12 months. This objective is achievable because the company has the financial resources to extend its product line by introducing new tourist destinations.
The company will focus on serving the affluent that are always ready to pay for high quality travel services. In this market, the segments that will be targeted include families, the youth, and the old. Small nuclear families that consist of parents with one or two children are normally the main customers in the families segment. Families are normally interested in spending special time together away from home to bond.
Thus, they are likely to purchase luxury travel services that offer privacy, comfort, and access to unique recreational facilities. The youth consist of individuals in the age bracket of 17 to 25 years. They are interested in adventure, entertainment, and learning about new cultures. In this regard, they are likely to be interested in tailor-made luxury travel services that allow them to visit several tourist destinations in one trip.
The old consist of individuals who are over 50 years. This segment consists of retirees who have a lot of time and financial resources to spend on high quality travel services. The old are likely to purchase the company’s services to enjoy the best travel experience.
Brand/ Product Dream Brand Prism
The brand prism has six aspects, which include physique, personality, culture, relationship, reflection, and self-image. Attache’s travel services are known for profound experiences and access to the most-sought-after destinations.
The company’s brand personality is associated with fun, innovation, and flexibility. Its brand culture focuses on providing consistent and unique services that reflect customers’ expectations in a seamless and sophisticated way (Travel Attache, 2014). The brand’s relationship with the customers is to provide emotionally attached and personalized services that suit the needs of each client.
The self-mage associated with the brand includes elegance, comfort, and authenticity. The reflection or the noble purpose of the brand is to enable customers to achieve their dream travel experience in an affordable and enjoyable manner.
The company’s vision is to be the world’s premium luxury travel agency. Its mission is to enable the upscale traveler to discover the world (Travel Attache, 2014). Thus, the main objective of Attache’s brand is to enable customers to explore the world in a stylish and seamless manner. This objective ensures that the company’s services create value to the customers.
The brand’s most compelling differentiating factor is its ability to deliver the core elements (where to go, when, and how) of a luxury trip in a highly personalized manner. Thus, the main attributes that define the company’s brand personality are exiting experiences, innovative travel solutions, and flexible travel plans. In sum, the company’s brand dream is to offer excellent luxury travel services that surpass the expectations of customers.
Value Provided to the Customer
Travel Attache’s customers will receive the following benefits. First, they will have access to the best tourist destinations in all the continents of the world. Second, customers will enjoy comfortable accommodation in over 200,000 world-class hotels and private villas around the world. Finally, the company will charge competitive prices to enable customers to save on travelling costs.
The link between the company’s brand dream and luxury is reflected in the characteristics of its services. The characteristics include rarity, extraordinariness, and quality.
The company’s services are rare since most of its competitors provide standard rather than personalized luxury travel services. The quality of the services is very high since they are benchmarked by global standards (Travel Attache, 2014). Moreover, the services are extraordinary because of their affordability.
The customer awareness that the company intends to create will focus on the uniqueness of its services. In particular, the company will use its marketing campaign initiatives to create awareness about the attributes that differentiate its services. These include affordability, consistency, flexibility, and unrivalled quality. As customers internalize these attributes, brand identity will improve significantly.
Marketing Mix Strategy Product
The brand name that will be used to sell the services is Attache signature travel. The company will offer integrated luxury travel services that provide several benefits to the customers. This means that a single travel package will include accommodation, transportation, tour guide, and entertainment services. However, the customer will decide the services that will be included in each package.
The benefits of the services include access to holiday destinations in over 100 countries, luxury car hire, yacht/ boat rentals, wellness services, and private jet leasing. In addition, customers will benefit from personalized VIP services and access to recreational facilities such as golf courses.
The company will adopt the value-based pricing strategy to sell its services. This pricing strategy involves setting prices according to the benefits provided by the product. The choice of this strategy has been informed by the fact that the benefits that will be offered by each travel package will depend on the services selected by the customer.
Thus, it will ensure fairness to the customer and enable the company to generate adequate revenue. The average price of an integrated service will be $20,000. The rationale of this price is that it will enable customers to save on accommodation and transportation services that the company is able to book at favorable rates on behalf of its customers. The price also includes a 30% gross profit margin.
The promotional mix that will be used to market the services include advertising, loyalty programs, and public relations. Advertising will be used to create brand awareness. The adverts will convey important information about the services such as their benefits and how to purchase them. Advertising will be done on TV and radio channels, as well as, travel/ lifestyle magazines and newspapers.
The theme that will be used for the print adverts is ‘travelling is a collection of unforgettable experiences. Let Attache be your guide’. Social media websites such as Google , Twitter, and Facebook will also be used to advertise the services.
The rationale of using public relations is that they will help in creating a strong brand image by influencing the public to develop a positive attitude towards the services. Loyalty programs will focus on rewarding customers for repeat purchases. This will improve brand loyalty.
The services will be sold in all countries where the company has branches. This market coverage strategy will facilitate maximization of revenues. The main distribution channels will be the company’s offices and sales website. The offices will have knowledgeable sales executives who will advice customers on the best package to purchase.
Customers will use the sales website to make inquiries and to purchase the services. The company will also use online sales platforms such as eBay and Amzon.com to distribute its services. These platforms will improve access to the services by allowing customers to purchase them in any part of the world.
Budget and Pro Forma Income Statement Budget and Breakeven
Table 1 in the appendix shows that the promotional plan will cost $795,000 in the first year. The cost of each element of the promotional plan is summarized in table 1. Assuming a fixed cost of $2,352,500 in the first year, an average variable cost of $14,000/ package, and average revenue of $20,000/ package, breakeven can be calculated as:
This implies that the company must sell at least 393 packages of its integrated luxury travel services to breakeven.
Pro Forma Income Statement
Table 2 shows that the company expects to realize $43,186,163 in total revenue in the first year. Moreover, the company expects to make a pre-tax profit of $7,163,538. These expectations are based on the assumption that sales will increase by 2.5% in every quarter. Moreover, rapid economic growth is expected to facilitate achievement of the sales target by supporting demand.
Conclusion The situation analysis indicates that there are immense growth opportunities in the luxury travel industry. The expected growth in demand will enable Travel Attache to launch and sell its integrated travel services successfully. The company should focus on product differentiation by providing high quality personalized services to overcome competition.
In addition, the brand can be stretched by introducing luxury gift products such as wristwatches and souvenirs. This will involve brand image transfer where the gift products will be associated with the superior attributes of the luxury travel services. The rationale of brand stretching is that it will create new revenue streams that will improve the company’s profits.
Appendix Table 1: Cost of each promotion activity
Promotional Plan Budget Activity Cost ($) Advertising TV 120,000 Radio 80,000 Magazines 78,000 Newspaper 82,000 Sub-total 360,000 Public relations Press releases 10,000 Publications 50,000 Special events (shows) 150,000 Sub-total 210,000 Loyalty program Coupons/ loyalty cards 125,000 Competition 100,000 Sub-total 225,000 Total 795,000 Table 2: Pro forma income statement
Pro Forma Income Statement ($) Quarter 1 Quarter 2 Quarter 3 Quarter 4 Annual Total revenue 10,400,000 10,660,000 10,926,500 11,199,663 43,186,163 Less Cost of sales 8,000,000 8,200,000 8,405,000 8,615,125 33,220,125 Gross profit 2,400,000 2,460,000 2,521,500 2,584,538 9,966,038 Expenses Accounting and legal fees 25,000 25,000 25,000 25,000 100,000 Marketing 198,750 198,750 198,750 198,750 795,000 Distribution 100,000 110,000 115,000 125,000 450,000 Administrative expenses 350,000 350,000 360,000 360,000 1,420,000 Miscellaneous 10,000 12,000 8,000 7,500 37,500 Less Total expenses 683,750 695,750 706,750 716,250 2,802,500 Profit before tax 1,716,250 1,764,250 1,814,750 1,868,288 7,163,538 References Czinkota, M.,
HTC Corporation Report (Assessment) argumentative essay help
Introduction Business environment is experiencing rapid changes due to the dynamism brought about by the emerging technologies. According to Bradley (2005, p. 67), firms currently face a lot of challenge trying to manage changes within the external environment. With the stiff competition in the market, firms cannot ignore the need to adjust to the changing market structure as a way of retaining their competitiveness.
They have to develop strategies that can help them achieve success in the market. Organisational development has been considered one of the best ways of achieving success in such a dynamic and competitive environment. This is so because it offers a firm a rare opportunity to embrace dynamism when addressing the market forces.
According to Cheverton (2004, p. 73), a firm that fails to manage changes in the environment may risk losing its market share to its competitors. This is what has been taking place at HTC. HTC was once one of the major Smartphone manufacturers and distributors in the world. It was very innovative in the market, and was always able to understand the changing tastes and preferences of customers in the market.
However, this has changed, and the firm is currently struggling to remain competitive in the market. About three years ago, this firm had a 25% market share of the Smartphone market (Doyle 2008, p. 87). This has changed drastically, and the market share has been reduced to only 5%, a clear indication that this firm is struggling to remain competitive in the market.
In this study, the researcher seeks to use organisational development to align human resource, processes, and strategies at HTC in order to bridge the gap. Particular focus when aligning the three factors will be to promote creativity and innovation not only in the manufacture of the products, but also in the marketing strategies. This new approach is expected to create superior marketing strategies for this firm in the market.
Background of Organisational Development According to Cheverton (2004, p. 34), “Organisational Development is a planned, systematic approach of improving organisational effectiveness by aligning strategies, people and processes.” An organisation will always meet factors that would demand some changes in its strategies, processes or people working on various departments.
Whenever there is a change in any of the three factors, there will be a need to align the other factors in order to harmonise operations within the firm.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More For instance, if a firm realises that it needs to introduce a new process in its manufacturing system, it will need to develop new strategies of production that are in line with the new process, and the employees may need some training in order to understand the new approaches to the changes introduced in the production process.
According to Dobkin (2008, p. 45), firms always face numerous challenges in managing the organisational change. Although change is a factor that cannot be avoided in any organisation in the current world, many people are always uncomfortable with it because of many reasons.
The management always view change as a way of expanding its expenditure even if its budget is limited. Some employees always fear change because they feel that they may not be able to adopt first enough to meet the new demands brought about by the change. It is therefore, natural that change will always meet resistance from the very people who are supposed to initiate it within an organisation.
However, it is important to understand that change is an integral part of organisational development (Gookin 2011, p. 34). The most important factor that an organisation should always understand is the right model to take when confronted with the need for change. One of the popular models is Kurt Lewin Model of Change in managing change. This is demonstrated in the figure below.
In this model, the management will need to determine when it is the right time to make the change. When this is determined, the organisation would need to develop an environment within the workplace that would be able to accept change when it is introduced. They should be informed that some of the old strategies may need change so as to prepare them psychologically.
When they are ready for the change, the management should introduce the new system into the organisation. It is normal that some of the stakeholders may take longer than expected to understand the new system that is introduced.
This may create a performance gap as some employees struggle to understand the dynamisms at workplace. The management may be forced to find the strategies of bridging the performance gap as a way of maintaining an effective product delivery in the market (Levinson, Levinson
Organisational Change in BP after the Oil Spill in Gulf of Mexico Report writing essay help: writing essay help
Abstract This essay is about the oil giant British Petroleum and one of the world’s worst environmental disasters in history, the Gulf of Mexico oil spill. The aim for this paper is to provide a backdrop for the oil spill and to picture the management change due to the oil spill.
The Gulf of Mexico oil spill symbolised a breakdown of more than mere environmental law and the work of institutions tasked with administering deepwater drilling, business law, governance, and corporate social responsibility principles can also be blamed for the environmental catastrophe (Cherry
GASCO Operation Management Report scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help
Introduction GASCO, also known as the Abu Dhabi Gas Industries Limited, is a large natural gas company which is has its headquarters in the industrial complex in Ruwais, Abu Dhabi. Started in the year 1978 through a partnership of Total, ADNOC, Partex, and Shell, GASCO was specifically developed to help the three companies extract onshore natural gas production. The firm identified four plants where gas was to be extracted.
The four plants are closely managed by the Abu Dhabi National Oil Company which has other plants within the country. These four plants were strategically located in the desert and had the capacity to produce enough gas for commercialization. After extraction, the natural gas, in liquid form, is transported to Ruwais Fractionation Plant in Abu Dhabi where they are treated and then fractionated into different products.
Propane, Paraffinic naphtha, Ethane, and Butane, are some of the main products out of the fractional distillation process. The Abu Dhabi Polymers Company is responsible for the exportation of ethane and propane to different global markets, while paraffinic naphtha and butane are directly exported to the global market.
According to Schneider (87), one of the biggest challenges that many of the companies in the oil industry face is the dangers associated with transporting their products to the market. The supply chain in this industry is always shaky, and it requires advanced mechanisms and use of modern technologies in order to achieve the desired success.
This is what has been affecting GASCO as it struggles to become one of the leading companies in the world. With the management emphasizing on creativity and innovation in this industry, it is set to offer serious competition to the top companies in this industry such as Gazprom of Russia.
It is clear that this firm needs an effective operational management in order to be able to meet the expectations of various stakeholders. Upon extraction of the raw products from the onshore sources, they are always transported to Ruwais NGL Fractionation Plant where the processing takes place.
With a processing capacity of 17 million metric tons in a year, the operational strategies at this plant must be at its top notch to ensure that every stage in the processes is a success. Currently, the firm has four fractionation trains, a loading jetty, and storage tanks to ensure that the supply chain at this plant is successfully managed. The figure below shows GASCO plants and products overview.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Plant overview GASCO was founded on December 1978 by four companies that shared a common vision in the market. Shell, Total, ADNOC, and Partex agreed to come together to form this company as a way of boosting their capacity in the production of gas. ADNOC had the largest share in the partnership of 68%. Shell and Total had a share of 15% each, while Partex was the junior shareholder with about 2% of the market share.
The four companies committed financial resources and with the help of the government of Abu Dhabi, GESCO was founded. The new company was getting into a field that already had strong competitors such as Gazprom, and this meant that to be successful, it had to align its operational strategies with the market needs and the industry’s dynamism.
This was not a simple task for the young organization that was just coming into the market. The operational management had to be focused on cutting the cost, improving effectiveness of the entire system, and shortening the time taken in the production and delivery of the products to the customers. This would not only help in maintaining a regular flow of products to the market, but also cut the costs of operation.
The Ruwais refinery, fully owned by GASCO, has been responsible for the refinery, storage and supply of the products to various channels used to reach the market. The refinery receives raw products from the four fields through two pipelines which act as trunk lines. The first pipeline is 24 inch, while the second pipeline is 30 inch. These two pipelines have been very effective in the delivery of the products to the customers.
The products are distributed from the refinery using four trains. The four pipelines have been very instrumental in delivering products to various destinations. The table below shows LPG and NPL feedstock supply in the month of October 2012 when an insurance survey was done at the facility.
Train Nameplate Capacity (t/d) Throughput (t/d) Train 1 11,750 9,596 Train 2 11,750 8,548 Train 3 24,400 20,063 Train 4 29,400 25,068
As shown in the table above, the first two trains have the same capacity, but in the month of October, the output of the first train was higher than that of the second train. This means that train 2 was not optimized in this particular month. The operation management unit should be able to identify the reasons why the train failed to give the maximum output within this particular month.
We will write a custom Report on GASCO Operation Management specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More It is important to mention that GASCO is currently using Continuous Process Strategy as a way of lowering the cost of production. Given the fact that its standardized products are needed in large volumes, the production process has been operating 24 hours in a day. The objective of the strategy is to maximize on fixed costs as a way of minimizing the unit cost of every product.
Process Units The refinery plant at Ruwais has the primary responsibility to fractionate the LPG and NGL that is received from the four plants discussed above. This is done with the help of the four trains.
NGP at Train 1 and 2
Constructed in 1981, these two trains at Ruwais are fed by pipelines which run from the desert fields to the plant, a distance of about 67 kilometers. The LPG and NGL from the fields are fractionated at these two trains to give ethane, butane, propane, and pentane products. They have a capacity of processing 11750 tones of NGL feed in a day each.
The products are then shipped to the international market using marine tankers. It is approximated that these two trains have the capacity to export about 2500 tones of ethane in a day. The surplus gas is used within the firm as fuel. Below is a diagrammatic representation of the processes which takes place at the two plants.
Simplified Process Flow of Train 1 and 2
It is important to note that when the NGL is received, it is split into two streams and then fed into the two trains. NGL Feed Surge Drum is used to collect NGL that flows in the trains, while LPG Feed Surge Drum helps in collection of LPG feedstock in the system.
The fractionated distillation takes place in three columns which are De-propaniser, De-ethaniser, and De-butaniser. There is also a Sponge Recovery Unit which is responsible for the recovery of LPG products flared in the process of regeneration.
NPG Train 3 and 4
Constructed in 2009, train 3 also supports the fractionated distillation, just as the first two trains. The major difference between these two trains and the first two trains is that these two are more advanced technologically and have a higher capacity. Below is a simplified process flow schematic at train 3 which also located in Ruwais.
Not sure if you can write a paper on GASCO Operation Management by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The principle used in this train is the same as that of the first two trains discussed in the section above.
Location GASCO is located in the coastal strip of the Arabian Gulf, east of the Industrial Complex in Ruwais, South Western part of Abu Dhabi. It is about 240 kilometers from the city of Abu Dhabi in the United Arab Emirates. The location was very appropriate because of the onshore extraction of the products.
It is important to note that this is the location of the refinery plant where the products are distilled into final products before they are exported to the international products. However, the extraction of NPG and LPG takes place in the high seas. The map below shows the refinery plants at Ruwais complex and the high seas where extraction of oil takes place.
This strategic location shortened the distance between the point of extraction of the raw materials, and the refinery plants. It was also appropriate for exporting the materials using marine tankers.
The facilities of ADNOC within the city of Dubai have also acted as other sites for the products of GASCO, especially for the purpose of storage before they are transported to various markets in the region and internationally. This has helped improve the efficiency of the facility.
Management and Systems According to Mahadevan (53), an organization can only be as successful as its management system. This scholar says that the leadership is responsible for developing policies that are followed when running the company. The policies must be based on the market conditions and should be customer-centric in order to achieve the desired results.
The management must also understand its workforce to ensure that they have the capacity to deliver results which are desirable in the market.
When making policies, it may be necessary for the policy makers to involve the junior employees who are involved with operational activities in order to identify some of the areas that may need adjustments in the company’s strategic objectives. It is only through this that it can be able to remain effective in the production process and competitive in the market.
When analyzing the management system, it is important to start by understanding the hierarchies that are involved and the offices which are responsible for various tasks. At the helm of this firm is a board of directors that is headed by the chairman. The board is responsible for making strategic decisions about the firm.
The board has delegated daily management responsibilities to its secretary, who is the chief executive officer of the firm. There are senior vice presidents who head various departments. They include the marketing head, the finance head, the technical head, the productions head, the supplies and logistic heads.
These officers report directly to the chief executive of the firm. In 2012, the firm created the office of senior Vice President Projects Functions who report directly to the firm’s chief executive. Below are the vice presidents are the senior management officials in charge of various departments. The figure below shows the hierarchies of the management unit at this firm.
Each of the departments has the sub departments which are responsible for various operational activities within the firm. The firm has been focused on achieving ISO 50001 and ISO 14001 accreditations as a sign of the improved service delivery to its customers. It has also been determined to inculcate the culture of creativity and innovativeness among its employees in the market.
This is meant to propel the management into higher heights of success in the market and efficiency in service delivery. Some departments have also been created within the firm to ensure that the quality of products that is released into the market is of the right standards. The management introduced Operation Excellence Division that was meant to ensure that the products from this firm are of high quality.
This unit is expected to operate under the Operations Support Group within the firm. Other departments which are specifically focused on improving the quality of the products and operations include Integrity Assurance division, Product Excellence, Maintenance Excellence, Asset Life Extension, and Reliability Divisions. Enterprise Risk Management Group is also active in this firm.
Inventory management Inventory management is one of the most important tasks within an organization in the current competitive market environment. Murthy (34) defines inventory management as “The process of efficiently overseeing the constant flow of units into and out of an existing inventory.” At GASCO, there has been a concerted effort by the management to ensure that it has an effective inventory management system.
It would be important to give a brief analysis of the performance of the four trains mentioned in the section above. Although the first train’s output was slightly higher than that of the second train, it is clear that it was unable to give 100% of its capacity. The third train has a higher capacity than the first two trains, while the fourth train has the highest capacity.
However, it is evident that train 3 and 4 also failed to realize 100% output within the month of October in 2012. This means that this plant’s operational plan is failing in one way or the other, and this could be the reason why there is a gap between the trains’ capacities and what they delivered within that particular month.
According to Kamauff (76), the current competitive environment demands for a near 100% efficiency if a firm expects to achieve success in the market. This means that any failure in the operation system may not be tolerated because it shall open an avenue for other firms to penetrate the market.
In this particular survey, it was determined that propane, butane, and pentane are primarily exported to the plant market via jetty, while ethane is transported using marine tankers to the plant in Ruwais. At this stage, the focus will be put on the specific operational activities which take place when handling the products within the warehouse of the firm.
Processes at GASCO Warehouse There are a number of activities which take place within GASCO warehouse. The process of managing the inventory within the warehouse involved a number of activities. This can be classified into three main
The first process involves receiving the products into the warehouse from the refinery plant. This involves a number of activities. It is important to mention that there are some challenges that the company has to overcome in this process.
They include the massive paper work that takes place at this stage when the products are received. Another problem has been the time taken to determine the quantity of the products received from the refinery into the warehouse. However, these problems are being addressed by automating the process.
Issuing and Returning Process
The second process involves managing the inventory within the warehouse. It is at this stage that various orders placed will be analyzed with the view of determining their availability within the firm. According to Mahadevan (45), this would involve a physical check into the stores to determine the amount of products, and their quality.
The quality assurance team must be careful to ensure that only the standard quality products pass through this stage. This is to help eliminate any complaints from the customers about the quality of the products. At GASCO, this problem has been riddled with a number of challenges because it is always done manually. The problem can be addressed by automating the system.
Stock Count Process
The last stage involves the stock counting process. It involves the physical count of the products then issuing a print sheet about the stock within the warehouse. At this stage, the quality and quantity of the products will be clearly defined. This is the last stage before the products can be dispatched to the market. This process, just like the first two processes, can be improved using the technology.
Works Cited Kamauff, John W. Manager’s Guide to Operations Management. New York: McGraw-Hill, 2010. Print.
Mahadevan, B. Operations Management: Theory and Practice. Upper Saddle River: Pearson, 2010. Print.
Murthy, P R. Production and Operations Management. New Delhi: New Age International (P) Ltd. Publishers, 2005. Print.
Schneider, Mitch. Operations Management. Clifton Park, NY: Thomson/Delmar Learning, 2003. Print.
Mexican Drug Trade Report essay help site:edu
Table of Contents Introduction
Issues in Intelligence Gathering
U.S. Intelligence Collection
Analysis of Successes
Analyzing Mexico’s Drug Cartels
Supply and Demand
Introduction Over the past decade, the U.S. – Mexican border has been rocked by a series of violent conflicts that has resulted in thousands of deaths, however, these incidents are not indicative of a war between the U.S. and Mexico, instead, it is a direct result of the ongoing drug war between cartels due to their desire to control the lucrative cross border drug market.
Cartels such as the Los Zetas, Sinaloa cartel and Mara Salvatrucha (MS-13) are fighting not only amongst themselves; they are also fighting the joint U.S.-Mexican effort to curtail the ongoing illegal drug trade within the region.
However, despite the best efforts of either government, an effective solution has not been forthcoming with the drug trade intensifying over the past 20 years into a multi-billion dollar industry that has adversely impacted Mexico’s border cities1.
The end result is that an estimated 10 million people have died due to the conflict, with border cities such as Juarez experiencing daily reports of murders occurring on the streets as rival gangs vie for dominance. As expected in regions with extremely high crime rates, border towns which normally would be thriving tourist destinations have experienced a massive decline in the number of tourists.
Local businesses have shut down, border economies have stagnated, and more residents have become more complicit towards the illegal drug industry in order to survive.
It is in this situation that it must be asked: what is the Mexican government doing in order to combat the cartels in order to prevent the continued deterioration of the border towns and the deaths of thousands of people per year as a direct result of the fighting? As such, it is the assumption of this paper that so long as there continues to be a constant demand for illegal drugs in the U.S., there will always be a drug trade.
Issues in Intelligence Gathering Based on the examination of Waxman, it was shown that one of the main methods that the Mexican government has employed in its fight against the cartels has been a systematic information gathering campaign with assistance from the U.S. Drug Enforcement Agency (DEA)2.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Through such efforts, a general outline has developed regarding the current status of the cartels, their rankings, the means by which they smuggle drugs into the U.S. and the various areas that they operate in.
However, while information gathering has been a boon towards limiting the shipment of drugs, the cartels have also attempted to curtail such attempts by systematically eliminating state witnesses, killing government officials in broad daylight and effectively instituting a culture of fear amongst members of the local population.
This has resulted in the creation of a general reluctance to relay information on the cartels to the government due to the potential for reprisal. It is based on this that the main problem when it comes to intelligence gathering in this case is the sheer amount of fear that the various cartels elicit from ordinary people.
U.S. Intelligence Collection U.S. intelligence collection when it comes to preventing the expansion of the illegal drug is primarily isolated into two specific activities: interrogation of local drug dealers for information as well as information obtained via special plea deals with illegal Mexican immigrants.
First and foremost, it should be noted that drug trafficking operates through a network of individuals that usually ends with local drug dealers selling drugs on the street. These are the individuals that are most commonly arrested and prosecuted resulting in them becoming the most likely sources of information regarding the extent of drug trafficking within the area.
While the information they have is sparse, members of the DEA or FBI often offer special “deals” to these individuals wherein in exchange for a reduced sentence, they will provide information to the police resulting in the capture and arrest of individuals “high up the chain of command” so to speak3. This often results in another set of deals being offered resulting in even more captures and more information obtained.
Once released from prison, these former drug dealers also at times act as police informants in order to reduce the time they are on probation. Overall, this tactic by U.S. intelligence agencies has enabled the DEA and FBI to systematically dismantle local drug dealing networks and intercept shipments resulting in more arrests and a reduction in the amount of drugs that enter into the country.
We will write a custom Report on Mexican Drug Trade specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The other method in which the U.S. has been able to obtain information locally has been through the capture and interrogation of various illegal Mexican immigrants in the country who are also connected to the drug trade. Many of the illegal Mexican immigrants within the country often have connections to cartels in Mexico since cartels often offer local residents illegal passage into the U.S. through a variety of routes4.
It is through such endeavors that immigrants often become indebted to the cartels and act as drug mules in order to ferry illegal drugs into various locations within the country.
By arresting and interrogating these individuals and offering them plea deals before deporting them to Mexico, the U.S. government in effect learns about the processes behind the transportation of illegal immigrants and drugs across the U.S. boarder which enables them to accurately pinpoint the breaches in border security and put effective countermeasures in place.
This method has yielded information related to the location of underground tunnels, drop-off points as well as an assortment of transportation routes that smugglers often use to bring drugs and people into the U.S.
Analysis of Successes While both the U.S. and Mexican governments have had a series of successes when it comes to capturing drug shipments, systematically eliminating the leadership structure of the cartels and freezing bank assets, the fact remains that drug shipments into the U.S. continue to grow. For every cartel leader that they capture, one more always seems to take his place.
The war on drugs has not resulted in the destruction of the drug trade; rather, it has merely created a smarter breed of criminal. Evidence of this can be seen in the consolidation of warring factions into single cartels who are intent on surviving and thriving through cooperation instead of conflict.
Analyzing Mexico’s Drug Cartels Presently, there are three cartels that dominate the cross border drug trade in Mexico, these cartels consist of: the Los Zetas, the Sinaloa cartel and Mara Salvatrucha (MS-13). All three of cartels consist of an eclectic mix of former soldiers, criminals and a variety of civilians that joined the cartels in order to get themselves out of poverty.
The individual operations of the cartel are actually quite similar in that their hierarchy consists of enforcers, the main leadership, the drug traffickers and finally the distributors5.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Mexican Drug Trade by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More While a vast majority of the profits of the operation is concentrated in the upper hierarchy of operations, many within the ranks of the cartel enjoy considerable shares of the inherent profits which convince even more people to join the organization. However, these profits are often built upon a system of systematic brutality where the individual cartels commit acts that include, but are not limited to:
Such activities are meant to create an image of fear which helps to prevent people from openly talking about the operations of the cartel and helps to reduce the amount of informants that they have to deal with. It is due to this that a vast majority of the means by which the cartels transport drugs into the U.S. is still unknown with millions of metric tons of illegal drugs often making it across the border and into the hands of local dealers.
The Mexican government’s response to the activities of the cartels resulted in one of the world’s largest anti-drug campaigns with government agencies given a considerable amount of leeway when it came to expediting the sentencing of individuals involved with any of the cartels.
However, the cartels responded with even more brutal attacks against the government itself with broad daylight killings of police officers, the kidnapping of government officials and public executions of civilians and rival gang members6.
Suffice it to say, the actions of the Mexican government resulted in an escalation of tensions and deaths rather than bringing about an effective solution to the illegal drug trafficking that was occurring within the country.
Supply and Demand After everything that has been stated so far, it really all boils down to the concept of supply and demand. The fact is that so long there is a demand for illegal drugs, there will be a means by which it will be supplied.
García and González expound on this argument by explaining that the main “fuel”, so to speak, of the drug trade is the billions of dollars within the U.S. that flow into the pockets of the cartels. Without the rewards justifying the sheer amount of risk associated with the production and sale of drugs, it is likely that the drug trade would stop completely7.
Conclusion Based on what has been presented in this paper, it can be stated that so long as there continues to be a constant demand for illegal drugs in the U.S., there will always be a drug trade. Evidence of this can be seen in the fact that despite the best efforts of the Mexican government or even the U.S. government, the illegal drug trade continues to operate unabated without an end in sight.
As such, no matter how many crackdowns or arrests the Mexican government attempts, there will always be more people to “step up” so to speak when it comes to supplying illegal drugs to “customers” in the U.S. due to the constant demand. merely attempting to stop the flow of drugs is like trying to place a band aid over a deep wound, while on the surface everything may seem fine, yet deep down everything is only getting worse as the problem goes unresolved.
While it can be stated that it is the responsibility of the Mexican government to handle such an issue and squash the various cartels, the problem is that no matter how many people are arrested or even if several cartels were destroyed, the fact remains that basic economics is at work in this instance wherein if there is a demand for a product a supplier will always rise up to meet it.
In the end, there really is no effective solution to addressing the current drug trade since there is no way to control human nature8.
Bibliography “After 40-Year Drug War, Cartels Come North.” PRISM Magazine 19, no. 1 (2012): 19.
García, Victor, and Laura González. “Labor Migration, Drug Trafficking Organizations, And Drug Use: Major Challenges For Transnational Communities in Mexico.” Urban Anthropology
Costs and Motives in Apprenticeship Training Term Paper college admission essay help: college admission essay help
Introduction Developing an effective and efficient labor force is essential in organizations’ pursuit to achieve long-term excellence. Acemoglu and Pischke are of the opinion that human capital is the engine of achieving the desired growth (112). Human resource managers should ensure that their workforce has the right skills in order to improve the organizations’ performance.
The effectiveness of an organization’s human capital will play a vital role in enhancing its competitive advantage and efficiency. Organizations characterized by quality-oriented employees will outdo quantity-oriented workforce.
One of the ways through which an organization can transform its labor force into being quality-oriented is by investing in apprenticeship training. Investing in apprenticeship is an effective way through which an organization can enhance employee development by instilling the desired skills and competence. This aspect increases the employees’ level of effectiveness and efficiency (Ryan The economics of training 56).
Additionally, the skills acquired must be utilized effectively in order to achieve the desired growth. Acemoglu and Pischke contend that the long-term success of an organization is subject to the degree to which employees are committed in developing specific skills (112). Some of the specific skills cannot be acquired through general-purpose education.
Currently, organizations are operating in a vibrant environment arising from the high rate of economic, social, political, and technological changes. Vemic asserts that the increase in the level of uncertainty, turbulence and complexity arising from the environment demands organizations to invest in knowledge (209).
Subsequently, organizational managers have an obligation to invest in continuous learning, which is effectively achieved through workplace training.
In an effort to achieve the desired level of efficiency, policy makers including governments are increasingly appreciating the significance of apprenticeship. For example, during his first term in office, Clinton made skills development through training a key policy issue. The objective was to improve the efficiency and effectiveness of the less skilled employees.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Acemoglu and Pischke are of the opinion that the “increase in the returns to a college degree and other skills experienced in the OECD countries over the past 20 years has added the sense of urgency to concerns regarding skills” (112).
Considering the importance of apprenticeship in organizations’ efforts to achieve long-term survival, this paper evaluates the costs and motives of apprenticeship training on the employers’ perspective. In order to understand the significance of apprenticeship, the paper assesses its application in Germany and Switzerland.
Cost analysis of apprenticeship training
Mohrenweiser and Zwick are of the opinion that an “increase of the apprenticeship share in trade, commercial, craft, or construction occupations has a positive impact on establishment performance; however, apprenticeship training increases the net cost of operation during the apprenticeship period” (631). Subsequently, employers incur a number of costs by investing in apprenticeship training.
Nechvoglod, Karmel, and Saunders cite apprentice wages as one of the major costs incurred by employers in their efforts to invest in apprenticeship (10). The apprentices’ remuneration increases due to the different aspects such as workers’ compensation, payroll tax, superannuation, and wages. Employers have an obligation to make payment to the apprentices’ superannuation fund (Wolter and Ryan 550).
Acemoglu and Pischke assert that different countries have formulated extensive and complex legislations, which aim at protecting workers (119). During the apprenticeship period, employers have the duty of safeguarding the apprentice in the workplace.
Consequently, the employer must ensure health and safety of the apprentices. In the event of an accident or injury, the employer has the responsibility of meeting the apprentices’ hospital bills. In a bid to safeguard against such issues, employers are required to include the apprentices in the workers compensation plan within the organization.
Various governments have made it mandatory for organizations to ensure that apprentices receive a fair remuneration during their apprenticeship. The amount of remuneration is dependent on a number of factors. Some of these factors relate to the years of training, nature of apprenticeship, and year of school completion. Entry-level apprentices receive a relatively lower remuneration as compared to mature age apprentices.
We will write a custom Term Paper on Costs and Motives in Apprenticeship Training specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The differences arise from the view that mature apprentices are more productive as compared to their young counterparts, which contributes to higher organizational performance. For example, the UK government has made it mandatory for employers to pay apprentices during the entire period of their apprenticeship.
According to the UK government policy, the payment has to be equal to the set national minimum wage. Apprentices serving for the first year and whose age is above 16 years are entitled to a minimum wage at the rate of £ 2.68 per hour.
After one year, the employers have an obligation to pay the apprentices at the rate applicable to their age. Furthermore, the remuneration is also pegged on the trainees’ educational grade. The remuneration paid has to reflect the training received, which reflects their responsibility.
Booth and Snower argue that employers have an obligation to treat the apprentices in a similar manner as employees (19). This aspect means that the apprentices are entitled to other benefits similar to other employees in an organization.
Some of these benefits include allowances and any other financial benefits that the employer may be required to pay over and above the set gross wages. In Australia, employers are required to pay apprentices all the benefits as outlined by the workplace agreement and the industry award.
In addition to remuneration, employers also incur substantial costs in paying the training personnel (Stevens 37). In an effort to ensure that employees are trained adequately, an organization may decide to outsource the training function. Outsourcing the training function may be expensive for an organization.
The outsourced firm may charge high training fees especially in training executives, which hikes the cost of outsourcing the training function. This assertion holds if an organization is required to train its workforce constantly. Furthermore, the organization may decide to source the training function in-house. Despite this aspect, the internal trainer may charge a high fee.
Mohrenweiser and Backes-Gellener define training fees as the costs incurred by an organization in paying an internal or external trainer (5). It is imperative for organizations to conduct a cost-benefit analysis to determine whether outsourcing the training function or conducting it in-house (Ryan The institutional requirements 12).
Not sure if you can write a paper on Costs and Motives in Apprenticeship Training by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Nechvoglod, Karmel, and Saunders further assert that employers incur a number of indirect costs (10). Examples of such costs include administration costs, material wastage and extra maintenance, and apprentice supervision costs. During the apprentice period, the employer has an obligation to ensure that the apprentice receives appropriate qualification.
Subsequently, the employer should ensure that the apprentice is supervised effectively during the entire apprenticeship program. Clark asserts that organizations should not assume that the apprentice is conversant with the responsibilities being allocated with time, hence diminishing the intensity of supervision (245).
This assertion arises from the view that the apprentice will encounter new challenges in the course of undertaking the on-the-job training.
In most cases, the supervisory responsibility is allocated to a qualified employee, who is charged with the responsibility of constantly reviewing the apprentice’s practices in order to ensure that he meets the intended quality, thus ensuring that his/her safety at the workplace is guaranteed. Therefore, the amount of time that the supervisor is actively involved in the operation of the firm is affected, which reduces his productivity.
Nechvoglod, Karmel, and Saunders further argue that the cost incurred is relatively high if the apprentice does not complete the apprenticeship (10). This assertion emanates from the view that the employer does not enjoy the apprentice’s productivity later during his or her time in the organization. Substantial administration costs are involved in planning apprenticeship.
For example, human resource managers spend a lot of time scheduling work and planning off-the-job training. The apprentices have the right to attend off-the-job training. In addition to the above costs, the employer also incurs a substantial costs originating from material wastage and extra maintenance.
An organization may be required to purchase additional equipment and materials in order to undertake the training process successfully.
An analysis of how the costs of apprenticeship are shared between employers, apprentices and the government
Most governments are cognizant of the role of organizations in enhancing organizational performance. Subsequently, governments are increasingly supporting organizations in their operations. Dustmann and Schonberg contend that industrialized countries are appreciating vocational training as an important aspect in strengthening their growth and competitiveness (36).
One of the avenues through which this goal is being achieved is by supporting organization’s apprenticeship programs. For example, Sweden, the US, Australia, Canada, Germany, and the UK are some of the economies that have advocated organizations to invest in apprenticeship. In an effort to support such initiatives, governments are contributing a substantial amount in supporting the apprenticeship schemes.
Nechvoglod, Karmel, and Saunders cite incentive payments as one of the ways through which governments are supporting apprenticeship schemes (24). One of the requirements that organizations are required to invest in includes off-job training such as in-class training.
In a bid to support organizations, governments are increasingly paying the tuition fee for organizations that have incorporated a comprehensive apprenticeship-training program.
Nechvoglod, Karmel, and Saunders assert, “The tuition fees charged to students make up a very small part of the overall apprenticeship cost” (24). However, governments support organization in order to sustain such apprenticeship programs in organizations.
Dustmann and Schonberg argue that the appreciation of apprenticeship in some industrialized countries such as Austria, France, the US, and Italy have led to significant increment in support of apprenticeship programs through school-based and full-time apprenticeship colleges (36).
Similarly, countries such as Switzerland and Germany have adopted firm-based apprenticeship programs. These schemes are designed to train employees through a combination of on-the-job training and school-based training. The programs last for 2 to 3 years (Dustmann
Nike Strategy for Entry into the Brazilian Market Report (Assessment) essay help site:edu
Executive summary Nike, the American based athletic apparel and footwear multinational, is perhaps one of the organizations that have been taking extensive steps to enter the Latin American market, with special focus on Brazil. Although Adidas is the largest sponsor of the world cup event in Brazil, it is worth noting that Nike has extensively explored the market over the last few years.
The purpose of this report is to analyze the Brazilian sports shoe market and provide advice to the corporate leadership at Nike in order to help them develop the best strategies to increase the corporate competitive advantage as the company enters the lucrative but highly competitive market. Specifically, the report examines the specific operational, managerial and organizational problems that rival companies encountered in Brazil.
In addition, the report examines the strategies and business practices that these organizations used when entering the sport shoe market in Brazil.
A comprehensive recommendation willsadvice the CEO at Nike on how to develop effective market entry strategies for use in its Brazilian venture. The report is developed through answering threes specific questions that address the issues that are likely to face the company as enters the Brazilian market.
Introduction The current trend towards globalization provides companies with a chance to expand their target market and enhance their profitability levels. The sports industry is one of the most popular sectors in the current global market. Nevertheless, the specific market entrance strategy a company uses determines its ability to cope with the wide range of challenges associated with market expansion.
There must be established contracts for managing the distribution of goods and services to a foreign market. Nike, one of the world’s largest makers and distributors of sports products, requires an effective market entry strategy to enter the Brazilian sports market.
As one of the most soccer enthusiastic societies in the world, Brazil offers Nike an opportunity to enhance its profitability level, despite the competition from other interested corporations like Adidas. This report examines the market entry strategy for Nike as it attempts to include Brazil in its of global markets.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More What specific operational, managerial, and organizational problems did companies in that industry encounter in the country recommended in your country analysis for Brazil?
The TIM Strategy
Most American corporations seeking to enter new world markets, especially in the emerging economies, have been using an international market expansion approach as their primary entry strategies. In fact, manufacturing corporations have been using this strategy, including those in other industries.
Research studies indicate that the strategy is supported by the nature of their business, where distribution of products is the major corporate aim. From a centralized production site, American manufacturing corporations have been successful to enter foreign markets in Europe, Asia and lately, the Latin America.
Thus, it is recommended that Nike retain its centralized production system and engage in activities that increase its shoe distribution in Brazil. With this strategy, Reebok and Adidas are able to increase their presence in foreign markets, especially in Asia and Europe. Currently, Adidas is using the same strategy in South America, especially in Brazil (Siemers, 2010).
In the past, a number of corporations have attempted to enter the new and emerging markets using a number of strategies, but most of them end up failing to achieve the expected goals. For instance, Nike’s attempt to enter the Southeast Asian market faced a myriad of problems. For example, Nike’s entry into South Korea and Taiwan was expected to be the company’s major venture that would yield hefty payouts.
In particular, the company was attracted by the large, cheap and readily available labor. In addition, it was aware that the raw materials were readily available while the government control of business and labor in these nations was minimal. It was also relying on poor competition in these nations since Adidas and reebok were focusing on China and Japan and ignoring South Korea and Taiwan.
However, these aspects proved to be negative for the company’s mission. For example, setting up a manufacturing unit in South Korea proved to be a wrong idea because the process was long while advertisement campaigns failed to pay back. In addition, the country’s population was not well prepared for the company’s shoe products primarily because the competition was low.
However, the company decided to centralize its manufacturing unit in Taiwan and concentrate on distribution not only in South Korea, but also in other nations in the region, including Philippines, China and Japan. This method proved to be more effective than the previous strategy. For instance, the company gained a revenue increment of more than 50% between 2001 and 2003 due to this strategy (Siemers, 2010).
We will write a custom Assessment on Nike Strategy for Entry into the Brazilian Market specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More What strategies and business practices have companies in the same industry used to enter and operate successfully in that country?
Adidas and Reebok are the best examples of international corporations seeking to take the advantage of the Brazilian addiction with sports, especially soccer (Siemers, 2010). In particular, Adidas has set up a number of strategies, which have shown signs of paying back in the last few years. The company has been using strong marketing and advertising campaigns in Brazil to create awareness of its products.
For instance, Adidas has been using some of the popular soccer celebrities in the country to attract the attention of the population. It has been using the identities of these celebrities to brand its products. In particular, these are individuals taking important roles in the world cup event. The company expects to gain revenuesexceedinga billion dollars at the end of the World Cup event in Brazil (Mosendz, 2014).
Reebok is using sponsorship strategies to enter the market. In fact, it is the largest sponsor of the event, channeling several million dollars in the event. It has obtained rights to advertise in the stadiums and the media, which are granted by the local authorities as well as the world soccer governing body, FIFA (Redl, 2014).
Nike is expected to use the centralization of production in its entry into the Brazil market. In this case, the company takes after the example set by Adidas and Reebok, which have been exporting products from their manufacturing units in Southeast Asia, India and North American to stock their Brazilian outlets.
Secondly, the company is using producing branding with the identities of popular soccer celebrities and individuals involved in the preparation and organization of the oncoming world cup event.
Using the real MNC you have selected to study for the purpose of this Team Report, what can your client CEO learn from their experiences in the country you recommended?
Nike has customer-based and employee-focused strategies that seek to spur the company’s growth towards a Multi-dimensional organization. Its product line or matrix concentrates on footwear, equipment and apparel, all meant for sporting events. In addition, the matrix includes the dimension of geography and sports culture in the local markets.
The company also develops products meant for different sports and different market segments. For instance, it provides different products for sportswear and action sports, basketball, soccer, running as well as male and female training (Siemers, 2010).
In the employee dimension, the company seeks to be an “all inclusive and equal opportunity employer” to ensure that it fits in the modern globalization aspects. For instance, it focuses on hiring Native Americans, Latinos, LGBT, Asians and Africans, which are classified as “employee and friends networks”.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Nike Strategy for Entry into the Brazilian Market by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Marketing
Similarly, despite having a relatively low cost of labor, few market regulations and a large population like India, Brazil’s sports culture is strong. Almost every Brazilian is a fan of football.
The country has been one of the most frequent holders of the world cup title. In addition, the coming of the event to the country in 2014 increases the population’s enthusiasm with the game (Siemers, 2010). To avoid the problems Nike faced in India, the company should focus more on soccer than other games, at least for now.
Finance and accounting
Nike is expected to generate more than $2 billion in sales of footwear and apparel in 2014 in its emerging market ventures. This is a 20% increase in its annual sales (Mosendz, 2014).
The world cup 2014 is expected to generate at least half a billion dollars within one month. Between 2013 and 2014, the Brazilian outlets boosted the company’s dales revenue by more than 70% due to the population’s devotion to the soccer game (Mosendz, 2014).
Like India, China and southeastern Asian nations, Brazil’s huge population and low cost labor are expected to be the main driver of the company’s sales revenue. For instance, it is recruiting young Brazilians into its sales and marketing sections across the country.
These individuals are readily available, skilled and ready for training. In addition, the country’s level of education is relatively high because it has a literacy rate of more than 86%. The culture is also defined by an international mentality that all Brazilians like soccer and Samba dance. In addition, the local language is Brazilian Portuguese, which is spoken by millions of people across the world.
Ethics and CSR
The company’s website states that the largest responsibility is to ensure that it brings about positive and systematic change for employees within their industry as well as supply chain system. It focuses on clarity, alignment, dignity and transparency (Nike Inc, 2014). Thus, these are used as guides to cope with problems of corruption, violation of human rights and other issues, which are sometimes frequent in Brazil.
Strengths Weaknesses The Company’s presence in Brazil is expected to be significant since it is one of the world’s largest makers and marketers of sports products and equipment. Its market entry strategy involves importing products from its Southeast Asian and American manufacturing segments, will ensure that the costs are minimal Competitors like Adidas have already set foot in the country. Adidas is the largest sponsor of the 2014 FIFA world cup, which makes Nike less significant. Opportunities Threats The Brazilian population is large, characterized with a large number of the young people and a huge enthusiasm for soccer. Sports shoes will be the best products that Nike can offer to the population. Nike is subjected to reduction of sales in Brazil within a few months after the end of the FIFA world cup event. The current political situation in Brazil is not stable, while the presence of Adidas and other competitors is a major threat. Pert Chart
Conclusion This analysis indicates that Nike has an opportunity to enhance its marketing strategies in the Latin America and Brazil in particular. The report shows that the company requires a strong marketing strategy to ensure that its products are present in the market. In particular, Brazil has a huge population characterized with a great enthusiasm for sports, especially soccer.
It is evident that the company requires an extensive and comprehensive market strategy to explore the Brazilian market. It is also clear that investing in Brazil is a good idea because the market is not well utilized, despite the presence of rival companies such as Adidas.
References Mosendz, P. (2014). The World Cup Will Bring Adidas More than A Billion Dollars This Year. Web.
Nike Inc. (2014). Nike’s Code of Conduct. Web.
Redl, N. (2014). Reebok Problems Take Shine Off Adidas. The Wall Street Journal, 8 Nov 2013, A21.
Siemers, E. (2010). Nike Focuses on Brazil. Web.
Anglo American PLC in South Africa Problem Solution Essay online essay help
Table of Contents Introduction/ Situation Analysis
Stakeholders to consider
Pros and cons of adopting an effective HIV/AIDS strategy
Recommendations to the company
Evaluation of the recommended courses of action
Introduction/ Situation Analysis Although company executives will always want their companies to expand and operate globally, the challenges of operating a business in the global economy are enormous. Anglo American PLC is one of the largest gold miners in the world, but the company is facing a threat in its operations in South Africa.
Although South African is a large gold producer, the HIV/AIDS epidemic has adversely affected the operations of Anglo American PLC. Essentially, South Africa has the highest number of people infected with the HIV in the world (Walker, Reid, and Cornell 17). About 60% of the South Africans are HIV-positive, and the rates of infection are extremely high.
The most insinuating fact is that about 1000 South Africans die of HIV/AIDS on a daily basis (Daniles, Radebaught, and Sulivan 252). The deaths have significant effects on the country’s economy as the per capita growth is decreasing drastically. International companies operating in the country are suffering because of AIDS-related deaths among workers.
At some point, Anglo American PLC was accused of defying the social responsibility tradition when operating overseas. Although various stakeholders had mixed reactions about addressing the epidemic, the company resolved to provide free antiretroviral therapy (ART) to its HIV-infected employees.
In spite of the difficulties that the company encountered in its struggle to deal with the epidemic, its objective was to adopt an effective HIV/AIDS strategy.
Stakeholders to consider Whenever the managers of a company decide to do something, it is always wise to consult the main stakeholders of the company. The directors, employees, the government, suppliers, the community, and the customers are some of the stakeholders of the company. However, the shareholders of the company are the main stakeholders to consult about any project that the company intends to implement.
The shareholders are the owners of the company, and if they pull back, the company’s operations may become crippled because of the lack of funds. Therefore, as Anglo American adopts an effective HIV/AIDS strategy, it should consider its shareholders.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Secondly, the company should consult the South African government and humanitarian organizations across the globe. The directors and employees can also be of great help in trying to convince fellow workers to agree to have part of their salaries channeled towards supporting the ART program.
Pros and cons of adopting an effective HIV/AIDS strategy Since Anglo America has a huge investment in South Africa, the adoption of an aggressive strategy in combating HIV/AIDS among its South African workforce would be highly advantageous. Although the company operates in various nations across the globe, it dominates the South African economy, which is a core strength that would drive it into adopting an aggressive strategy of combating HIV/AIDS in South Africa.
The number of employees and contractors that the company has in South Africa are infinite, and it cannot afford to pull back in its efforts to find a strategy of combating the epidemic. The adoption of an aggressive strategy to combat HIV/AIDS is the only way that the company can protect its majority-share ownership in various companies around the country.
The entire exercise will be a major opportunity for the company to gain trust from the employees, investors, customers, and some stakeholders of the company. Moreover, since the company was among the first multinational enterprises to develop comprehensive strategies to combat the damages of the disease, trying to stop its efforts would portray an immoral sense of responsibility (Daniles, Radebaught, and Sulivan 255).
On the other hand, it is noteworthy that the company would really encounter tough moments in trying to address the situation. The cost of providing free antiretroviral drugs increases daily, and the greatest threat is the significant rise of the prevalence of HIV-positive workers from one time to another.
The vice president of the medical division reported that the number of HIV-positive workers increased at a rate of 2% annually (Daniles, Radebaught, and Sulivan 253). Therefore, the company has to increase its expenditure on the costly antiretroviral drugs by at least 2% per annum.
The production costs of the company would increase concurrently, and the company may have problems in sustaining its costs after some years. The overstretched budgets, the overwhelmed stakeholders, and the uncooperative pharmaceutical companies are the main threats to the ART program.
We will write a custom Essay on Anglo American PLC in South Africa specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Moreover, decreasing proceeds, insufficient funds, and dissatisfied stakeholders are some of the difficulties that Anglo American PLC will encounter because of the ART program. The worst scenario is that at the end of the day, the HIV/AIDS victims will be absent from work occasionally.
Moreover, some of the patients will not respond to the antiretroviral drugs, and the company will have to retrain other workers and replace them in their job positions. The hospitalization payments and death benefits are overwhelming to the company. The mentioned costs that the company will have to meet translate into millions of losses, and thus are weaknesses associated with the ART program.
Recommendations to the company The first thing that Anglo American ought to know is that struggling to combat HIV/AIDS in South Africa single-handedly is overwhelming. Anglo American PLC was bold enough to announce that it would provide ART to its South African workforce at the company’s expense. However, the situation is now getting out of hand, and it is time the company admitted their defeat.
The executives of the organization ought to approach the World Health Organization (WHO), the Global Business Council on HIV/AIDS, the South African government, and other humanitarian organizations and inform them of their grievances. They should seek financial assistance from the mentioned organizations and other well-wishers who may be willing to assist.
The main approach that the company will use to ensure that all infected employees are committed to the program is subjecting them to be responsible for managing and financing the ART program partially. The beneficiaries of the program should allow a small percentage of their salaries to be channeled towards financing the program.
The HIV infected employees should be their brothers’ keepers, where, the employees should ensure that every infected person takes the antiretroviral drugs responsibly. Any person who transmits the HIV to another person willingly should face harsh criminal charges, and there ought to be a penalty for the infected people, who do not adhere to the prescriptions of the doctors.
There should be guiding and counseling sessions for those people, who drop out from the treatment routines, as this could reduce the hopelessness that some people develop once they discover their HIV status.
Evaluation of the recommended courses of action Admitting defeat and asking for help from the government and other organizations would be the last thing that Anglo American PLC would desire. This is because it had bravely announced that it would provide ART to its workforce at the expense of the company. However, when matters are unbearable, the only way out is to ask for help instead of struggling to please some stakeholders at the expense of the company.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Anglo American PLC in South Africa by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Subjecting employees to be responsible in managing and partially financing the ART program would sound to be cruel at first. The beneficiaries of the program would feel overwhelmed, and they would distrust the company that they had trusted all along.
However, the negative insights would diminish with time, and the HIV infected people would start being responsible for their actions. They would be their brothers’ keepers and it would be easier to control the entire situation, given the harsh criminal charges on irresponsible people.
Migrant workers Migrant workers are very essential because they bring innovative ways of running the operations of the company. However, the migrants are likely to acquire and spread HIV/AIDS while in South Africa. Imposing a law to ban migrant workers will be very unfair in the contemporary world. Instead, Anglo American should embark on educating and bringing awareness to the migrants.
They should find ways to encourage the migrants to participate in the awareness and prevention programs. The migrants ought to be cautioned about the possibility of acquiring the deadly virus if they engage in immoral behaviors.
Prevention initiatives like the distribution and insisting on the use of condoms would play a significant role in containing the migrants. Skill related training, Voluntary Counseling and Testing (VCT), care, and wellness programs would help greatly in incorporating the migrants into the South African work environment.
Pharmaceutical companies The pharmaceutical companies have a huge role to play when it comes to the issue of addressing the HIV/AIDS epidemic in South Africa. GlaxoSmithKline’s approach of allowing Anglo American to purchase the antiretroviral drugs at a tenth of the market price is recommendable. Other drug makers should also employ GlaxoSmithKline’s approach of cutting prices for any non-profit making organizations.
The South African HIV/AIDS epidemic is known globally and the help of the pharmaceutical companies towards saving the HIV-infected people in the country would be a great show of social responsibility. The companies ought to know that the entire world is depending on them, and if they fail to meet people’s expectations, the infected people would die mercilessly.
Conclusion From the discussions, it is evident that multinational enterprises with businesses in South Africa are really facing tough moments. Apart from struggling to make profits, they have to address the unending needs of the ailing society. However, investors should not shy away from investing in South Africa, as it is one of the thriving nations in Africa. They should join hands in addressing the HIV/AIDS epidemic in South Africa.
The efforts employed by Anglo American PLC are commendable; however, it is a high time that the government recognized its efforts. Indeed, it would not be worthwhile for the company to keep on struggling to please some stakeholders while risking its existence in South Africa. The South African government should increase its budget allocations towards addressing the HIV/AIDS epidemic and stop blaming Anglo America.
Moreover, the South Africans should learn to behave responsively, accept to engage in voluntary counseling and testing, and adhere to medication willingly.
Humanitarian organizations, NGOs, companies, the World Health Organization, the Global Business Council on HIV/AIDS, and all well-wishers around the world should rise up to find effective strategies to address the HIV/AIDS epidemic that is adversely affecting the South African economy.
Works Cited Daniles, John, Lee Radebaught, and Daniel Sulivan. International Business: Global Edition, Upper Saddle River, New Jersey: Pearson Higher Education, 2011. Print.
Walker, Liz, Graeme Reid, and Morna Cornell. Waiting to Happen: HIV/AIDS in South Africa: The Bigger Picture, Claremont, South Africa: Juta and Company Ltd, 2004. Print.
Walmart in the South Problem Solution Essay college essay help near me: college essay help near me
Table of Contents Introduction
Introduction Walmart’s success in Mexico can be attributed to its competitive cost-reduction strategy. The implementation of NAFTA helped to solve most of the problems that Walmart was facing. Part of the success comes from the new manufacturing companies that established in Mexico. The production of goods in Mexico reduced Walmart’s reliance on imports.
Improved infrastructure played a role in enhancing the effectiveness of the firm’s logistics system. Walmart faces reduced growth in the U.S. market, and varied success in the international markets. There is a culture clash between subsidiaries’ managers and the group’s executives. The firm can use local brands to enter new markets. There is a greater opportunity if Walmart can exploit the unmet needs in the emerging markets.
Analysis The implementation of NAFTA helped to solve most of the problems that Walmart was facing (Daniles, Radebaught and Sulivan 365). Walmart is known as a low price retailer. Without NAFTA, Walmart was finding it hard to maintain low prices. A tariff rate of 10% made it difficult to compete with local firms (Daniles, Radebaught and Sulivan 365). It shows that Walmart relied on imports, before the formation of NAFTA.
Walmart’s success can be attributed to NAFTA, which is based on imported goods. Part of the success comes from the new manufacturing companies. As a result of the new manufacturing companies, Walmart does not need to import some of the products. The tariff rate is 3% in the post-NAFTA era (Daniles, Radebaught and Sulivan 365).
Walmart can obtain the goods at a free-tariff rate if they are manufactured in Mexico. The manufacture of goods in Mexico helped Walmart to avoid imports. Freight costs and tariffs are eliminated as a result of local production. NAFTA helped to reduce the cost of imported goods.
Part of the success comes from improved infrastructure. Better infrastructure has helped Walmart to solve the logistical problems that it encountered when it entered Mexico (Daniles, Radebaught and Sulivan 364). The firm was finding trouble to use its experience in logistics because Mexico lacked supportive infrastructure. The Mexican government and the private sector have been involved in improving infrastructure.
Any American firm would have encountered similar logistical problems. Walmart’s central distribution centers have reduced part of the problem. The distribution centers provide a central location, which reduces the overall distance that goods need to be transported. It can be noted that Walmart’s competitive strategy provides its ability to succeed.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Walmart has continuously reduced prices as part of its competitive strategy (Daniles, Radebaught and Sulivan 364). Walmart relies on low prices to capture a larger market share. The ability to negotiate with suppliers for lower prices is Walmart’s competitive strategy. Walmart captured a large market share through acquisitions, which gave it a higher bargaining power over suppliers.
Competitors collaborated to have a similar advantage. However, they are disappointed by Walmart’s continuous reduction of product prices. Walmart’s success in competitive pricing can be attributed to its strategy to gain a large market share, and collaborate with suppliers. Another American retailer would not have succeeded with a different strategy. Walmart’s strategy in reducing costs gave it a competitive advantage.
Comerci and Soriana have combined their purchases to gain a higher bargaining power over suppliers (Daniles, Radebaught and Sulivan 365). Walmart’s main strategy is to reduce costs by working closely with suppliers. Comerci and Soriana are forced to combine their purchases because they have lost their market share.
Comerci and Soriana need a continuous improvement strategy to reduce cost. The firms need internal controls to reduce costs continually. If they can continually reduce costs, they will be able to match Walmart’s competitiveness.
Walmart’s strategy in Mexico and Central America is to focus on cost reduction, and an efficient logistics system. The effectiveness of the logistics system has been used to support suppliers, and the distribution network (Daniles, Radebaught and Sulivan 364). Walmart segmentation makes it easier to target specific demographic groups.
Bilateral agreements have reduced the tariff rates of imports from 49 countries (Daniles, Radebaught and Sulivan 365). Walmart has gained a wider range of option in countries from which it can import goods. NAFTA reduced tariff rates in North America making it easier for the firm to import product from the U.S. into Mexico.
Geographical proximity has an impact on free trade agreements as it can be seen in the NAFTA agreement. It has an impact on the cost of freight. It affects the speed at which goods may be imported. When countries are located close together, goods take less time on board.
We will write a custom Essay on Walmart in the South specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Some of the challenges the firm may face as it expands include culture clashes, logistical problems, intense rivalry from local brands, and misunderstanding consumer preferences in different countries. Intense rivalry emerges when competitors copy Walmart’s pricing strategy. Misunderstanding consumer demand comes from entering new markets. Logistical problems are attributed to poor infrastructure, and different trends in new markets.
Alternatives Enter new markets using local brands, and then convert to Walmart after some time (BDC par. 4)
Walmart used the same approach in Mexico (Daniles, Radebaught and Sulivan 363). It can work in markets where people are loyal to local brands. The firm may also use local brands permanently.
The firm can capture a large market share rapidly because it is able to benefit from the local brand.
It provides time to win local brand loyalists, before changing to Walmart.
It provides time learn and integrate new cultures.
It may build the local brands instead of promoting Walmart as a brand.
It may be necessary to have separate marketing programs to capture different brands, which may increase marketing costs.
Find markets for products that can be made locally as new products
Eyring, Johnson and Nair (par. 5) suggest that the best way to succeed in the emerging markets is to find unmet needs, and develop products to meet the needs.
The firm can seek to find out why some products are not very successful, and find ways of increasing the attractiveness of the products. Eyring, Johnson and Nair (par. 3) discuss that multinationals fail to succeed in emerging economies because most of them think that reducing costs is the only formula to succeed.
New products in new markets have a potential for rapid growth in revenues.
Customers in emerging markets have a tendency of trying new products (BDC par. 3).
New products may need a lot of marketing to create awareness.
New products may turn into slow moving stock.
New products may need importation, which increases cost.
Walmart can succeed by targeting the largest social class in a country
Eyring, Johnson and Nair (par. 5) explain that when a company targets high-income earners in emerging economies, they may not be very successful. The reason is that high-income earners do not form a large part of the population in emerging economies.
Middle-income earners are increasing in emerging markets.
Revenues rely on the sale of basic commodities, which can get support from middle-income earners.
The largest social class may have a low purchasing power, especially in emerging markets.
The major difference between high-income earners and middle-income earners may be in the purchase of durables. Middle-income earners may purchase less of durable products than high-income earners.
Walmart needs to update its automatic logistics system to recognize products with a high percentage of discounts, which they would not want to be reordered
It will prevent reordering of products that do not maximize profits.
It will be costly to regularly update the programmed system to match emerging needs.
It will need verbal communication between managers of units, executives, and developers of the program.
One of the ways of managing culture diversity is by managing the flow of information
Nataatmadia and Dyson (581) discuss that knowledge sharing can applied down-upwards within an organization to improve multicultural understanding. Nataatmadia and Dyson (582) support written communication as opposed to verbal communication for communities where English is learnt in the classroom rather than from practice.
Written communication creates time for better statements and understanding between members.
Written communication gives time to non-native English speakers to understand the subject.
Managers can learn new things about the people’s culture.
Written communication may require support software such as intranet or internet.
It involves additional cost.
Written communication may reduce openness, which is necessary for sharing knowledge.
The Arkansas executive can allow managers in individual countries to create their own organizational culture provided that they meet the firm’s objectives
The organization can have only the core parts of its organizational culture standardized.
The subsidiaries can meet the organization’s goals without having a culture clash between managers and employees.
Walmart’s organizational culture may be lost when each subsidiary is identified with a different organization culture.
It may difficult to transfer the same success Walmart has in the U.S. to other countries if managers cannot adapt to Walmart’s organizational culture.
Conclusion Walmart has the alternative to manage by objectives, and allow subsidiaries to form their own organizational cultures. Sharing knowledge can be used to reduce culture clashes between managers.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Walmart in the South by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Walmart continuously reduces prices, which may prevent competitors from catching up with its low price strategy. Competitive pricing may not always be successful. Exploiting the unmet needs is a formula that may work best in emerging markets.
Recommendations The firm can enter new markets using local brands. Acquisitions are a good penetration strategy in new markets with strong local brands.
Television advertisement provides a better coverage, but is very expensive. In the U.S., in 2011, it was about $110,000 on average for a 30-second ad (Crupi par. 1). They can be used in the early stages, before the firm reverts to other methods of advertisement. Later, the firm can scrap out advertisement costs, which can be used to lower the cost of products.
Works Cited BDC. Doing Business in Emerging Markets. 2010. Web.
Crupi, Anthony. In Their Prime: Broadcast Spot Costs Soar. 2011. Web.
Daniles, John, Lee Radebaught and Daniel Sulivan. International Business. 14th ed. 2011. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Pearson Education. Print.
Eyring, Matthew, Mark Johnson and Hari Nair. New Business Models in Emerging Markets. 2011. Web.
Nataatmadia, Indrawati and Laurel Dyson. “Managing the Modern Workforce: Cultural Diversity and Its Implications.” Proceedings of the 2005 Information Resources Management Association International Conference. San Diego. (2005): 580-584. IRMA. Web.
War for Talent Analytical Essay writing essay help
Introduction The global economy has significantly expanded within the last decade. Human resource managers, business leaders, and other entrepreneurs at large have found it increasingly challenging to recruit new and skilled workforce in their business institutions.
These business organisations need skilled employees for critical entrepreneurial processes such as decision-making and strategic planning in order to gain competitive advantage in both local and global markets. However, the gap between the need for skilled workers and available employment positions is seemingly becoming a challenge for many business organizations around the globe.
This phenomenon has crowned into a war for talent that has challenged the accomplishment of goals and objectives for many businesses and organisations. This paper provides insight to the extent to which war for talent has become both a local and global challenge for businesses and organizations.
The Global War for Talent Numerous researchers have unveiled that many organisations, especially in America, Nordic region, and Asia, have gradually fallen short of competitive talents (Chambers, Foulon, Handfield-Jones, Hankin,
Using Infrared Technology to Determine the Hydrocarbons in Contaminated Soil Dissertation best essay help: best essay help
Literature review A number of literature reviews have been documented on using infrared technology to determine the hydrocarbons in contaminated soil. Ten literature reviews will be utilized in the research below. Their reliability had to be checked to ensure that they are scholarly.
A New Perspective to Near-Infrared Reflectance Spectroscopy asserts that spectroscopy focuses on the analysis on infrared light as part of wavelength emanated, reflected, or spread from a substance (Ge et al. 2007).
According to the authors, spectral measurement enables the assessment of the amount of light reflected or emanated from a gas, solid, or liquid. Analysis of Diesel Fuel Contamination in Soils by Near-Infrared Reflectance Spectrometry and Solid Phase Microextraction-Gas Chromatography assert that because soil is assorted in nature the standard physicochemical assessment of its characteristics is costly and inefficient (Malley
The Free Trade Role in the Industrial Development of Syria Argumentative Essay essay help free: essay help free
Introduction Free trade does not support local firms to grow in the developing world. This paper supports the debate argument that free trade will inhibit the flexibility of developing countries to use trade policy for industrial development and could leave firms in developing countries worse off. The case study used is Syria.
Shortcomings of free trade Growing industries
In the developing world, infant firms cannot gain competitive advantage in the context of increased levels of competition from foreign companies.
Major exports of Syria Crude oil Fruits Vegetables Petroleum products Wheat Live animals Major imports of Syria Machinery Metal products Chemical products Yarn Paper Livestock products Figure 1. A summary of the major imports and exports of Syria.
It is notable that most governments in the developing world are not adequately funding their local firms to expand. This is also the case in Syria.
The non-existing anti-dumping laws in the nation would result in many sub-standard products being sold, which could negatively impact host business organisations. It might be difficult for local firms to diversify the economy of the country due to the impacts of free trade.
In the developed world with strict environmental laws, firms might take their production centres to the developing world where they cause massive pollution. This has been witnessed in Syria.
Critical awareness of the complex nature of international trade
Four main players are involved in facilitating cross-border trade (Daniels, Radebaugh
The Ongoing Turmoil in Syria Term Paper online essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Causes of the Conflict
Probable Geopolitical Consequences
Introduction The turmoil in Syria has been going on since 2011 and it has made many people to flee the country to neighboring countries such as Lebanon, Jordan and Turkey as refugees. Tens of thousands of people have lost their lives due to the war which has also caused a lot of destruction of the country major cities such as Damascus and Aleppo.
The causes of the conflict are complex because Syria is a multi ethnic society whose population is drawn from different social and religious backgrounds. Syria also has poor relations with some of her neighbors such as Israel, Turkey and Saudi Arabia. Syria’s civil war has caused a lot of divisions between various countries in the region.
As a result, Arab governments together with other major global powers such as the U.S., Russia and France have failed to come up with an appropriate strategy which can end bloodshed in the country. This paper will discuss the causes of the conflict in Syria and the geopolitical consequences that are likely to arise from it in the long run.
Causes of the Conflict Syria has a complex history, which affects the manner in which different social and religious segments of the population relate with one another. Since its independence in 1946, the country has faced different challenges which have made it difficult for its citizens to remain united. One of the significant developments in the country occurred when the Baath Party became more prominent in the late 1940’s and early 1950’s.
The Syrian government challenged the establishment of the state of Israel and the subsequent expansion of its borders (Held and Cummings 287). General Hafez al Assad became the country’s leader in 1970 and he immediately implemented policies that were mainly driven by Arab nationalism and secular ideologies.
Since Assad was from Alawi; a minority ethnic community that was well represented in the Syrian armed forces, he was able to maintain his hold on power for a long period of time.
Unequal representation in the military in the last four decades has caused a lot of resentment from other segments of the population living in Syria, the most notable of which are Sunni Arabs. Moreover, the previous regime committed a lot of atrocities against Sunnis who tried to challenge the regime of General Assad which resulted in the massacre of tens of thousands of people.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Syria has also been involved in Lebanon’s internal politics and fought against Israeli forces during the country’s civil war in the late 1970’s. In addition, Syria also has hostile relations with Israel due to the latter’s excision of part of its territory in the Golan Heights.
Therefore, this shows that the country’s conflict goes beyond its borders and it involves other countries in the region which either support or oppose President Assad’s regime (Held and Cummings 290).
After Bashar al Assad took over from his father, General Assad, in 2000, he initiated various economic reforms which helped to strengthen the country’s ties to other European nations. However, he continued to oppress his opponents which helped to strengthen his power.
In addition, the Syrian regime was accused of storing large quantities of chemical weapons and sponsoring terrorist activities against other nations in the region. Sunnis have a lot of resentment towards Assad’s regime because it has denied an opportunity to participate in the political and social affairs of the country, thereby exacerbating ethnic divisions between them and Alawis (Held and Cummings 291).
Even though Assad’s regime opened up the economy to all segments of the populations, his failure to address longstanding differences between Alawis and Sunnis worsened tensions in the country. In addition, the military which is dominated by soldiers from the president’s Alawi ethnic group was used to suppress any form of opposition to the regime.
Syria has also hosts a large number of Palestinian refugees who have stayed in the country for a long period to escape harsh political and socio-economic conditions in their homeland. Before 2011, many people in the country were discouraged from taking part in any form of dissent that would destabilize Al Assad’s regime.
However, the wind of change that swept through Egypt, Libya and Tunisia emboldened some segments of the population to engage in revolts to topple Assad’s regime (Held and Cummings 293). The violent reprisals by government forces against protesters emboldened opposition groups that were mainly led by Sunni Arabs to wage war against government soldiers.
We will write a custom Term Paper on The Ongoing Turmoil in Syria specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Since they were able to receive weapons from Turkey and other neighboring countries, they conducted military assaults against government positions in Aleppo, Damascus and other major cities. In addition, technology played a major role because it allowed local opposition groups to develop networks with other international organizations which provided them with resources they needed to fight Assad’s regime.
As time progressed, the civil war began taking on a religious tone where opposition groups began pursuing a radical Islamist agenda to challenge Assad’s rule. Extremist Sunni fighters became more involved in the conflict and they sought to support Syrian Sunni Arabs who as the majority population in the country, felt that they needed to take over from Assad.
Fundamental Islamic groups took advantage of the growing tensions in the country to reassert themselves and their agenda in the region. Therefore, since then, the Syrian conflict has attracted international players who have different economic, political and regional interests (Held and Cummings 294).
Many Alawis, who are only ten percent of the population, do not want Assad to give up power because they fear that this will pave the way for an authoritarian Sunni regime to take over. Since the region is dominated by wealthy Sunni monarchies in Saudi Arabia, Qatar and United Arab Emirates, they fear they will be subjected to high levels of persecution and discrimination.
Sharp religious differences have made the conflict to become more complex and difficult to resolve. The Druze and Christians in the country are also not ready for a dominant Sunni regime because they fear that they will lose the freedoms they have enjoyed for the past fifty years.
Christians feel that their future in the country is uncertain and they prefer the status quo to prevail to prevent radical Sunni elements from taking over the country’s leadership. Even though some Syrian Kurds prefer to have their own homeland, others have remained loyal to Assad’s regime because they have faith in him as the only person who can bring stability to the country (Held and Cummings 294).
Therefore, they feel that by aligning themselves with Assad, they will become more influential in future especially if the current regime manages to contain the rebellion. Consequently, the social, political, ethnic and religious factors that are directly related to the conflict make it difficult for it to be resolved amicably.
Probable Geopolitical Consequences Syria is located in a region that has historically witnessed different political and religious issues which continue to affect countries that share borders with it. It borders countries which face various political, social and religious challenges such; Iraq, Jordan, Turkey, Israel and Lebanon. For instance, the country has been involved in wars with its neighbor, Israel due to its occupation of Golan Heights since the late 1960’s.
Not sure if you can write a paper on The Ongoing Turmoil in Syria by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Assad’s defeat and subsequent removal from power would help the Israelis to become more assertive in the region due to hostile relations they have had with the current and previous Syrian regimes (Held and Cummings 297).
The frequent tensions the country has with the U.S., Israel and other western powers have denied it an opportunity to participate fully in global trade. For a long time, Syria has had stronger economic ties with the former USSR and Iran compared to the west and this was seen through the socialist leaning policies of the previous regime.
Even though the current president has embraced free market policies, the country still maintains strong multilateral relations with Russia and Iran. This approach has helped the country to overcome sanctions imposed against it by the U.S. and other western nations, thereby denying the country an opportunity to actualize its real potential.
Since it identifies itself with the Palestinian cause, Syria, just like many other nations in the region do not have diplomatic ties with Israel. In addition, the country’s secularist policies and its close relations with Iran have offended Saudi Arabia, whose laws are highly influenced by Islamic Sharia.
However, since Assad’s regime has battled Sunni militants since the outbreak of the civil war in 2011, Saudi Arabia has been keen to have a regime change in the country (Held and Cummings 299). Its support of local rebels who seek to overthrow Assad has worsened bilateral relations between the two countries. In addition, this situation is complicated further by strong Iranian support for Assad’s regime.
Turkey, one of the nations in the region, which hosts a large number of Syrian refugees, does not have good relations with President Assad’s regime. Syria has for long been accused of supporting Kurdish separatist rebels, seeking to form their own state in the southern part of Turkey.
In addition, active involvement by Turkey in the conflict has also worsened bilateral relationships between the two countries because some rebel attacks against government forces have been initiated from Turkey. Therefore, the Turkish government supports a regime change in Syria, because of its perceived close relations with the U.S. and Israel.
The close political and economic links Syria has with Iran have helped it to overcome years of isolation from the international community (Held and Cummings 301). As a result, President Assad’s regime has managed to stay in power since 2011 due to the strong support it receives from Iran and Russia.
This has worried many Sunni Arab states in the region which do not have good relations with Iran due to its radical Shia doctrines and expansionist agenda.
Iran plays an important role in Syria and this will continue to create tension between the country and western states which consider Iran as a state financier of terrorism. The close Shiite relations between the two countries have seen many Iranian pilgrims visit Syria, for religious purposes.
Therefore, Iran will continue to use Syria to assert its role as a regional powerhouse and this will continue to deteriorate the relationships Syria has with other countries in the region. Since Iran is suspected of developing nuclear weapons, its close ties with Syria have made regional neighbors such as Israel and Saudi Arabia to worry about President Assad’s real intentions (Held and Cummings 304).
In addition, Syria is accused of storing dangerous chemical weapons and many countries in the region suspect that it may not hesitate to use them if it feels threatened. Therefore, this has continued to complicate the current conflict in the country.
Since western nations have offered a lot of support to Israel, Syria has been forced to maintain relations with Russia to overcome its international isolation. The previous regime had strong ties with the Soviet Union, offered a lot of technical and military support to help Syria for a very long time.
Since the collapse of the U.S.S.R., the Russia has continued to offer military and economic support to Assad’s regime to help it to maintain its influence in the region. Even though Syria tried to improve its relations with France and the U.S. after the current president took over power, it has relied on Russia’s veto powers in the UN Security Council to remain in power.
Russia has shot down proposals by other nations such as the U.S., France, U.K. and Turkey, to endorse military action against President Assad’s regime (Held and Cummings 306). As a result, this has helped President Assad to maintain his tight grip on power, thereby making it difficult for rebels to overthrow his regime.
The U.S. which is a strong supporter of Israel considers Syria as one of the most evil regimes in the world. Syria’s constant meddling in Lebanon’s internal affairs and the hostile relations the country has with Israel has made it difficult for the current regime to sustain beneficial bilateral exchanges with the US. The U.S. government has imposed sanctions against Syria accusing it of supporting terrorism in the region.
In addition, the country has also been accused of allowing insurgents to cross over into Iraq to launch violent attacks against the regime and U.S. forces who are based there.
Even though previous attempts have been made by the U.S. government to facilitate peace talks between Syria and Israel, the U.S. government has voiced its opposition towards the regime since the outbreak of the civil war (Held and Cummings 309). As a result, the U.S. favors the toppling of the current regime due to its close relations with Iran and Russia to avert any violent conflicts from occurring in future.
Conclusion The conflict in Syria is complex and this requires the current regime to collaborate with other nations in the region to end the bloodshed. In addition, the international community needs to facilitate positive exchanges between the government and the rebels to high incidents of violence which are being witnessed.
All parties involved need to be encouraged to settle their differences to ensure peace and stability in the country is restored. Moreover, President Assad needs to be encouraged to initiate political and economic reforms to allow other segments of the population to participate in the running of government. In the long term, this will help the country to deal with different problems it is facing.
Works Cited Held, Colbert C., and John Thomas Cummings. Middle East Patterns: Places, Peoples, and Politics. Boulder: Westview, 2014. Print.
Zara Fashions’ Supply Chain Quantitative Research Essay college essay help: college essay help
Abstract Zara Fashions has been struggling to improve its supply chain as a way of improving its supply delivery in the market. The management realized that the process needs modern technologies and effective strategies that would help in reducing the duration of product storage and transportation. This is important in reducing the cost of the product when it is finally delivered in the market.
With the current competitive market, the management has realized that it has to restructure its processes to achieve success. This success can only be realized if the firm remains consistent in its supply chain strategies. For success to be achieved, goods of high quality should be availed to the customers at the right time and in the recommended shape in different markets.
It has been keen on developing superior means of delivering its products to the customers in a superior manner. The supply chain management of this firm has been fashioning its product delivery styles in order to meet the demands of the market. The main aim has been to ensure that the firm’s products are delivered in the right form and at the appropriate time.
Shortening the period of delivering products to the market does not only cut the cost of warehousing, but also ensures that the products are always available in the market. The management of Zara must realize that it is consistent in the market in terms of availing its products to the customers. All its products should always be available in the market.
Introduction Supply chain management is one of the most important tasks that determine the success of an organisation in the market. Shah (2009, p. 67) defines supply chain as “A system of organisations, people, activities, information, and resources involved in moving a product or service from the supplier to the customer.”
From this definition, supply chain is a system with various components that should work together towards achieving the objective of moving products from the supplier to all the customers in various locations. Zara Fashions is one of the leading Spanish retailers of clothes and accessories.
This firm is operating in a highly competitive environment where customer satisfaction is the core component of remaining afloat in the market. There are a number of market competitors offering similar products in the market, and this means that if this firm expects to retain its lead in the market, then it has to ensure that its products and product delivery method are superior to that of other competitors.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Supply chain defines the product delivery method, and is one of the most important tasks that would determine the level at which a given firm is able to satisfy its customers. It is not enough to manufacture high quality products and pile them in the stores.
It is important to understand the clear objectives for this research. The main objective of the researcher is to find the approaches that Zara uses in its supply chain strategy by answering the above question.
The researcher will use both the primary and secondary sources of information to find answers to the above research questions. It is important to note that the secondary sources of information will be used to support the findings that will be gathered from the primary sources of data. Both sources of data are considered important in this research.
This research would seek to find a way through which Zara can ensure that its products are always in the market. When a customer finds that their preferred product is not in the shelf, they may consider shifting loyalty to alternative brands that they consider reliable in availing their products in the market. An effective supply chain will always help ensure that the products are always available in the stores.
The purpose of this research can be achieved by developing research questions that would help in the process of collecting both primary and secondary data. It is true that a researcher will always encounter massive information, most of which may not be relevant to the research topic. When this occurs, it is possible that a researcher may be swayed into gathering irrelevant information as part of the data to be analysed.
This does not only waste the time of the researcher, but also limits the quality of data hence the report will not be credible. For this reason, it is always necessary to have research questions that would help in guiding the collection of data.
The researcher will specifically focus on finding the answers to the specific questions. It means that any data that does not give direct an answer to the questions will be regarded as irrelevant to the research. The following are specific questions that should be answered from this analysis.
We will write a custom Essay on Zara Fashions’ Supply Chain specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More What are the trends in supply chain management?
How does the supply chain of Zara compare to that of its competitors?
What is the impact of technological advancements in the processes managing employees?
How can effective and advanced supply chain become a competitive advantage of the company?
Future weblogs will discover the “soft underbelly” on business framework advancement in depth, looking at, for example, and intellectual and modify control issues. Another idea is that while supply stores have persisted for a lengthy period, most companies have only believed what was occurring within their “four surfaces.”
Few businesses recognized much less handled the entire chain of actions that eventually provided products to the final client. The result was sketchy and often worthless supply stores. Supply chain management, then, is the active control over supply chain actions to increase client value and achieve a maintainable competitive advantage.
It symbolizes an attempt by the development chain companies to develop and run supply stores in the most effective
Burberry Company Overview Report writing essay help
Table of Contents The Burberry Company/Brand
Burberry in Dubai
The Burberry Company/Brand Burberry is a modernized fashion and a luxury retail company that emerged around 1856 from the United Kingdom when a twenty-year man, Thomas Burberry, opened a shop for selling drapers in an area known as Basingstoke in England (Moon, 2004).
In a short span of time, Thomas Burberry managed to invent three important retail products: a waterproof, a gabardine, and a breathable fabric that quickly penetrated into the market and emerged as the most preferred fashion for persons interested in exploring extreme atmospheres (Moon, 2004).
Since the First World War, Burberry Company has managed to become the fabric of choice after the British Army preferred them to design official coats for the army.
Throughout the years, the company expanded gradually and dominated several markets within the European world before venturing in the Asian Pacific regions and China emerged as one of the suitable destinations (Moon, 2004). Burberry introduced their checkered pattern that involved light brown, red, black, and white tartan designs that officially became the signature check trademark.
Throughout the beginning and mid-1990s, the company was facing structural and strategic control dilemmas and questions of quality were emerging, although the profitability remained high (Moon, 2004). Reformists thought that the brand of the Burberry Company was lacking modernity, as it seemed turgid and conventional, and thus appealing only to the older consumers.
Rose Marie Bravo, a native New Yorker with over 25 years working experience in the fashion and luxury industry assumed the position of Chief Executive of Burberry and immediately proposed a series of innovative strategies (Moon, 2004). It was in 1997 and towards the new millennium, when the new chief executive emerged and begun reinventing the brand and trademark of Burberry.
Bravo repositioned the brand by introducing stylish and innovative luxury lifestyle brands, which seemingly attracted the younger consumers. Burberry has now diversified to women’s apparels, men’s wear, and various accessories (Moon, 2004). Burberry brand went through a series of innovative transformations until lately in China, when the Chinese trademark office revoked its copyright on red, black, and tan designs.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Luxury Theory/Anti-laws Reformists believe that the modern business world is dynamic and businesses depend on the interplay of various internal and internal environmental factors to succeed. Modern businesses and marketing of retail products depend on several business laws and marketing principles for perfection and survival (Bastien
Leadership and Organisational Change in MCFC Report college admissions essay help
Abstract This report entails an analysis of leadership and change in Manchester City Football Club. The report assesses the transformation that the football club has undergone since its inception in the 1800s to its current position. The report is organised into a number of sections. The first section entails a brief introduction, which provides an analysis on the high rate of commercialisation in the football industry.
The organisational changes that have been implemented such as change in club ownership are highlighted. The second section entails a literature review on leadership and organisational change. This section also evaluates the change management cycle that organisational leaders should take into account in the process of implementing change.
The third section entails an analysis of Manchester City Football Club and the transformations that have occurred since its takeover in 2008. The most applicable leadership theory to the case is also identified and explained. Finally, a conclusion and a number of recommendations on what the club’s management team should do in order to improve the club’s long-term survival and sustainability are highlighted.
Introduction Most people perceive sports as a way of spending their leisure time, while others consider it as a business. Football ranks amongst the highly commercialised sports in the world. Different football clubs have been established in the European region since the 1850s. The transformation into business can be traced back into the 1850s when football clubs started to compensate their players financially.
Subsequently, football clubs moved from being mere sporting associations into businesses. Nash (2000, p.465) holds that the ‘rate of commercialisation increased during the 1980s, as evidenced by the high rate of involvement by business institutions and corporations into the industry’.
Currently, football is considered as an international business. Subsequently, the industry is experiencing huge investments. In 2003, Roman Abramovich, a Russian billionaire, bought Chelsea Football Club for US $233 million while a Qatari billionaire bought Paris Saint German. Similarly, Mansour Bin Zayed Al Nahyan bought Manchester City Football Club.
The commercialisation of most professional football clubs has led to an increment in the clubs’ revenue. Some football clubs have lost their organisational culture due to commercialisation. Some football club supporters are not pleased with the high rate of commercialisation in the football industry.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Nash (2000, p.469) asserts, ‘some supporters have shown their discontent and have contested the fast changing state of modern football’. This report evaluates the changes that have occurred in Manchester City Football Club since its takeover by Sheikh Mansour bin Zayed Al Nahyan. Some of the issues that will be evaluated relate to the management team, player acquisition approach, and the high payments.
Leadership and organisational change Siraj-Blatchford and Manni (2007) posit that organisational change underscores the process through which an organisation implements the desired transformation. Siraj-Blatchford and Manni (2007) further argue that the effectiveness with which change is implemented defines an organisation’s success story or failure.
Siraj-Blatchford and Manni (2007, p.93) hold that change management ‘refers to a structured approach adopted by teams, organisations, and individuals in their quest to transition from the current to the desired state’.
Change management aims at assisting various internal and external stakeholders such as employees, shareholders, and customers to embrace the desired change. Organisational managers and leaders face a challenging task of ensuring that change is implemented effectively (Smid, Hout
Individual Leadership Development Planning Report best college essay help: best college essay help
Leadership can be understood as the competence to transform visualization into actuality with the help of appropriate planning. Efficient leaders can be developed and promoted by providing ample prospects for growth and involvement. In addition to the availability of prospects, it is crucial to keep pace with the need for growing skill levels.
There is a continuous change (for improvement) in the global market and as such, it does not require much time for the present skills and information to turn obsolete. So, education should never be considered to be completed. People have to keep on learning till they expect steady progress in their professional lives. It is also important to keep on improving the skills needed for any particular job profile (Dudovskiy 2013).
One of the most successful methods of keeping awareness and achieving such developmental aims is appropriate utilization of Individual Leadership Development Planning (ILDP). Such tools provide motivation to the employees (Jacobson 2014) and are beneficial for both employees and managers (WFLDP 2010).
The word ‘individual’ (within ILDP) should not be misinterpreted as an individual process. ILDP is also not a single or one-time experience. On the contrary, it is a continuous process that keeps on ascending to higher levels.
Rather than an individual effort, it is a team attempt that requires the participation of managers and employees where work is examined and future strategies for improvement are documented in order to assist employees’ understanding of work requirements and subsequent growth.
ILDP can be considered to be a shared obligation where employees are committed to take up new ventures and sincerely follow the documented strategies and the managers are devoted towards providing a suitable learning environment. There is ample proof that organizations across the globe are involving managers in such development programmes (Groves 2007).
It should be understood that even though managers are an essential part of an ILDP, it is the employees who are the crucial elements for the successful completion of such a programme. Employees should take keen interest in the ILDP and it should be their endeavour to attain self-improvement by utilizing the available growth-prospects. Employees are responsible for scheduling and overseeing the performance of their ILDP.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More They should understand and accept the fact that growth cannot be achieved simply by concentration during office hours; some after-office hours also need to be devoted. On the other hand, managers are responsible for improving the skills of employees.
They should educate (inform) them about the available growth prospects, assist them in developing appropriate strategies, and give continuous feedback and assistance. Doing this would also polish their knowledge and expertise (Jackson 2012).
Usually, the following steps are followed during the course of an ILDP. If these steps are followed, the expected growth might be achieved:
Evaluation of skills
Setting up of developmental aims
Identification of functions and strategies to be followed
Preparation of ILDP
Implementation of ILDP
Supervision and amendment of ILDP (if required)
Evaluation of skills This is the first step of an ILDP and is very crucial because this is the time when managers and employees interact with each other for the first time (regarding the development programme). They decide on the path to be taken for mutual growth (McCarthy 2008). It gives an opportunity to the employees to express their skills and desire to improve them through ILDP.
The managers can also have an idea about the employees’ skills and frame future strategies accordingly. It is quite possible that some of the employees might have unexpected skills and knowledge. Managers should appreciate such skills and information and try to maintain equilibrium between their knowledge and that of the employees.
Employees should be encouraged to come forward with an insight about their capabilities and requirements. They should do a self-assessment of their capabilities (Horowitz 2006).
Managing one’s own wisdom is an appreciative skill (McNamara 2014). Apart from the input from employees, other sources of information can be utilised while gauging skills; such sources might be: feedback from other employees, assessment results, and outcome of any preceding ILDP.
We will write a custom Report on Individual Leadership Development Planning specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The initial concern during skills assessment should be to recognise and get acquainted with the employees’ potencies and weaknesses. Performing this step would bring forth the development requirements pertaining to the employees’ job profile. Characteristically, the outcomes of yearly appraisal are crucial to discovering the existing growth requirements.
Once this is done, attention should be on the skills needed for future growth. Employees should articulate ambitions pertaining to their professional growth. The outcomes of such programmes can assist employees to win over their existing growth hurdles and be eligible for future augmentation of performance.
Supply chain in the cloud: where to start After successfully completing the first action of skills assessment, the subsequent action is to set up developmental aims. Developmental aims can be better understood and categorised if the skills to be developed by the employees are known. This signifies the ‘what’ skills. It is advisable to classify skill requirements according to apparent, explicit and quantifiable terms.
The developmental aims should be prioritised and managers and employees should cooperate with each other to divert developmental endeavours towards skill requirements that have highest urgency/importance. Areas of highest urgency/importance consist of those that are advantageous to employees and their organization as well.
Developmental aims should concentrate on skills that need enhancement and augment the current strengths. It is also important that attention on skills to be developed should be limited (that the employees can cope with comfortably); excessive stress to develop/improve all the required skills can prove to be depressing. It is a general practice to concentrate on two or four (maximum) skills annually.
Identification of functions and strategies to be followed Developmental actions signify the method (how) in which the recognised skills have to be built up. Managers might propose different strategies and assist employees in taking into consideration all possible training options. In turn, employees need to examine such options and choose the one they prefer; here, preference relates to the willingness and ability of employees to follow any particular strategy.
During the course of selection/decision, various factors have to be considered; such as employee’s capabilities and approach, the kind of activity, etc. Such an exercise would increase the chances of learning and curtail the involved cost.
Development can be in the form of various activities, some of which might be more apparent. It is always advisable to incorporate an amalgamation of various activities during the course of the development programme. Also, a single requirement should be represented by a couple of activities.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Individual Leadership Development Planning by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The ILDP can comprise of experiences during and after office-hours and also inside and outside the office. Employees should take their jobs as learning opportunities (Zenger 2013). The following list of such opportunities is not exhaustive; a fundamental checklist of options is provided:
Activities inside the office
Such activities are also known as ‘on-the-job-training’ opportunities and these have to be in accordance with the precise requirements of individuals.
‘Coaching’: During this process, managers observe the employees performance and try to recognise their drawbacks and advantages (plus-points). Individual assistance is given to employees to expand and improve the required skills.
‘Cross training’: This signifies imparting requisite training to employees in an additional field (other than the actual job responsibility) so as to expand the learning options. Employees are able to learn additional skills and maximise experience without changing their jobs.
‘Job enrichment’: During the job enrichment activity, individuals are given extra responsibility (related to another job position) and the related authority. As a result of this, individuals gain extra experience and their work becomes demanding and exciting.
‘Job rotation’: According to this particular method or activity, individuals are given different job responsibilities (other than their regular jobs). Such positions are on a temporary basis and individuals are rotated on different jobs. Such an exercise enables individuals to gain experience and expertise (possibly) in different fields (Axner 1993).
‘Special projects’: It is an understood fact that all employees are not of the same competency level. Similarly, different employees have different professional ambitions. So, different employees are given different tasks (that are different in magnitude and scope) according to their capabilities and requirements.
Activities outside the office
‘Internal training courses’: Under this method, employees are sent to external training sources such as information technology training centres and colleges to attain the requisite training.
‘College course work’: This method signifies courses offered by colleges that augment the knowledge of employees. This, in turn, would enhance their skills for existing and upcoming job responsibilities.
‘Community service’: If employees are allowed to participate in community welfare and other social activities, they will have unique experiences that might enhance their self-development.
‘External training courses’: When internal training courses are not sufficient (when they cannot provide the requisite training), external training options are considered.
‘Professional meetings’: There are various agencies that organise meetings. Such meetings are organised at various levels and by participating in such meetings individuals can gain a lot of experience and knowledge.
‘Self development’: This incorporates self-directed actions that might augment personal growth of individuals. Office libraries, subscribed magazines and other reading material can be utilised to achieve such growth.
‘Team work’: Working in teams inculcates a feeling of team-work and cooperation among individuals. They can have a larger perspective of various things and augment their growth.
It is beneficial to have a policy for monitoring the performance and subsequent growth of employees. This is beneficial for both employees and managers due to the fact that it allows them to identify any drawbacks in the programme. Such drawbacks give the employees and managers an indication that certain changes are required in the programme for better effectiveness. Such monitoring also provides a dual function: allows intermediate inspection and informs about the conclusion of a particular activity. Likewise different growth activities, there are different monitoring options as well (such as written and verbal monitoring reports).
Preparation of ILDP An ILDP serves as a place for recording the results of preceding actions. It is intended to reveal the performance for a period of one year (at least). On the contrary, the development process is not limited to one year but is a continuous process that has no closing stages. There are various components of an ILDP and following are some of the important ones:
Prioritization of all the developmental aims
Identification of aims
Finalization of activities
Finalization of completion date of activities
Finalization of training schedule
Estimation of budget
Status of various activities
Deciding subsequent monitoring date
Once the ILDP draft is ready, employees consult their managers. Managers review the draft and suggest changes, if any. The impact of the development programme’s schedule on the planning and budgeting of the organization is considered minutely. During the discussions, it is decided as to who will be bearing the costs of the programme (it has to be either the employee or the organization).
Implementation of ILDP After acceptance of the developmental programme plan, implementation is carried out by employees and managers and both of them are responsible for their respective roles in the programme. The employees should inform their managers about any hindrances faced during the execution of the programme. The employees are also responsible to inform their managers about the completion dates of various activities of the programme.
Managers are responsible to provide appropriate resources to the employees for the successful completion of various activities. For instance, they might have to assist them in various activities that require registration. Managers need to take active participation in the programme to improve the employees’ experience.
Supervision and amendment of ILDP (if required) Supervision of development programme can have great benefits. First of all, continuous supervision can help in motivating the employees and managers as well. Secondly, supervision identifies successful achievement of activities and if any activity is not successfully completed, appropriate training and motivation might be provided. Lastly, supervision suggests the time (when) and procedure (how) to amend the existing ILDP.
It should be understood that this step (supervision and amendment) does not signify the completion of the developmental programme. On the contrary, it gives an indication that the process has to be restarted.
Summary of key findings From the methodology of ILDP it was learnt that prior to implementing any ILDP, it is a must to evaluate the skills of employees, set up developmental aims and identify the functions and strategies to be followed. Once the ILDP (draft) is prepared by the employees, it has to have consent of concerned managers.
Any amendment to the draft has to be incorporated. During the implementation, it is crucial to have a proper monitoring and supervising system. It should be understood that once an ILDP is started, there is no immediate end to it.
Method of getting feedback 40 management portfolio holders across 20 colleges were interviewed for this purpose. A written consent to participate in the interview was obtained from all the respondents. Respondents replied to the questions based on experiences in their respective educational institutions.
Tools used for self-assessment The following tools were used for self-assessment:
Approvals from managers
Conclusion In order to succeed professionally, employees should conduct a self-assessment and participate in some ILD programme. Organizations find it beneficial in assisting their employees to participate in developmental programmes.
References Axner, M. 1993, The community leadership project curriculum, The Topsfield Foundation, Pomfret, CT.
Dudovskiy, J. 2013, Personal development plan: a sample. Web.
Groves, K. S. 2007, ‘Integrating leadership development and succession planning best practices’, Journal of management Development, vol. 26, no. 3, pp. 239-250.
Horowitz, L. B. 2006, Leadership development: building your personal plan. Web.
Jackson, J. A. 2012, A personal leadership development plan. Web.
Jacobson, D. 2014, Using IDPs to leverage strengths. Web.
McCarthy, D. 2008, How to write a great individual development plan (IDP). Web.
McNamara, C. 2014, Supervisorial development. Web.
WFLDP 2010, The individual development plan guide. Web.
Zenger, J. 2013, Throw your old plan away: 6 new ways to build leadership development into your job. Web.
Different Implementation of Cloud System Analytical Essay college application essay help
Table of Contents Abstract
Cloud Computing Model
Cloud Computing in Samsung Corporation
Cloud Computing in Nike
Challenges of using cloud computing in supply chain
List of References
Abstract Cloud system has become one of the most important business strategies in the current competitive business environment. The increasing need for communication, data analysis, data storage, and dissemination demands for improved information technology infrastructure that may not be available within a given business unit.
This has made it necessary for many firms such as Samsung and Nike, to outsource these services from vendors which offer cloud computing. This strategy not only improves communication within various departments, but also makes it possible for the company to monitor movement of products from the production plants to the market. However, the issue of privacy and security of the data has been cited as its main challenge.
Background Effective supply chain has become very vital for many firms as the market become increasingly competitive in various industries. According to Gibb (2006, p. 89), firms which operate in the global market have the pressure of delivering their products to the market within the shortest time possible and in the right shape.
The processes in supply chain management must be shortened to ensure that associated costs at every stage are significantly reduced. For instance, products should take the shortest time at storage as a way of reducing costs of storage, and the risk of damage when products take longer than expected in these stores.
It is also important to ensure that goods on transit are effectively monitored to ensure that they arrive at the desired markets within the time that was set (Molen
Working for a MNE and Bharti Airtel Report a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help
Introduction Various companies present diverse working terms and conditions based on the business environment and other factors such as such business profitability. Globalization issues have been shown to impact performance outcomes of business establishments across the world. Increased adoption technology and expansion of businesses continuously make firms enter into emerging markets to increase their sales.
The entry into new markets often disrupts long running standards. This paper considers two options of working in international companies. One options involves making a decision about working for a MNE, such as IBM moving into a developing country, for example, India. The second option involves deciding to work for a company from an emerging economy, such as Bharti Airtel, moving into a Western market, such as France.
The first option (working for a Western MNE) It is crucial to consider important aspects with regard to many MNEs in the developed world that focus on moving into developing markets in order to make a decision whether to work for them. The most recent global meltdown caused many MNEs in the US to rethink abut their operations and focus on entering developing markets such as India.
Based on the growth of about 70% that is expected from the emerging markets, I would choose to work for an MNE moving into a growing market. In fact, it has been projected that India and China would contribute to 40% growth of developing markets.
This could imply that working for a firm establishing itself in such markets would provide an excellent opportunity for growth and expansion. It would be essential to consider the following external influences that would either negatively or positively impact the performance of a MNE in a foreign developing world:
Industry structure and drivers of the economy
I would play an important role in offering the management advice with regard to setting operations in a global market characterized by a relatively high level of market growth. A comparison between the expected gains and challenges would be made. Ultimately, a decision would be made on the grounds that there will be more benefits than challenges.
On the contrary, it would also be important to make a decision to work for a MNE in a developing market on the premises that the management plans to execute strategies that would aim at preventing negative impacts of external factors in a new international market.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More An analysis of internal factors of a company would also be helpful when making a decision about working for a MNE. First, an analysis of the management vision would help. The vision should be structured in such a way that it supports the operations of the company in international markets.
Second, the strategy of the firm being considered would help an individual to realize whether or not it is destined to realize excellent growth trends in the future. For example, it would be important to consider if the firm has adopted strategic marketing and management models for short-term and long-term goals.
Third, it would be essential to analyze the extent to which the management creates value of the investments made by shareholders. If there would be a high level of value creation, then it would greatly determine the decision to work for a MNE. On the other hand, a firm that does not have excellent value creation trends would not present an important avenue in which to work.
The fourth internal factor to be considered is the past performance trends of a MNE. It would be practical to think that a firm with a good history of performance trends would also perform excellently in new international market. On the contrary, it would be quite difficult for a firm that has not been successful in local markets to perform well in an international market. The option has the following advantages:
High chances of exploitation of local economies
Achievement of economies of scale
However, the option would be characterized by the following disadvantages:
High competition from established companies
Pressure from global integration
Product customization issues
Second option (working for a company from an emerging country into a developed market in the west) It is apparent that emerging and developed markets have different opportunities and market characteristics. For example, a developed market in the US would be characterized by a much higher level of competition from business rivals than an emerging one. In addition, a developed market would require a high degree of product standardization and customization than it would be expected in an emerging market, such as India and China.
In order to make a decision to work for a firm such as Bharti Airtel in a foreign market, it would important to consider essential factors that would help in the short-term or long-term realization of goals.
We will write a custom Report on Working for a MNE and Bharti Airtel specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Organizational structure would be analyzed because it would determine the extent to which a firm would operate in a new market. If a firm’s organizational structure would allow efficient flow of management information, then it would result in excellent performance outcomes.
Pricing strategy adopted by MNEs in emerging market would probably be utilized in establishing operations in the developed world. For example, Kenya’s Safaricom and India’s Bharti Airtel have provided excellent low pricing models that have generated the best revenues for the two firms. Therefore, the adoption of low pricing strategies in the developed market would also help firms to record very good performance outcomes.
The achievement of globalization goals would be based on ideal chain value models that focus on prices and customer satisfaction. In the past, many firms from emerging economies have proved to be successful in developed countries, including Ranbaxy, MISC, Embraer, Teneris, and Sasol, among others.
Before making a decision about working with a MNE from an emerging market, it would also be critical to take into account the drivers of internal integration. Pressures for global integration and pressures for local responsiveness would influence the drivers.
Thus, the catalysts for internationalization would be utilized to maximize efficiency and facilitate the processes of assembling differentiated portions of a product into a standardized whole.
I would go for the choice of working for a MNE originating from a developing market on the premises of its level of IT integration in its operations. In the contemporary world, the use of IT is essential for all operations of a business, including product design, production, marketing, and distribution.
The advantages of this choice would be the following:
High chances of a firm’s leverage
Low pressure for global integration
Increased avenues of sources of global expansion operations
However, the option would be faced by the following disadvantages:
Not sure if you can write a paper on Working for a MNE and Bharti Airtel by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More High competition from multinational firms
Threat of substitute products
Adverse government policies
Challenges in the Development of Effective Organizational Cultures Report essay help online free: essay help online free
Table of Contents Introduction
Environment and organizational culture
Managing change and innovation
List of references
Introduction One of the tasks delegated to the management function in an organization is the implementation of organizational culture geared toward creating a good working environment for the human assets in an organization. Organizational cultures are developed to steer companies toward the development of certain values that dictate on the behavior of the member of the company.
It follows that the application of good organizational cultures opens the grounds for employees in a given company to develop good rapports with each other, and this promotes the attainment of ultimate competence on the performance of individual members of the organization. A good organizational culture can serve as a motivational factor for the members of the organization.
The management function has the obligation to ensure that the values set for the human assets in an organization to follow are geared toward creating a good working environment. It is common for companies to conduct various organizational changes to maintain high performance on the part of the employees. This paper will look into several aspects of an organization with reference to the current news on the aspects evaluated.
Environment and organizational culture Organizational cultures develop an internal environment with a perception of shared values among the members of the organization; thus, they can be effective in developing high performing workforce or they can fail if there is resistance on the part of the employees. The effectiveness of organizational culture depends on the level of acceptance portrayed by the human assets of an organization.
The acceptance of a new culture is dependent on the environment that the values develop in the company. The environment in an organization comprises of how employees relate to each other and the management through the values set by the organizational culture. In the current modern era, many companies have failed in the application of organizational cultures that best suit their companies’ internal and external environments.
The external environment is consists the society, competitors, suppliers, and customers (Ravasi
“The Prince” on the Dominance of Google Analytical Essay college admission essay help
Introduction Issues raised by Machiavelli in his “The Prince” are applicable to Google business as portrayed by its successful brand and profitability. Machiavelli elaborates that nothing makes a prince more popular than innovation. Google has proven to be very reliable and user-friendly to those who carry out their searches using its search engine.
Competitors can only be driven off in disgrace for failing to meet the standards that Google has developed for about a decade. Google has to maintain high profit margins to finance innovation. Machiavelli states that the prince needs to make large profits to gain the ability to venture into greater enterprises. Machiavelli states that a firm must appear humane.
Google holds the first position, with other three firms, on having the best reputation for CSR. In the study, consider the subjects as the customers, an attack as a competition, and the armies as the strategies. Machiavelli described that is better to be loved by the people than to build fortresses, and Google has achieved this requirement.
Google’s history Google’s history fits Machiavelli’s description of a man who becomes a prince. Sergey Brin and Lawrence E. Page gained experience in running BackRub, which gave them an advantage in developing a better search engine. Machiavelli explains, in regard to Hiero the Syracusan, that “whilst he had endured much trouble in acquiring, he had but little in keeping” (26).
Machiavelli (26) discusses how Hiero had to build new alliances and armies to sustain his reign. Google built its reputation and expertise for many years, but afterwards it has dominated the industry. It is an advantage to Google because it has gained experience dealing with problems as they arise.
Innovation and reputation Machiavelli (107) considers that nothing makes a prince more popular than innovation. Google selects a few of the best products to develop. Its products, such as YouTube, provide the user with a wonderful experience.
Machiavelli explains that innovations need to keep “the minds of the people in suspense and admiration, and occupied with the issues of them” (108). It means that a prince ought to venture into activities that bring him glory. Google’s products have been warmly received by the masses. It is an advantage to Google because it will always surpass consumer expectation.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Sforza upgraded his rank from a private man to a prince. Machiavelli (67) elaborates that a firm ought to be competitive at all times, through the story of Francesco Sforza. Sforza’s sons became private men by neglecting martial arts (competitive strategies). Google has remained dominant through commitment to continuous improvement.
Machiavelli discusses that Ferdinand of Aragon’s (Spain) inventions were done “in such a way that men have never been given time to work steadily against him” (108). Machiavelli (108) describes a successful prince, who dominated the others through innovation. The prince created a technology gap between himself and his competitors. It is advantage to Google because it will take competitors time to develop similar abilities.
Customer experience Google cares a lot about customer experience, even though it would like to maximize profits by posting as many advertisements as possible. Machiavelli (87) points out that a prince ought to avoid being hated and despised at the same time.
Google has avoided to be hated by customers due to being strategic rather than aggressive on posting advertisements. It is a disadvantage to Google because it cannot maximize profits, according to the available space.
Google has been able to compete successfully against Yahoo and Bing by focusing on the user preferences. Provided that the prince “is an excellent man, and revered by his people, he can only be attacked with difficulty” (Machiavelli 88). It will remain difficult to cut Google’s market share because it is highly preferred by the customers.
Machiavelli (10) elaborates that a disease is difficult to detect during the early stages, but easy to cure. Google uses CPC (cost per click) model to receive benefits (Kim par. 1). It may be considered as an early treatment for a disease that may favor Google against competitive pricing.
Machiavelli (106) implies that is better to be loved by the people than to fortify the city against external factors. It is better to impress the customer than to rely only on unique products. Unique products can be considered as fortresses.
We will write a custom Essay on “The Prince” on the Dominance of Google specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Machiavelli, when referring to Germany, explains that “a prince who has a strong city, and not made himself odious, will not be attacked, or if any one should attack, he will only be driven off with disgrace” (49). In Google’s case, new entrants are discouraged because of the investment needed to capture part of the market share.
Machiavelli (49) discusses that Germans had a habit of keeping enough food supplies to last a whole year. Attacking the Germans would take a lot of time because the lack of supplies is usually what drives people out of besieged cities.
Consequently, Google has kept its system updated to offer everything that the customer may need at an affordable rate. Competitors can only be driven off the market for failing to meet Google’s standards, which is an advantage to the firm.
Google’s products Gmail grew rapidly because it filled a gap that Yahoo lacked. Machiavelli describes that the one having come up with new methods “has for enemies all who have done well under the old conditions and the lukewarm defenders in those who may do well under the new” (24). The popularity of Gmail is an advantage because it appears attractive as a marketing agent.
Machiavelli (24) explains that the difficulty in acquiring a new territory comes from the application of new methods and their security. It is difficult and costly to create new technology, but it provides a lasting competitive advantage. Google filled a gap in consumer demand that Yahoo failed to address. Machiavelli (24) uses different stories to show that it is necessary to meet consumer preferences.
In the story of Cyrus, Machiavelli claims that “it was necessary that Cyrus should find the Persians discontented with the government of the Medes for him to give them relief” (24). Satisfying the discontent of people gave the great rulers ease in leading the people. It is advantageous to Google to foresee emerging trends, and satisfy them before competitors.
Google in China Google.com would have been more successful in China if there were no interference by the authorities to control the content accessible to the Chinese. Machiavelli explains that “for although one may be very strong in armed forces, yet in entering a new province, one will always need the goodwill of the natives” (4).
Google entered China when it already had a good reputation. The censorship in China worked against Google, which made Google to apply the Machiavelli’s concept in governing cities by their own laws.
Not sure if you can write a paper on “The Prince” on the Dominance of Google by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Machiavelli provides three options. The first is to “ruin” that country, which Google applied by operating from Hong Kong. However, it failed because the Chinese authorities slowed the pace of the searches, making it less preferred by users. The second is to reside there in person, which Google applied (Machiavelli 20).
Google applied the third concept as well, which states that the prince “is to permit them to live under their own laws” (Machiavelli 20). Google permitted China to live by its own laws by forming Google.cn specifically for China. It is different from Google.com.
The people in China can have a fast speed search engine similar to the one found in other countries due to Google.cn, which withdraws information that the Chinese authorities may consider offensive (Fox News par. 4). It is a disadvantage to Google because it cannot standardize its products in China.
Reliance on other firms The Android system may appear like the kingdom of France from Machiavelli’s point of view. Machiavelli (18) contrasts the Turkish kingdom with France. France had lords under the king, which made it easier to access power once one had made deals with the lords, and eliminated the king. The Turks had only a king, and no other hierarchy below him.
In the Turkish system, it was difficult to access power. Once accessed, one would have a stable kingdom. Examples of a Turkish system include Gmail and Google Search. Their operations do not rely on other firms. The advantage they offer Google is reliability during intense rivalry.
The French kingdom involves using the lords to access power. The prince will have an easy access because he only needs to eliminate the king (Machiavelli 18). Google using the Android system and other firms fits the description of the French kingdom. It offers an advantage to Google because it creates easy access to new markets.
Google relying on other firms to use the Android system creates an easy access to more smartphone and tablet users. The firms are compelled through contracts to set Google as their default search engine. Machiavelli explains that “such men can open the way into the state and render the victory easy, but if you wish to keep it afterwards, you meet with infinite difficulties” (18).
Machiavelli seems to state that a firm should learn to win the customer directly, instead of relying on other firms to access the market. Google has been compelled to attack the French kingdom with the smartphones’ segment, while the PCs’ segment is attributed to a Turkish kingdom. The French Kingdom, to Google, has the disadvantage of being unreliable in times of intense rivalry.
Profitability Google has to maintain high profit margins if it has to remain dominant. Machiavelli (76) discusses that a company needs to make large profits if it is to venture into greater enterprises. The prince would not be able to carry out new developments without increased liquidity. Increased liquidity is an advantage to Google’s operations.
Google’s net income, between 2004 and 2013, increased 32 times when its revenues increased 18 times (Google Inc. tables). Net income increased at a higher rate than revenues. Machiavelli (76) claimed that without high profits it would be easy for the prince to be despised. Machiavelli (76) examines two stories. Pope Julius II was known for liberality, only before he ascended into power.
The King of Spain was known for meanness. Liberality refers to the action of a prince to tax his subjects at a lower rate, in order not to offend them. Meanness refers to the aggressiveness of a prince in collecting taxes.
The King of Spain was able to carry out new enterprises as a result of higher tax revenues his men collected (Machiavelli 76). On the other hand, Pope Julius II changed from liberality to meanness, soon after becoming the most powerful man in the Roman kingdom.
The vast tax revenues enabled the pope to wage war without reviewing tax rates, which may have caused people to rebel in the times of war (rivalry). Higher profits have allowed Google to invest more in R
Emirates Nuclear Energy Corporation’s Employee Training Program Report essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu
The scope of the research In this research project, the proposal will dwell on the strategies that the Emirates Nuclear Energy Corporation uses in its bid to ensure optimal employee performance. The paper will offer the best strategies to ensure optimal performance of the employees. At the beginning, the paper will provide an intrinsic proposal after which it presents the research problem.
After this, the research will authenticate researches that have been carried out on the topic, besides presenting a comprehensive literature review to establish the present stand on the topic. Finally, the research proposal will deliver the final outcome which will be include proposals on the best ways to overcome the problem, reflect upon it, and finally present the most appropriate alternative approach that will minimize or solve the problem.
Research background The problem is the need to incorporate training and development as part of the human resource management policies of the Emirates Nuclear Energy Corporation (ENEC). Currently, the human resource management department have policies that do not optimally reinforce training and development among the employees. As a result, the company loses its engineers to its competitors due to lack of a successful training program.
Besides, the company does not have a very clear career path for the employees. In many jurisdictions, it is mandatory to have an independent training and development management function in an institution. Reflectively, design and skill development are the nerve centre for skilled and competent labour force.
Unfortunately, there are scenarios where the human resource management department of the ENEC is not very efficient and therefore fails to take up key control issues in time. There is no proper schedule for periodic and continuous employee training and development within the ENEC, which has a quantifiable module for tracking the feedback and level of engagement among the employees.
As a result, it is almost impossible to monitor the performance of each employee against the set targets. Besides, the lack of training and development may be attributed to low employee morale and redundancy at the organization.
It is therefore necessary to establish the most appropriate and sustainable training and development strategy for the ENEC to monitor and micromanage its employee productivity as is the case at the Abu Dhabi National Oil Company.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Research problem Despite the fact that the ENEC spends several millions in training seminars and internal programs, the training modules have not been modified to fit within the organization’s corporate culture.
Therefore, this research paper will establish the most appropriate approach that the ENEC should adopt to improve on its training and development strategies. The ENEC will greatly benefit from appropriate training and development strategies, which translates into better employee growth and development, affirmative action, and client satisfaction.
Rationale of the research The need for employee efficiency in the ENEC necessitates more research in the area of management styles and their impacts on organizational performance within the UAE. It is for these reasons that the research will attempt to provide a framework for organizational performance as directly influenced by the type of management strategies at the ENEC.
From the business point of view, the ENEC will be in a position to double its current labour output and will spend less time in constant replacement of the employees who resign. From the personnel engagement and motivation point of view, the ENEC will be in a position to provide better career paths, opportunities for personal and organizational growth, and motive employees to perform optimally.
At the end of the research, the ENEC, which wants to further improve organizational performance and increase its commitment to efficiency, will have mechanisms that it can use to decide on the most appropriate management style.
Research aims and objectives This study attempts to explicitly review the human resource management strategies in the ENEC and their impacts on the quality of employee performance feedback. The primary aims and objectives of this research paper will be;
To provide sufficient information to the human resource management department of the ENEC on the real management problems that has facilitated the occurrence of poor performance among the employees.
To establish the views of the employees of the ENEC on the level of job satisfaction within the current training and development programs.
To establish the link between the current output of the ENEC and the scope of its human resource management strategies.
Research questions What is lacking within the training planning at the Emirates Nuclear Energy Corporation?
What factors of human resource planning has not propelled the Emirates Nuclear Energy Corporation to its optimal success route?
How does the Emirates Nuclear Energy Corporation deal with different challenges with its employee training planning?
What could be the reasons behind constant employee resignation, despite the attractive remuneration packages?
Significance of the research This research will assist the Emirates Nuclear Energy Corporation in the UAE to implement effective employee management strategies that promote efficiency and sustainability of employee performance feedback. It will be a compilation of best human resource management strategy practices.
We will write a custom Report on Emirates Nuclear Energy Corporation’s Employee Training Program specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The study will also provide recommendations on how the Emirates Nuclear Energy Corporation can effectively manage its employee performance in order to guarantee employee satisfaction.
Research methodology Research methodology encompasses elements like research design, study location, target population, sample and sampling procedures, research instruments, pilot testing of the instruments, data collection process, and data analysis procedures.
These elements will be discussed in a more coherent manner. It must be noted that this section is very important to this study due to the fact that it gives the methods used to collect the primary data from the source.
This research will be conducted using research survey study approach. The researcher chose the qualitative approach rather than a quantitative because the scope of the research is focused, subjective, dynamic, and discovery oriented. The qualitative approach is best suited to gain proper insight into the situation of the case study. Besides, qualitative data analysis is more detailed than a quantitative one.
Moreover, this approach will create room for further analysis using different and divergent tools for checking the degree of error and assumption limits. The researcher will dispatch 120 questionnaires as part of the quantitative survey. The research will be declared effective when 80 questionnaires are fully filled and returned.
This research will target senior and junior staff at the Emirates Nuclear Energy Corporation and the Abu Dhabi National Oil Company. The research will target to interview 6 participants. The study will opt for open and close-ended questionnaire in data collection since it is economical on time, finance, and energy unlike qualitative method which may not be economical especially when the sample size is put into picture.
In the collection of data procedure, the research will adopt a drop and pick module for the sample population. Each respondent will be given a time frame of a week to respond to questions in the questionnaire. Where necessary, further clarification will be accorded to participants.
Data Analysis The collected quantitative data will be coded and passed through Statistical Package for Social Sciences (SPSS) version seventeen. In the process, cross tabulation will be used to compare and contrast perception on the effectiveness of the Emirates Nuclear Energy Corporation’s training program.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Emirates Nuclear Energy Corporation’s Employee Training Program by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More In order to quantify the relationship between the independent and dependent variable, ANOVA will be essential besides figures, charts, and tabular representation of correlation analysis.
Expected findings It is anticipated that the human resource management strategies, that will be recommended, will ensure optimal performance and sustainability of the Emirates Nuclear Energy Corporation’s labour function as have been the case at the Abu Dhabi National Oil Company.
The improvement in employee performance will be quantifiable through comparing the past employee performance feedback of the company with the performance after six months of implementation.
Emirates Integrated Telecommunications Company Problem Solution Essay college essay help
Introduction Founded in the year 2006, the Emirates Integrated Telecommunications Company (EIT) has been in the forefront of providing quality and variety of products and services such as mobile telephony, IPTV service, broadband connection, data hub, satellite services, and internet exchange facilities. The company has an integrated operations strategy.
Basically, operations strategy is the backbone of a stable company since it determines productivity in terms of flow of operations. Besides, the concept verifies risk proportions before informed decisions are made. This procedure is necessary in monitoring decision science, distribution of risk elements, and forecasting into future swings in the market.
Thus, the key conceptual framework of this analytical research treatise is an explicit and in-depth reflection on the operations management values that can be applied in the operations strategy of the Emirates Integrated Telecommunications Company. The paper also offers recommendations on how to sustain the operations management values within this organization.
The current operations strategy at the EIT Company Reflectively, relaying information on the success of a production is dependent on labour and operating costs, which are often balanced for value maintenance. In the process of balancing the act, a quality operations management system should be capable of applying the scientific skills in an artistic manner through informed and perfectly framed use of soft skills to address technical aspects of production management.
In every business field, the question of factors facilitating success is often posed. In order to present a comprehensive answer to this question, it is of essence to measure success as a component of the existing operation system (Slack 2012).
Basically, a quality operations management system performs optimally via integration of appropriate scientific factors of production. To enrich artistic managerial talents, a balance in the factors of production comes in handy to not only magnify the margins of success but also to ensure a smooth transition of an idea or an event after another, as is the case at the Emirates Integrated Telecommunications Company.
Besides, to avoid an imminent failure, it is vital for the operations management system to focus on a defined edge in balancing the labour and operation costs. Therefore, the company has put in place stringent measures and strategies aimed and monitoring expansionary modules within feasible levels.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This includes techniques that are in use in the company to monitor sustainability by application of scientific management of balanced factors of production matrix (Escrig-Tena, Bou-Llusar, Beltran,
Social Media Strategy – eTourism Report essay help free
The notions and principles of eTourism and e-commerce become closely connected while referring to the use of social media platforms for different marketing projects. The effectively developed social media strategy provides the framework for completing the project’s goals with the help of social media platforms.
The social media strategy report on virtual tourism includes the project’s goal, such strategy’s components as the positioning, slogan, the discussion of the target audience, social media platforms, strategy of media, content, tone of voice, the discussion of used digital marketing theory and models, and metrics for success.
Project Goal The main goal of the project is to promote virtual food tourism with the focus on the Chinese culinary traditions for people from all over the world while supporting Chinese restaurants brands.
Food lovers from all over the world receive the opportunity to enjoy virtual food tourism in relation to the Chinese culinary traditions.
“Fall in love with a city because of a city”.
The target audience of the project is males and females aged 18-35, interested in the aspects of the food tourism, the Chinese culinary traditions, the Chinese culture, visiting Chinese restaurants in China, in Britain, and all over the globe.
Social Media Platforms
Effective tools to communicate personally with the potential consumer.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Facebook
To develop a group related to the project and connecting the lovers of the Chinese food and travelling.
To allow posting photographs and information about the local Chinese restaurants, food destinations in China and globally.
To support a forum to discuss the best Chinese food destinations in the world.
To promote the city video guide related to the Chinese culinary traditions and food destinations in different cities of China.
To support the video guide about the history of Chinese culinary traditions.
To promote posting photographs and personal feedbacks on Chinese restaurants in Chinese cities and round the globe.
To promote posting information about new Chinese restaurants in China and round the globe.
Posts, photographs, questions, interviews, news items, multimedia, walking tours.
Tone of voice
Light-hearted and humorous.
Digital Marketing Theory and Models The main project uses the traditional digital marketing theory the main principles of which state the necessity of presenting the products and services virtually, involving the principles of the e-commerce, sharing the information, community building, and the direct contacts with consumers (Buhalis, Tjoa,
ABC and XYZ Companies Management Information System Case Study custom essay help: custom essay help
Introduction Technology has transformed the world into a global village, and firms are under pressure to find ways of gaining a competitive advantage over their market rivals in order to achieve success. One of the best ways of gaining this competitive advantage is to develop mechanisms of generating business intelligence that would provide the needed knowledge about the market.
Management information system has widely been seen as the solution to firms for generating this knowledge. Using technology to collect, process, and store data about people, organisations, and processes has been found to be the best way of generating intelligence that can help an organisation gain a competitive edge over its market rivals.
In this study, the researcher will analyze two companies in order to determine how they benefit from the management information system, and to propose changes that can be made to achieve efficiency in their production.
ABC Company ABC is a leading wholesale and retail company with global market coverage. It offers a variety of products to its customers. The company is focused on providing diverse household products of very high quality at friendly prices.
In order to charge this unbeatable price for its products in the market, this firm has been offering discounts on various products. In order to understand the business focus of this company, it may be necessary to use Porter’s Three Generic Strategies.
Firms are always under pressure to distinguish their products from that of their competitors in the market in order to achieve a competitive advantage (Gupta 56). ABC Company has been using Porters Generic Strategy options in order to achieve competitiveness in the market. The diagram below shows the strategic options that have been available for this firm.
Source: (Henry 67).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More As mentioned above, ABC Company has been using cost leadership strategy in the market by offering discounted products to its customers. This has helped it in setting fair prices for its products in the market.
This giant wholesale and retail outlet has also been using the differentiation strategy in order to achieve a competitive edge over its market rivals. Most of the products sold at this firm are very similar to those that are sold in similar shops because they are manufactured by the same companies.
In order to distinguish their products from those in other stores, this outlet has embraced unique packaging that gives them the superior image. This helps in creating the impression that products from the firm are of superior quality as compared to those of its competitors.
In order to achieve maximum benefit in the market, ABC Company has also been giving massive focus on the market segments that are least exploited by other market competitors. The firm has been keen to develop unique products that can help it acquire a market niche that is not exploited by other market competitors.
Main Divisions in ABC Company In order to operate successfully in the retail industry, ABC Company has divisions which are responsible for various tasks. The main divisions in this firm include the marketing division, the finance division, information and communication technology division, logistics and warehousing division. It is important to note that there are a number of subdivisions in each division.
For instance, the marketing division has other subdivisions such as the public relations unit, customer care department, and the corporate social responsibility unit.
Although each of the above divisions operates in an independent manner, they are closely related to one another through an integrated communication system. Using the differentiation strategy in the finance industry has also been the main strategy for this financial institution in attracting more customers to its stores.
We will write a custom Case Study on ABC and XYZ Companies Management Information System specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The marketing department has developed a customer management strategy that is specifically meant to improve the customer experience while in the facility. In this strategy, the bank has a number of staffs who are specifically meant to address any issues of the customers without necessarily going to the customer care unit.
This is expected to reduce the waiting time before a customer can be served. For those making deposits, the bank has the automated systems that enable customers to make the deposits at a faster rate, as opposed to when they are attended to by cashiers. This also reduces the waiting time for the customers.
XYZ Company XYZ is one of the leading local banks in Dubai that has been experiencing massive growth over the past years because of its superior marketing strategy. The firm offers various financial services to its clients.
The financial industry in the United Arab Emirates has become competitive as local firms find themselves under pressure from the international financial institutions making entry into the region. This firm specifically offers services to its customers in the United Arab Emirates and other neighbouring countries.
Porter’s Three Generic Strategies can be helpful in understanding how this firm manages the stiff competition in this market. Cost leadership is a very dangerous strategy in any industry, and the marketing unit of this firm has been very careful when incorporating it as one of the main ways of gaining a competitive edge.
However, the low interest rates charged by this bank on its customers are clear indications that it has been using this strategy in the market. Most of the accounts do not attract any transaction fees. Although the bank had a major focus on Islamic Banking, it is currently spreading its focus to the conventional banking system because of the strategic position of Dubai as a global business centre.
Main Divisions in XYZ Company Just like any other business institution, the XYZ Company has a number of divisions that help it operate successfully in the market. The financial institution has five main divisions operating semi-autonomously under direct supervision of their respective departmental heads.
The divisions include economics department, MIS division, financial department, currency and corporate services, and the financial market department. The departmental heads at these divisions report to the general manager of the institution, who is answerable to the board of directors of the company.
Not sure if you can write a paper on ABC and XYZ Companies Management Information System by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More How MIS is helping similar organisations to generate business intelligence and achieve competitive advantage It is clear from the analysis of the two companies above that the management information system is a key component in any organisation in the current market. As the competition gets stiffer, firms have come to realize that the only way of remaining relevant in the market is to have access to the current market information and to act upon it within the required time. ABC and XYZ operate in two different industries.
ABC has been operating in a business environment where information is vital in achieving success in the market. In some of the leading market competitors of XYZ, it is clear that management information system has helped them to a great extent, in achieving success in this industry.
For example, Carrefour has been using its MIS division to collect and analyse data on the changing trends of consumer’s tastes and preferences. This has helped this firm to achieve competitive advantage in the market because it is always aware of the needs of its customers. This has made it become one of the leading retail stores in this region.
XYZ Company also faces stiff competition in the financial sector because of the market rivals that are currently using their MIS division to generate business intelligence that can help them achieve competitive advantage in the market. According to an interview conducted with a mid-manager at the National Bank of Abu Dhabi, it was clear that this financial institution has been seriously using this division to generate intelligence in the market.
This institution has been able to use this department to identify the fact that there are many non-Muslims coming to the region to invest in the oil industry. These new niches of customers prefer conventional banking system other than the Islamic system.
When it gathered this information, its product offering was diversified, making it possible to attract both the Islamic and non-Islamic customers in the region. This has made the National Bank of Abu Dhabi one of the most successful financial institutions in this country.
Comparison of the Two Organisations ABC and XYZ companies are operating in two different industries. While ABC is in the retail industry, XYZ is operating in the banking sector. However, it is possible to compare the operations of the two firms in order to understand how they use management information system to achieve success in their respective industry. The above discussion has pointed out to the importance of managing information in both sectors.
According to Henry (34), information is a powerful component of a marketing program, especially when developing strategies that are meant to achieve maximum customer satisfaction in the market. Porter’s Value Chain analysis can help in comparing the two firms.
Creation of value for the customers is something that is highly appreciated in both firms. There are five primary activities or stages in value chain creation based on this analysis. The first stage involves inbound logistics. To both firms, these are activities that would ensure that the products needed for sale or in the service delivery to the customers are acquired and delivered safely to the premises of the firm.
This process is more involving in ABC than it is in XYZ because of the bulk of ABC products. At ABC, this entails breaking the bulk into small units and then repackaging them. At XYZ, it involves setting appropriate products (accounts and interest rates) that would be offered to the customers based on the industry dynamics. The outbound logistics stage involves making the products available to the customers.
ABC will need to transport the products to various outlets in the country, ready to be sold to the customers while XYZ will need to make cash available to its customers at various bank branches in the country. The marketing and sales stages entail persuading potential customers to make purchases of the firm’s products. Both firms have been using both the mass and social media to popularise their products in the market.
The fifth stage involves the services done by the firm to maintain the value of the product. Both firms have been using management information system to gather and analyse the current data about the customers in order to adjust their products to suite the changing needs.
Porter’s Five Forces analysis can also be useful when comparing these two firms. The figure below shows Porter’s Five Forces Model.
Porters Five Forces Model
Source (Gupta 89)
ABC and XYZ have had to deal with the problem of powerful suppliers. The central bank and other large financial institutions that may offer financial help to XYZ such as IMF and the World Bank are very powerful. Similarly, some of the main suppliers of ABC Company such as Samsung, Apple, and Sony are also powerful. To deal with this problem of powerful suppliers, both firms have been trying to diversify their supply sources.
The buyer power has been another major problem to both firms, and ABC has been more successful than XYZ in dealing with this problem. It has developed unique market niches that make it the only supplier in the market. This has helped it eliminate the power of the buyers. The competitive rivalry has been a thorny issue in the quest for the two firms to achieve success.
To manage this threat, ABC has discounted and differentiated its products in the market. On the other hand, XYZ has given more attention to differentiation of its service delivery to the clients. To address the threat of substitutes, both ABC and XYZ have diversified their product offerings in the market.
However, it is unfortunate to note that XYZ, unlike ABC, has been unable to manage the threat of new entrants. While ABC has been penetrating the global market to reduce the impact of new entrants into the local market, XYZ has not been able to take this initiative because it is still operating locally.
Improving Business Effectiveness and Efficiency in the Two Organisations It is clear from the above analysis that the two firms have been focused on achieving success in their respective industries. However, they must understand that the process of developing a competitive advantage in the market requires an integrated approach to managing the market forces. The following are some of the proposals that the two business entities can use to improve their business effectiveness and efficiency.
ABC and XYZ Companies should consider expanding their expenditure on the modern information communication technologies. Although the two firms have functional MIS divisions, it is necessary to incorporate the emerging technologies that would help improve effectiveness and efficiency of the division.
ABC and XYZ should redefine their employment strategy because of the dynamics in the market. The firms should ensure that they hire dynamic employees who are able to change with the changes taking place in the market. They should also be technology enthusiasts in order to ensure that they can manage tasks that are technology oriented.
The two firms should embrace creativity and innovation when addressing various issues. The information gathered and analysed by the MIS division should form the basis of coming up with new methods of addressing the problems of the companies.
XYZ should find a way of expanding its market coverage beyond the local region, just like ABC. An expanded market will increase the income of the firm, making it affordable for it to implement some of the strategies considered expensive because of the infrastructural investment.
Works Cited Gupta, Hitesh. Management Information System: (an Insight). New Delhi: International Book House, 2011. Print.
Henry, Anthony. Understanding Strategic Management. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2011. Print.
Polygamy in Islam Essay writing essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Laws of Islamic Polygamy
Disadvantages of Polygamy
Advantages of Polygamy
Introduction Marriage is one of the important aspects of the Islamic culture. The Islamic law allows Muslim men to practice polygamy, but it does not encourage it. The Islamic rules state that a Muslim man can marry a maximum of four women. Conversely, Muslim women do not have the right to marry several men. Muslim men in polygamous marriages should be kind to their women.
According to the Quran, a man should not marry many women if he cannot take care of them. Globally, majority of Muslim men are monogamous. The practice of Islamic polygamy is not homogeneous in all countries. For instance, many men in Saudi Arabia practice polygamy. However, Islamic polygamy is uncommon in Egypt. In Iran, polygamy is quite popular in the countryside.
Shia Muslims practice polygamy more than the Sunni Muslims. Polygamy has been a contentious issue among Muslim men and women because they have different views about it. This essay argues that polygamy should not be encouraged because of the following reasons.
Laws of Islamic Polygamy A Muslim man can become polygamous under the following circumstances. First, “if a man has a high sex libido, he can marry more women to avoid committing sexual offenses”.
Second, he should have resources such as land and money. Third, he should be truthful and responsible. Fourth, he should be acquainted with Islamic laws. Last, he should possess good leadership skills because it is quite difficult to solve social disputes in polygamous marriages.
Disadvantages of Polygamy The aforementioned requirements are important because they ensure that men provide enough social and economic support to their families. Nonetheless, many Muslim men in polygamous marriages cannot fulfill all these requirements. Failure to fulfill the aforementioned requirements often leads to many challenges.
In the contemporary world, polygamy is increasingly becoming unpopular due to economic constraints. For example, food insecurity is endemic in most parts of the world. Hence, it is difficult for many men in polygamous marriages to provide enough food to their large families.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Inadequate food and shortage of basic needs often leads to many quarrels in polygamous marriages. Moreover, many rich men in polygamous marriages become poor because it is expensive to maintain a big family.
There are many social challenges in polygamous marriages. Thus, many Muslim women detest polygamy. First, a woman often develops a low self-esteem when her husband marries another woman. For example, a woman whose husband marries another woman without her consent and proper reasons is likely to be depressed.
Second, women always lack social support in polygamous marriages. For instance, majority of men often give their new wives much attention and abandon the old ones. This often leads to emotional problems and rivalry in polygamous marriages. Indeed, women in polygamous marriages often develop psychological problems such as depression because their husbands do not spend enough time with them.
Furthermore, children in polygamous families often become indiscipline due to lack of proper parental guidance. Cases of physical and emotional abuses are frequent in polygamous marriages than in monogamous ones. Men in polygamous marriages like abusing their wives because they have many women.
Many Muslim women criticize polygamy because it encourages patriarchy in the family. Usually, men become authoritative in polygamous marriages. They do not allow their women to participate in important decision-making processes in the family. For example, some men marry many women without consulting their wives.
Moreover, many women in polygamous marriages do not have power to control family resources such as land. Consequently, lack of proper decision-making often leads to bickering, violence, and jealousy in polygamous marriages. In addition, polygamy can lead to the spread of sexually transmitted diseases such as HIV/AIDS.
Advantages of Polygamy Despite the numerous shortcomings of polygamy, it has the following advantages. Polygamy can enable a man to have children if his first wife cannot give birth. In such a situation, a woman can allow her husband to marry another woman to enable them have children.
We will write a custom Essay on Polygamy in Islam specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Polygamy can prevent men from engaging in sexual offenses. Polygamy can be encouraged if a woman cannot fulfill her family roles due to disability and ill health. For example, a married woman who is suffering from a chronic disease can encourage her husband to marry another woman to support her family.
Conclusion This essay has discussed the practice of Islamic polygamy. It has revealed that a Muslim man can marry a maximum of four women, but he should be kind to all of them. Moreover, a Muslim man should be financially stable because a polygamous family requires many resources.
Nonetheless, many Muslim men are unable to comply with the rules of Islamic polygamy. This often leads to immense suffering of women and children in polygamous families. Therefore, the shortcomings of polygamy outweigh its advantages. Consequently, polygamy should only be encouraged if there are genuine reasons to practice it.
Works Cited Ameenah, Abu and Bilal Philips. Polygamy in Islam. Riyadh: International Islamic Publishing House, 2005. Print.
Nurmila, Nina. Women, Islam and Everyday Life: Renegotiating Polygamy in Indonesia. London: Taylor
Open Source Intelligence of Iran’s Nuclear Program Report college admission essay help: college admission essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Non-state Actors and Terrorism
Iran Nuclear Weapons and Star Wars
Farewell to Weapons of Mass Destruction
Worldwide Threat Assessment
The New Somali Prime Minister
Introduction The Iran’s nuclear program has attracted heated debates in the United States, and other parts of the world as analysts try to determine its real impact on world peace program. Since the end of the Second World War, there have been efforts to promote disarmament programs in major powers in the world.
The United States and the former Union of Soviet Socialist Republic made efforts to scale down the volume of their weapons as a way of promoting peace in the world. However, individual states have continued with their armament programs, albeit in secrecy.
Recently, a state owned Russian media station claimed that Russia had the capacity to reduce the entire United States into a radioactive ash. This statement was a strong indication that Russia has been amassing weapons of mass destruction for the past several years. Iran is another nation that has been keen on developing nuclear weapons.1 North Korea and Pakistan have also engaged in activities which strongly indicate that they are building weapons of mass destruction, based on the reports of major media stations in the world.
It is important to analyze the allegations made by these sources to determine the truth. In this report, the focus will be to collect data from open sources about different targets of these weapons of mass destruction developed by different nations.
Non-state Actors and Terrorism The open resource intelligence by Blum2 focuses on the weapon of mass destruction in the hands of non-state actors. The world is rapidly changing, and the enemy is assuming an amorphous form, making it difficult for the targets to fight it properly. The non-state actors have assumed the form of terrorists that are determined to bring the United States of America down from its glory as the major world power.
According to these scholars, this new face is something that the United States’ government had not prepared for when planning its defense against the known enemies. During the two world wars, the enemies were known, and the battle fronts were clearly defined. During the Great American Revolution, the warring factions were clearly defined, and the battlefields were known to all the players.
During the Cold War, Russia was seen as an enemy of the United States. However, this new approach that has taken the form of terrorism is strange and difficult to fight.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The exact location of these terrorists is not known, making it difficult to wage proper war against them. The report by these scholars emphasize on the fact that these terrorist groups thrive well in politically unstable countries such as Iraq, Afghanistan, Pakistan, and Somalia. The scholars note that the target for these groups is the United States of America.
In order to validate their arguments, they analyze activities of these groups over the years, especially after the Second World War. In Saudi Arabia, amorphous religious groups demanded the departure of all Americans and their companies from the country in the late 1970s and early 1980s.In Pakistan and Afghanistan, American embassies have been under constant attacks from the al Qaeda loyalists since late1980s.
On September 11, 2001, the Pentagon and the World Trade Center came under attack from the al Qaeda, a plan developed and executed under the leadership of Osama bin Laden.
Critical analysis of this document reveals that the scholars involved were not biased in their report. Their arguments were purely based on the attacks that have taken place, statements from the leaders of these terrorist groups, and various government reports on these activities. This makes it a highly valid and reliable document when analyzing the activities of the terrorists.
Iran Nuclear Weapons and Star Wars The report by Morton 3 focuses on the Iran Nuclear weapons, and the possibility of this bringing back the Star Wars. According to this open source intelligence, Iran is developing nuclear weapons at a rate that had not been anticipated by the world powers. Attempts by the United States to stop this country from developing nuclear bomb have turned it to be the target of these weapons.
Unlike the amorphous groups such as the al Qaeda with no clearly defined geographic location, this is a sovereign state with structures and a clear ambition to become one of the world’s powers. This report shows that although Iran may have some enemies within the region, the ultimate enemy of this country has always been the United States.
The economic sanctions placed over it by the United States only deepened the conflict between the two countries. Efforts by specific countries to target the United States did not start with Iran’s development of nuclear war.
We will write a custom Report on Open Source Intelligence of Iran’s Nuclear Program specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The past regimes in the United States have been struggling to find ways through which the country can be protected from external aggressors who may play using weapons of mass destruction against the country. In response to this, the Reagan’s government developed and SDI program (Strategic Defense Initiative) that was supposed to develop a defense mechanism for the country against weapons of mass destruction.
This resulted into the development of ABM (Anti-ballistic missile) defense program. However, the United States still remains vulnerable to these external aggressors, and it is the responsibility of the homeland security to find the best ways through which the country and its citizens can be protected from nuclear aggressions.
The open source document by Morton holds some facts that should be addressed by the homeland security. However, a few contradictions have been witnessed in this report that makes its validity questionable.
For instance, the author argues that Iran’s attempt to develop nuclear weapons went against the peace pact between NATO and War Saw Pact. However, he also appreciates that the United States has successfully developed nuclear weapons.
The question that many would be asking is why the America’s move to develop such weapons has not been viewed to be going against the pact. Being an American, this bias from the author is easily understandable.
Farewell to Weapons of Mass Destruction According to a report by Enemark4, the world should be working on ways of eliminating weapons of mass destruction as a way of promoting peace. The term ‘weapons of mass destruction’ was first used in 1945 when the then United States President, Harry Truman, met with other world leaders to find ways of bringing peace in the world.
When it was used at this time, the focus was to identify weapons that posed a threat to the masses when used such as the atomic, nuclear, or biological weapons with the view of limiting or eliminating their use in order to promote peace in the world. However, what transpired during the cold war was completely the opposite of what these statesmen aimed at achieving.
Countries have been amassing weapons of mass destruction. At first, the competition was between the Union of Soviet Socialist Republic and the United States. However, countries such as China, Iran, North Korean, Syria, and many others have joined in this competition.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Open Source Intelligence of Iran’s Nuclear Program by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More However, it is necessary to note that security can only be achieved if we fight against these weapons. The target for most of these countries remains the United States because it is viewed as the only superpower that should be dislodged from this position.
Christian Enemark is an American security analyst who has worked for the US Army War College. Although this fact may make his report questionable, it is clear that he made efforts to avoid any form of biases. His report also focused on downsizing the weapons of mass destruction by all countries.
Worldwide Threat Assessment The report by Clapper5 focuses on the worldwide threat posed by organized terrorist groups and governments around the world that operates in close coordination with these terrorist groups. In the Middle East, groups such as Islamist Jihad, Hamas, Hezbollah, and al Qaeda have been engaging in terrorist activities around the world. In Africa, the al Shabab is causing havoc in the Indian Ocean and various African nations.
Other organized groups are also operating in various parts of the world. Some of these groups have taken the political nature and are currently in the government of various countries in the Middle East. Some of these regional affiliates are expanding their targets. For instance, the al Qaeda affiliates in Africa, the al Shabab, is currently targeting countries seen to be close to the United States such as Kenya and Ethiopia.
They attacked U.S. embassy in the country and other institutions considered sympathizers of the West. These attacks spread to various Arab nations in the Middle East and parts of Africa.
In 1998, American embassies in Kenya, Uganda, and Tanzania were bombed by al Qaeda, a plan that was executed by its military wing headed by the late Osama bin Laden. This is a clear indication that terrorism is no longer an issue of the United States. The entire world is currently under attack.
The validity of this report is above board because it has been based on the events that have been taking place in various parts of the world. The information it has compiled is readily available in other sources.
The New Somali Prime Minister According to the report by Ali6, Somalia has been a lawless country for close to two decades. The country has been in the hands of the militias that have been operating in major urban centers. It is home to the al Shabab, a dreaded terrorist group that has been responsible for sea piracy in the Indian Ocean. The country has been a strategic location for the terrorist groups because of lack of a clear government.
The election of the new prime minister who is pro-West has been a major milestone in promoting peace in the region and in eliminating anti-American terrorists that have been operating in the country. It is also seen as a move that would promote security in the entire eastern part of Africa.
The document has avoided controversial reports made by other scholars in order to improve on its reliability and acceptability among scholars and other relevant users.
Bibliography Ali, Mohamed. “Cautious Welcome For New Prime Minister.” Open Source Center 6, no. 30 (2011): 1-5.
Blum, Andrew, Asal Victor, and Wlkenfeld Jonathan. “Nonstate Actors, Terrorism, and Weapons of Mass Destruction.” International Studies Review 7, no. 1 (2005): 133-170.
Clapper, James. Statement for the Record on the Worldwide Threat Assessment of the U.S. Intelligence Community for the House Permanent Select Committee on Intelligence. New York: US National Intelligence, 2011.
Enemark, Christian. “Farewell to WMD: The Language and Science of Mass Destruction.” Contemporary Security Policy 32, no. 2 (2011): 382–400.
GAO. “Homeland Defense: Steps Have Been Taken to Improve U.S. Northern Command’s Coordination with States and the National Guard Bureau, but Gaps Remain.” United States Government Accountability Office 8, no. 252 (2008). 1-57.
Robert Morton. Will Iran Nuclear Bomb Renew Star Wars? Open Source Intelligence News. Web.
Footnotes 1 GAO. “Homeland Defense: Steps Have Been Taken to Improve U.S. Northern Command’s Coordination with States and the National Guard Bureau, but Gaps Remain.” United States Government Accountability Office 8, no. 252 (2008): 44.
2 Andrew Blum, Victor Asal, and Jonathan Wlkenfeld, “Nonstate Actors, Terrorism, and Weapons of Mass Destruction,” International Studies Review 7, no. 1 (2005): 155.
3 Robert Morton, Will Iran Nuclear Bomb Renew Star Wars? Open Source Intelligence News.
4 Christian Enemark, “Farewell to WMD: The Language and Science of Mass Destruction,” Contemporary Security Policy 32, no. 2 (2011): 391.
5 James Clapper, Statement for the Record on the Worldwide Threat Assessment of the U.S. Intelligence Community for the House Permanent Select Committee on Intelligence (New York: US National Intelligence, 2011), 5.
6 Mohamed Ali, “Cautious Welcome for New Prime Minister,” Open Source Center 6, no. 30 (2011): 2.
Quantitative Risk Assessment – Performance Plastics Inc Report argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help
Executive Summary This is a risk management plan for the expansion of a company known as Performance Plastics Inc., and the acquisition of its parent company known as Shimtech Industries. Performance Plastics Inc., is a company, which specialises in the production of high precision aerospace components.
The expansion plan exposed the company to several risks, which include financial, technological, environmental, acquisition, business environments, industry, and retention and employee layoffs.
Other issues include legal, intellectual property rights, leadership, human resource, and corporate strategy risks. The risks are entered into a risk register and a risk response plan of risk avoidance; acceptance, mitigation and transfer are considered.
Project Summary The project scope includes a risk management plan for the expansion and acquisition of the Shimtech Industries by the Plastics Inc, company, which will be achieved by merging the departments of the companies and the ability to manage the risks associated with the human resource, finance, market/industry, and management issues (Carter
Colonialism Analytical Essay online essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Origins of Colonialism
Impacts of European Colonialism
Introduction The rise and spread of colonialism is one of the significant themes in world civilization. Colonialism is an old phenomenon that emerged during the ancient period in Europe. It can be divided into two phases. The first phase is called old imperialism. It occurred between the fifteenth and the nineteenth centuries. During this timeframe, European powers such as Britain and France conquered small states in Europe.
New imperialism began after 1870 due to the rise of capitalism in Europe. Indeed, the Europeans argued that they colonized America, Asia, and Africa to solve social, economic, and political challenges. Nonetheless, they wanted to achieve their economic ambitions.
Colonialism led to serious challenges in the world. Thus, various scholars such Walter Rodney, Karl Marx, Aimé Césaire, and Adams Smith have tried to analyze colonialism. “Aimé Césaire’s Discourse on Colonialism is a moving examination of the cruelty, impassiveness, and dehumanizing consequence of colonization on both colonizer and colonized” . This essay discusses the historical context of Césaire’s essay.
Origins of Colonialism Colonialism has been analyzed from various perspectives. According to Césaire, the European civilization caused myriad challenges, which it could not solve. Thus, the Europeans had to seek external solutions to their domestic problems. Césaire argues that the European civilization was debauched because it could not solve the challenges it created. The following factors led to the emergence of colonialism.
Imperialism Imperialism refers to the extension of social, economic, and political supremacy of a superior nation to an inferior one. Imperialism was an idea of superiority that was perpetrated by the Europeans.
Thus, the Europeans conquered the entire world based on the concept of superiority. The Europeans believed that they were the most civilized in the world. Thus, they had the moral obligation to extend their civilization to other parts of the world.
Economic imperialism was caused by the rise and development of capitalism in Europe . Capitalism is an economic model that emerged after mercantilism. It began in Europe during the Industrial Revolution. Capitalism is an economic system in which citizens own the primary modes of production. In this economic system, people invest their resources to make more profits.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The Industrial Revolution began in England in the second half of the eighteenth century. Britain pioneered industrialization because of social, economic, and political stability. Nonetheless, other European countries such as France and Germany faced social, economic, and political upheavals in the eighteenth century.
Thus, between 1750 and 1850, Britain was the leading producer of manufactured goods in Europe. The strong economic position of Britain enabled it to dominate other European countries.
After 1850, other European countries such as Germany and France began to industrialize. Thus, the spread of the Industrial Revolution in Europe led to over production of manufactured products.
This led to lack of markets for manufactured goods since major European powers were producing their own products. Lack of markets led to trade barriers in Europe. Moreover, the spread of the Industrial Revolution led to competition for raw materials and investment opportunities.
Capitalism caused serious social and economic challenges in Europe. First, it led to over production of goods and investment of capital. Second, there was concentration of income in a few hands. Thus, majority of the Europeans did not have the purchasing power. The bourgeoisie also reduced the amount of wages they paid the proletarians . All these factors led to a serious economic recession.
Due to the economic decline, the capitalists advised their governments to introduce economic reforms to foster economic growth. They also pressurized their political leaders to acquire colonies to enable them access cheap raw materials, markets, cheap labor, and investment opportunities.
Thus, imperialism emerged as result of capitalism. Consequently, “imperialism has been defined as the highest stage of capitalism”. Imperialism led to the rise of colonialism in various parts of the world.
We will write a custom Essay on Colonialism specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More European Colonialism European colonialism became intensive towards the last quarter of the 19th century because of the following factors. European countries were interested in fulfilling their capitalist ambitions. Therefore, they colonized various parts of the world because they wanted cheap raw materials. They wanted to access more markets because of stiff competition in their domestic markets.
The capitalists were looking for better investment opportunities because they had extra capital to invest. They were looking for cheap labor to facilitate production of raw materials . In addition, they wanted to occupy strategic territories such as India, Egypt, and the African seaboard to secure important trade routes. All these factors led to colonialism.
Liberalism After the French Revolution, the spread of the ideas of equality and liberty led to nationalism in Europe. Thus, there was a serious struggle for nationalism in Europe in the 1870s. For example, the unification of Germany in 1870 and Italy in 1871 led to political upheavals in Europe. Before the rise of Germany, England and France were the most dominant political powers in the European continent.
Thus, the rise of Germany interfered with the balance of power in Europe. For instance, the rivalry between France and Germany led to the Franco Prussian War. After this war, France began to acquire overseas colonies because it lost two provinces to Germany. This event marked the onset of the serious scramble for colonies among European powers.
The desire to spread the European civilization was another factor that led to colonialism. The Europeans wanted to propagate their culture based on the idea of cultural imperialism. Indeed, the Europeans felt that they had the best civilization in the world. Thus, they deemed other races barbaric. Socially, “the Europeans wanted to spread Christianity”.
Impacts of European Colonialism A part from the causes of colonialism, Césaire also highlights the consequences of colonialism on the subjugated. He wrote the Colonial Discourse in the last days of colonialism. Thus, Césaire’s manuscript demonstrates the practice of colonialism and its outcomes. Colonialism had the following consequences on the colonized.
Economic exploitation was the main reason for the European colonialism. The Europeans exploited precious raw materials such as gold, diamonds, and iron in the conquered territories. These raw materials were exploited to fulfill the economic ambitions of the Europeans.
During the colonial period, the colonized became proletariats who offered cheap labor to the Europeans. Indeed, forced labor was rife during the colonial period. It led to economic under development of the colonized. Land alienation became endemic in the European colonies.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Colonialism by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Hence, the colonized experienced serious economic challenges . The colonialists imposed heavy taxes on the colonized, but they did not provide public services to them. Moreover, the Europeans disrupted the indigenous modes of production such as trade, agriculture, and industries. Therefore, European colonialism led to under development in the colonies.
European colonialism led to social challenges in various societies. For example, they conquered various territories through military attacks, which led to massive loss of lives and destruction of property. Therefore, various scholars have criticized the brutality of the Europeans during the colonial period.
For instance, Césaire contends that the Europeans were uncultured because they were inhuman during the colonial period. Moreover, the Europeans introduced racial segregation in various territories. For example, the practice of apartheid in South Africa led to immense suffering of the natives.
Colonialism led to cultural alienation of the vanquished. For instance, the Europeans undermined various civilizations in the world because they believed that they were the most cultured. Thus, they compelled the colonized to espouse and practice their culture. In this case, colonialism led to cultural erosion in various societies. For example, the British colonization of India led to the destruction of the Indian civilization.
Cultural erosion was witnessed in Africa and Asia. The Europeans claimed that they wanted to solve social challenges such as witchcraft, incest, and illiteracy. Nonetheless, they were interested in spreading their own cultural practices and religion. For example, “they wanted to spread Christianity”. Thus, they undermined other religious practices and rituals.
Colonialism led to serious political challenges in various parts of the world. The colonialists disrupted indigenous political structures in the colonized territories. They introduced authoritarian systems of administration in the conquered territories. During the colonial period, the colonized did not participate in political administration.
Furthermore, they did not have rights. Hence, the Europeans undermined the dignity of the colonized. The Europeans applied the policy of divide and rule, which led to the rise of ethnicity in various societies. Today, ethnicity is a major political challenge in many developing countries. In the postcolonial era, many political challenges such as authoritarianism have been witnessed in the former European colonies.
Conclusion Colonialism was a manifestation of the challenges that occurred in the European civilization. Césaire asserts that the European civilization failed to surmount the challenges it created. Thus, it was a debauched civilization. According to Césaire, European imperialism led to the rise and spread of colonialism in the world. The Europeans felt that they were the most cultured; hence, they conquered other races to civilize them.
The Europeans masqueraded as philanthropists who were interested in improving the social and economic conditions of the colonized. However, they used treachery to colonize and exploit other races.
Therefore, Césaire is one of the critiques of the European colonialism because it failed to improve the social, economic, and political conditions of the conquered. Undeniably, colonialism led to the spread of racism, violence, and poverty in the world. It also destroyed many civilizations.
At present, “the Europeans have not been able to find lasting solutions to the problems of the proletariats and the bourgeoisies”. Moreover, they have not been able to deal with the effects of colonialism. Thus, colonialism was the historical context of Césaire’s essay.
Works Cited Césaire, Aimé and Joan Pinkham. Discourse on Colonialism. New York: Monthly Review Press, 2001. Print.
Fanon, Frantz and Richard Philcox. Black Skin, White Masks. New York: Grove Press, 2008. Print.
Lenin, Vladimir. Imperialism the Highest Stage of Capitalism. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2011. Print.
Memmi, Albert and Susan G Miller. The Colonizer and the Colonized. London: Beacon Press, 2000. Print.
Rodney, Walter. How Europe Underdeveloped Africa. London: Black Classic Press, 2011. Print.
Ousource ADPC Precument to Tejari Research Paper custom essay help: custom essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
The proposed solution
Assessing Tejari’s Efficiency
Introduction Procurement outsourcing involves the outsourcing of a company’s major procurement operations to another organisation. This research study focuses on investigating how effective it would be to outsource ADCP’s procurement activities to Teraji. In order to accomplish this, the study must first investigate the need to outsource, and subsequently analyse the efficiency of outsourcing to Teraji.
It is important to consider outsourcing the procurement activities of ADPC due to the important role procurement plays in supporting the core competencies of the company. While procurement does not stand as one of the organisation’s core competency, it remains an important function in the company as it is one of the only activities that takes place in all three-core competencies.
The Problem With the increasing complexity in Abu Dhabi’s fleet management, it is important for companies in the maritime industry to focus on accomplishing their core competency activities. Procurement (an element of company logistics) is the major non-core activity, which results in time and resource consumption.
Considering that ADPC’s major functions include the maintenance, refurbishing, and development of the seaports, it is possible to outsource procurement. Should ADPC effectively implement these outsourcing activities, it will be able to maximise the potential of available time and resources.
Due to the increase in fleet flow in Abu Dhabi, it is important for the management of ADPC to consider the possible applicable measures for improving its performance.
The major way to do this is to ensure that the company limits its key performance indicators to the available resources. Thus, it is necessary for ADPC to outsource other time and resource consuming organisational activities, which may include procurement.
The proposed solution In order to solve the problem of complex procurement, and to allow the ADPC focus on its primary goals, this project seeks to investigate the feasibility of outsourcing ADPC’s procurement operations to Tejari service. In procurement outsourcing, a company transfers all, or a major part, of its logistics functions to third party companies.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Procurement outsourcing may be done to cut down costs or to create room for the company to concentrate on other significantly important organisational operations.
Considering that the core company of ADPC’s operations is measurable based on its ability to ensure effective fleet management in all commercial seaports, it may be necessary to outsource some of the activities that are less related to the organisation’s key performance indicator.
The major functions of the ADPC are to ensure swift response to maintenance, refurbishment, and improvement of each port it oversees. These activities are not only tedious, but also require high levels of procurement and inventory management.
In order to ensure that it can effectively focus on its core operations, ADPC needs to outsource its procurement activities to a company that is formidable and permits procurement via up-to-date methods. Tejari is an electronic marketplace that facilitates real time trading between different companies over the internet.
Tejari has an experience of more than ten years in internet procurement and offers excellent services to many companies located in the Arab Gulf. Tejari offers extensive internet based procurement and logistic services. With over 100000 clients using Tejari’s internet based purchase systems, the company is now known for its honest, cost-efficient and excellent procurement procedures.
It is anticipated that if ADPC outsources its procurement activities to Tejari, it would have more time and resources to focus on performing its core operational activities.
While procurement is a major element required for ADPC to accomplish its core operations, it is important to note that procurement is more of a secondary operational function driving the company’s success. Therefore, there are no considerable risks associated with outsourcing the procurement operations of the company to Tejari.
We will write a custom Research Paper on Ousource ADPC Precument to Tejari specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Assessing Tejari’s Efficiency It will be necessary to investigate how effective Tejari will handle ADPC’s procurement activities. Tejari’s efficiency will be measured by performing a satisfaction survey targeting some of its current and past clients. The survey will measure different satisfaction variables ranging from the user friendliness of Teraji’s online procurement interphase, to the physical promptness of the company’s service delivery.
The outcomes of the survey will be analysed to identify the customer satisfaction levels of the participants as the types of services the customers appreciate. This way, it will be possible for the researcher to recommend the best approach ADPC should follow in outsourcing its products to Teraji.
Conclusion This outline presented an overview of the activities that would be contained in the report. While a solution has already been proposed for ADPC to follow in order to increase its focus on its core operations, it is important to investigate the efficacy of applying the proposed approach.
This outline summarized the proposed solution. It also explains the process the report will apply in examining the effectiveness of the proposed approach. A survey analysis will be used to investigate the satisfaction levels of previous Teraji clients; their responses will be used to draw conclusions, hence a final recommendation.
Diversity Rates in Mercer County, West Virginia Evaluation Essay scholarship essay help
Diversity rates are an essential indicator of the relationships between the members of the society, as well as the existence of ethnicity or race related stereotypes. It is crucial that the voice of every single member of the society should be heard, which is hardly possible once certain community is underrepresented in the society, be it a specific ethnicity, nationality, or gender.
While introducing more diversity into a specific society, where a certain minority experiences considerable difficulties in becoming the members of a community is hardly possible, facilitating the environment, in which this minority can feel appreciated is quite practicable.
Though the research of the data regarding the Mercer County diversity concerns mostly its education establishments, particularly, local schools, the information obtained in the course of the research gives a lot of food for thoughts.
As the data acquired from ZIPskinny shows, Black and Asian people are underrepresented in the community considerably, Athens (one of Mercer’s biggest communities) having only 3.5% and 1.4% of the aforementioned ethnicities in the community correspondingly (The skinny on: 24712 (Athens WV), 2000).
The rates of Hispanic/Latino ethnicity, as well as the Native American one, are close to 0% in most of the county’s communities (Communities in West Virginia, 2000). These rather surprising results indicate that the members of the county might have tangible communication problems in case of conversing with the representatives of other cultures.
The ethnicity and culture related issues are not the only problems that the Mercer community should pay special attention to. According to the U.S. Census Bureau map, the area of Mercer incorporates two minor civil divisions, Princeton in the center of the county and Bluefield in the northwest (Mercer County, WV – economic places, 2007).
The size of the areas shows clearly that the people inhabiting it are the county minority and, therefore, need to be represented properly, as well as have an opportunity to engage into the county’s social life and have their say in the decisions on major changes in the infrastructure of the county, the education related changes, political issues, etc.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Other sources point at the fact that Mercer County is not as much preoccupied with its diversity issues, as it is concerned with the education opportunities for students in general.
According to the recent report, the MCCC (Mercer County Community College) teaching staff members have recently “emphasized the need to increase postsecondary access and accelerate college completion to build stronger bridges from high schools, adult education, community colleges, four-year universities, and the workforce” (NCAA graduation rates, 2011).
Such an approach may be the sign of diversity concerns being rather low in the county; however, the lack of engagement with the diversity rates may also show that the county does not pay as much attention to the issue as it deserves.
Therefore, despite the fact that over the past few years, diversity rates have been increased slightly in Mercer County due to immigration (Diversity in the classroom, 2012), the situation still leaves much to be desired. It is important to realize that a range of outcomes for the Mercer County society hinges on whether all its members have been represented properly.
Since the diversity rates are increasing very slowly, a booster for the process must be created; in other words, various media for spreading awareness concerning the significance of diversity and the values of other cultures is crucial for the functioning of the Mercer County society.
As long as all members of the population are represented equally, considerable improvements in the relationships between the residents of the county can be expected, and several major economic and cultural issues are likely to be resolved.
Speaking of the significance of the aforementioned data or a teacher, one must admit that the information provided above may serve as a perfect foil for an educator to base the approach towards the students on.
We will write a custom Essay on Diversity Rates in Mercer County, West Virginia specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The significance of students’ background, both ethnic and social, is not to be underestimated, for it defines the background knowledge that the students may have and, therefore, the pace at which their academic progress is going to take place. More to the point, the students’ national, ethic and social background defines the approach that a teacher should undertake in order to motivate the students.
Indeed, the values and morals, which students are guided by are predetermined by their cultural background for the most part. Therefore, the facts acquired from the statistical data about the diversity rates among students inform the strategies that a teacher adopts in order to motivate their students for the learning process.
There is no secret that students are rarely capable of motivating themselves for academic achievements; as a result, in most cases, it is a teachers’ job to make students interested in the subject. However, reaching students is not an easy task if they represent a completely different culture and are motivated by different ideas.
Analyzing the culture of the students helps the teacher not only enhance the students’ performance, but also increase awareness concerning diversity and the problems related to prejudice among the rest of the class.
Reference List Communities in West Virginia (2000). Web.
Diversity in the classroom (2012). Web.
Mercer County, WV – economic places (2007). Web.
NCAA graduation rates (2011). Web.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Diversity Rates in Mercer County, West Virginia by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The skinny on: 24712 (Athens WV) (2000). Web.
The Rise and Fall of the Islamic Spain Report best college essay help
Introduction Re-enacted in a 2007 movie, Cities of Light: The Rise and Fall of Islamic Spain, the documentary explains how the Islamic Spain has a rich history while focusing on its impact on the world civilisation (The Rise and Fall of Islamic Spain Full documentary PBS). Since the antiquity, religion was an element of information transmission and conviction of masses.
The religion that commanded the greatest population became the greatest source of influence (Wasserstein 47). Referred to as the Dark Ages, Spain underwent a visible transformation after Muslims, Christians, and Jews clashed. This paper intends to explain the rise and fall of the Islamic Spain with a particular emphasis on the importance of Spain to the world civilisation.
Other religions were equally very important to Spain, but Islam was a source of artistic integration, economic stability, and political prowess in the country. These religions had a direct impact on the rise and fall of the Islamic religion in Spain, and it would be impossible to create a comparison without proper representation of Christianity and Judaism.
Islamic civilisation Rise of the Islamic religion in Spain
By 600 BCE, Islam was already a powerful religion in Europe and particularly Spain. Spain was the home of European Renaissance even before Muslims dominated the country. During this period, Spain had control of Iberia and Caucasus, which are presently in Russia. Catholicism enabled artists and philosophers to explore science, art, medicine, and technology among several other factors.
Philosophers such as Aristotle have a background in Spain during the Islamic era (Lapidus 92). In 734 BCE, most parts of Europe began recognising the significance of the Islam religion to the people of Spain. This included the invention of the lemon tree and the water wheel among others. In Spain, there was an opportunity for religion to grow and to help people embrace new lifestyles.
Muslims co-existed peacefully with other religions especially Christians and Jews. This contradicted other areas of Europe in which power strife controlled the religions that people appreciated. This applied to the Iberian Peninsula that had a problem with the Jews.
In addition, there was a problem in Russia because the Muslims in the region could not entertain the growing number of Christians who did not have to pay taxes to sustain their religions (The Rise and Fall of Islamic Spain Full documentary PBS). Power struggles amongst different religions across Europe led to the downfall of some of the most powerful groups. This explains the fall of the Umayyad kingdom after 700 AD in Europe.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Islamic Spain strategy
Sustainability is the most difficult tool of management to maintain. In Spain, Muslims marinated excellent relations with other religions in order to avoid conflicts. During this period, power coupled with ignorance only saw many countries fight to be the best. Most parts of Europe rarely concentrated on the significance of peace as an element of development in the society.
Instead, they believed that power and influence only came when people fought for the various spaces they ardently wanted. According to the Muslims, the only strategy to success in an environment of diversity is to work together and share ideas. This led to the conviction of many Spaniards converting mostly of them into Muslims. Different religions shared resources and ideas enabling the country to thrive and succeed in Europe.
Spain became an example to many people before the religious wars began. Though the groups existed as religious extremists, they had a common idea of developing the country and transforming Spain into an enviable country in Europe.
However, when religious differences ensued, it was important for only one religion to prove powerful in Spain. Around 1000 AD, there was a significant difference in opinions between the Jews, Christians, and Muslims in the previously peaceful Spain. By 1207 AD, violence ensued in the country causing a major collapse of the Islamic Spain.
Politics and the Islamic Spain
Religion, politics, and economics formed the pillars for Islamic Spain. When the ruling power polity supports a particular religion, there is a high possibility that the religion would have the greatest influence on the people. In addition, the powerful religion becomes the greatest challenger of the government when it fails to achieve its obligation to the society.
This explains the position held by the Muslim religion in Spain. Through influence, the religion exercised authority over the land ensuring that the government achieved its obligations to the people of Spain. Islam helped in reinforcing ethical responsibility in the people it represented. Between 660 AD and 950 AD, Islam became a source of solace for many Spaniards.
During the same period, any information from Muhammad the prophet controlled the governance structures. By the 10th century, all governance structures had the presence of Muslim leadership. For instance, Abdul-Rahman, the leader of Al-Andalus had to ensure that Muslims and other religions co-existed peacefully for the overall development of the country.
We will write a custom Report on The Rise and Fall of the Islamic Spain specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More As such, politics formed an important basis for building a strong Islamic front in Spain. Respect to ethics also helped in increasing the goodwill of the population towards the Islamic Spain. Muslim movements also collected taxes to fulfil their strategic plans. This did not happen among the Christians ensuring that a section of the population converted to Christianity.
This was the greatest source of animosity between Muslims and Christians. However, poor Muslims did not pay taxes even though they had food, a place to sleep, and clothes to adorn. This was very significant in making the Muslim religion attractive to many Spaniards.
Acquisition was an important element of expanding the Islamic Spain. It gave the union power to dominate over Spain and other parts of Europe and this created animosity between the movement and Europeans. Europeans wanted the slightest opportunity to protect their Holy lands and to invade the Muslim dominated grounds especially Al-Andalus.
Islamic Spain acquired the Martials from North Africa making it easy to introduce the religion in the acquired regions. Around the 11th century, Islamic Spain acquired most parts of the West. The country achieved this through unity and continued persistence (The Rise and Fall of Islamic Spain Full documentary PBS).
The Iberian Peninsula displayed high reception levels to the Spanish civilisation making it the most effective place for the Islamic Spain to acquire that part of Europe. As this happened, the relationship between the Christian and Muslim religious sects became soar. Al-Andalus was no longer a place for refuge because Islamic Spain had limited power to protect its followers (Wasserstein 38).
Besides attacks internally, the Islamic Spain faced opposition from other parts of Europe. European countries joined forces to fight the Islamic Spain, and the invaded armies from North America participated in the war (Ahlstrom 20). Acquisition remains a strategy of attaining dominance for most organisations today.
As such, the Islamic Spain was the initiator of civilisation because the things that people learned during the period still apply in capitalistic economies. Acquisition enabled the Islamic Spain to gain the confidence of the people and to remain stable over centuries.
There is evidence that knowledge and unity were the forces that helped the union to earn public goodwill because without the same, it would be overly impossible to acquire another land and expand territories.
Not sure if you can write a paper on The Rise and Fall of the Islamic Spain by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Spaniards and Islam
There are very many reasons why countries opt to adapt a uniform religion that all people should follow. For over 800 years, the Spanish accepted Muslims because of the ability of the religion to promote development within the country and promotion of peaceful co-existence. The factors discussed below contributed towards Muslim’s influence in Spain.
Muslims promoted creativity in Spain and this was very important for the civilisation. Before religious tension ensued in the Iberian Peninsula, Spain was the centre of attraction for the people of Europe because the country developed various innovative products. The water wheel among other innovations was significant throughout civilisation and other European countries began aping the trend.
Even with the slight religious clashes, the Muslims still supported innovation. For some unknown reason, there was competition between the Muslims, Jews, and Christians and this promoted the development of industrial products during the period.
The 10th century Spain required a religion that would protect the land jealously from external forces that would seek to divide the caliphate (The Rise and Fall of Islamic Spain Full documentary PBS).
Around the same period, the fast growing Umayyad kingdom in Syria sought to extend to Spain, Poland, and Russia among other parts of Europe. It was impossible for the dynasty to invade Spain, and control it because the Islamic Spain was equally prominent and there was no need for the Umayyad kingdom to invade a territory that was dominantly Islam.
Religion promoted art, business, technology, science, and philosophy among other elements of creativity. It was difficult to notice that Muslims provided the calm innovative environment in order to be completely in control of the country. For about 8 centuries people lived under the rule of Muslim leaders. As such, all systems had to follow the law set by Muslim rulers.
Spain being the European hub for innovation could not afford to have any wars because this would reduce the influence it commanded in Europe. During this very period, the Pope equally submitted to the Muslim leadership even though he led the Catholic Church separately. Evidently, the Pope tried to intervene when the Umayyad caliphate and the Muslims in Spain began scrambling for space and recognition in the country.
This affected innovation because there was limited time for thinking and production because the country concentrated on the war at hand. In the end, the fall of the Islamic Spain acted as assign of the Civil War that occurred in Spain between 1936 and 1939.
Unity Peaceful coexistence and unity are principal factors of developing a dynasty that would have a long-term effect on people. This applied to the situation in Spain during the Islamic rule. Jews, Christians, and Muslims lived together and supported each other especially on matters of national importance. Spain had a popular culture making it difficult to realise that the country consisted of people from diverse socio-cultural backgrounds.
Peace and unity promoted economic growth in the country and this helped in making Spain famous. There was completely nothing wrong with the Muslim rule until the different religious sects began fighting for fame and prowess.
There was no need to oppose a government that helped Spain identify with the international community through art, poetry, science, engineering, and several aspects of the great civilisation. Disunity would definitely not allow the country to achieve its objectives, and this explains why the Spaniards supported the Islamic rule for 800 years (Collomb 100).
Spaniards did not begin the religious wars. Instead, the wars began between Muslims from Syria and Spanish Muslims. The Spaniards sought to protect their territory from external invasion and this affected the stability in the country. In almost all probability, without the religious wars, Islamic Spain would still exist in Europe.
The people of Spain did not have any issue with the leadership of the Islamic rulers and this explains the over 700 years of their religion’s leadership in a country initially dominated by Catholics. Muslims promoted brotherhood and unity, which were the building pillars of success in Spain. Unity lacked in other parts of Europe and this threatened the very existence of the Jews in Russia and Christians in Syria.
Issues of religious extremism never existed because the Jews and the Christians provided an excellent environment for Muslim leadership. Through unity, the country was able to experience peace, economic growth, and stability, which were very important to Spaniards.
Independence Religious extremists mostly in Islam exist because the involved parties overly exaggerate the functions of Jihad. During the middle Ages, religious freedom prevailed and this enabled different religious to operate at the same level. While the same happened, the ruling religion had to command respect from the rest of the population.
There was no need to fight for power, unlike the extremist groups from different religions in the current societies that overly fight for recognition. The Islamic government created religious autonomy for Spaniards and the fact that each person was free to worship in a religion in which he or she was comfortable reduced the possibility of the occurrence of religious wars.
Muslim leaders of the 10th to 18th century in Spain used intellect to rule the land. Religion is a strong force of rebellion, but empowering each religion reduces the possibility of such occurrence.
In essence, the Muslims never exercised control over other people and Christians could worship in churches while Jews could use temples freely. By empowering different religions, the Spaniards felt safe under the rule of Muslims and they had no reason to overturn a stable government.
Muslims never used totalitarianism to rule Spain, but the rulers focused on dialogue as an important aspect of attaining public goodwill. Islamic rulers understood that they were dealing with enlightened people in Spain and exercising authority on them would trigger a revolt. This happened when the Pope tried to eradicate Muslims from Spain even though he was initially comfortable with the rule.
It was evident that the Umayyad dynasty would take control of the land if the Islamic Spain failed to defend the land from externalities. Most critics considered the Pope as a selfish church leader who took the opportunity to rule the country after the Muslim-to-Muslim war ensued in the country.
When unity and religious autonomy failed in the country, it was impossible for the country to remain relevant in Europe even in the face of inventing the hydraulic technology.
Failure of the Islamic period Power strife
Initially, the Muslims co-existed peacefully with other religions and it was impossible to predict the occurrence of violence in the country. Power struggles became evident around the 11th century in which the Al-Andalus dynasty because the community realised that the Pope strived to bring down the Muslim rule by dissuading people from following the Islamic movement.
In 1207, the Pope organised a crusade to the dynasty for people to rebel against the kingdom. It was not easy for the Muslims to relent and they had to organise armies to defend Spain against Christian invasion. On the other hand, Christians wanted to command Spain as they did during the Greco-Roman revolution.
Leaving the Muslims to command the land would definitely make it difficult for people to remember that Christians equally were a strong force in Spain. In 1236, Muslims retaliated in Cordoba considering the fact that Christians pitched tent in the area initially dominated by Muslims (The Rise and Fall of Islamic Spain Full documentary PBS).
During this period, Christians used subtle strategies to lure Muslims. Muslims had to pay taxes in order to provide meals and accommodation for the poor in the society. In addition, Christians also transformed mosques into churches and this did not offer an alternative to worshipers because they atomically had to convert to Christianity.
By the 14th century, only Granada Muslim Empire remained untouched by the growing Christian movement. Only the most prominent religion could survive the violence and this gave rise to Catholicism’s fame while Muslims had to deal with the loss. This was one of the major causes of the fall of the Islamic Spain.
The Granada kingdom was the only hope for Muslims in the 14th century until a century later when Christians equally reached to the mountains to access the dynasty. One of the things that weakened the Muslim kingdom was an initial power struggle between the Umayyad caliphate in Syria and the Islamic Spain.
This caused the Christians to understand the weaknesses of the kingdom and around the 15th century, Christians moved towards the Granada Mountains to attack the kingdom. During their first visit to the kingdom, they never launched an attack, but instead created friendly relations with the Muslims.
It was almost impossible to understand the motives of the Christians because initially they caused destruction in kingdoms represented by Muslims in Spain. The Pope ordered an invasion of the land beginning with Christians and Jews and this raised confusions among the Muslim population. This deterred them from launching retaliatory attacks considering the attacks only affected the Christian and Jewish populations.
The Pope received mixed reactions from the population even though Christianity began gaining prominence in the land over a short period. To some people, religion became a force that controlled the lives of people preventing them from exercising autonomy even in terms of the most basic things such as fashion (The Rise and Fall of Islamic Spain Full documentary PBS).
As such, a section of the population participated in eradication of the Muslim religion because they had business interests. Things got worse around 1500 when the Christians used force to convert Muslims.
The main intention was to get the greatest support from the population in overtaking the land and ruling Spain as they did before the Islamic Spain came into power. Transforming Granada was the ultimate objective of Christians because it would garner the greatest support for the Christians.
Responsibility versus authority
When the society entrusted power with the Islamic movement around the 8 century, they had to delegate authority in order to avoid power strife. Though Muslims provided autonomy for other religions, they controlled the entire country making it difficult for non-Muslims to succeed in the era of civilisation. Ability to exercise responsibility does not amount to authority.
Muslim leadership exercised authority since it became the only avenue that innovators could display their engineering, philosophical, and artistic ideas. For some reason, Islamic Spain controlled the population by ensuring that the leaders used subtle communication strategies to attract the greatest number of people.
When the rest of the population understood that power was very significant for them, Islamic Spain was in the verge of collapse (Abadi 111). The Muslims did not get requisite support from the population they initially controlled because they used authority to govern the land. In the face of such calamities, the support of the target population is usually very important because they help in protecting the land against enemies.
When the Umayyad kingdom displayed interest in Spain, Christians did not intervene because they equally wanted a taste of power and Muslims fighting against Muslims was an excellent remedy during the period.
After the fall of the dynasty, Christians had to understand the difference between authority and responsibility or else they would also lose their position to the Jews or other religions (The Rise and Fall of Islamic Spain Full documentary PBS). However, the Christians commanded a huge army making it difficult for Muslims to defeat the Jews and the Non-Muslims in the 15th century.
In a movie re-enacting the events that culminated in the 800 years of Islamic Spain, there is evidence that the Muslim leaders used bureaucracy to control the land. Bureaucratic principles might last through generations but at some point, the population gets tired of the same and they support democracy. Leading a country for over 7 centuries is not easy and it takes an overly aggressive government to achieve the same.
Evidently, the Jews and the Christians came first to the Iberian Peninsula even though Muslims later came to control the land. It takes bureaucracy too be able to convince a section people to convert to a certain religion. In bureaucracy, the greatest principle is the ability to persuade people that the ideologies of the bureaucratic individual are the best in comparison to others within the socio-political environment.
Bureaucracy leads to failure because after periods of governance, the rulers are likely to lose their political influence because the population equally becomes enlightened. According to the movie, the Muslims were the elites of the pre-civilised Spain.
However, they promoted civilisation through different quotas enabling many countries in Europe to take interest in the country (The Rise and Fall of Islamic Spain Full documentary PBS). Through faith, they converted the Jews and the Christians to Christianity, but this did not last to eternity.
Similarly, the Muslim rule could not survive the 8th century because of the overly enlightened Spanish population. The fall of Islamic Spain began when the enlightened society realised that they would remain productive even in the absence of the Muslims.
Foreign relations and civilisation
Islamic Spain contributed towards the world civilisation in many ways. Besides invention, the Spaniards were excellent innovators who improved initially developed products in Europe. Through science, politics, and engineering, the Spaniards became a source of inspiration to the rest of the world.
Since antiquity, the years of the Greco-Roman revolution, the years of Christopher Columbus, and the Age of Renaissance, Spain is very significant in history. European countries wanted to learn from the Spaniards and they had to maintain quality relations with the country. Through cultural integration, Islamic Spain managed to influence many Europeans into adapting Muslim strategies of doing things.
Islam in Spain created room for religious diversity enabling other religions to participate in the civilisation process and to improve the situation in the country. Philosophy promoted by Aristotle attracted the attention of European countries and the rest of the world.
Evidently, the philosophers still have an impact on current populations and people take interest in countries such as Spain as promoters of civilisation during and after the antiquity (The Rise and Fall of Islamic Spain Full documentary PBS).
Foreign relations between Spain, Poland, and Russia among other countries in Europe were excellent. The only animosity that existed was between Syria and Spain because of the powerful Muslim dynasties during the period.
Through foreign relations, Spain acquired raw materials including natural resources from Russia. In return, Russia acquired its finished products to help in industrialisation of the country. The fact that the Jews co-existed peacefully with the Muslims and Christians made the country admirable to foreigners within Europe.
As such, many people immigrated to Spain and converted to Islam because they wanted to be part of a religion that promoted growth and civilisation.
By the 10th century, Europeans related to the Mosques, the Hebrew pinnacle, and Churches in Spain. Besides religion, Spain maintained excellent relations with neighbouring countries by promoting its literature. Today, many people still refer to Spanish literature, creative poetry, and books.
In reference to the movie, Muslims created room for pluralism for other factions of the Spanish community. Throughout the Islamic Spain era, there was a significant growth in the economy following the recognition of prominent personalities in art, science, philosophy, engineering and other areas of the economy.
After the introduction of the hydraulic technology, other European countries especially Bosnia, Poland, and Russia began using the technology for mining purposes. Russia used hydraulic technology in the Uranium sector and other multipurpose activities.
Though the movie fails to highlight significant relations between Spain and other countries in Europe, each innovation in the land increased made it possible for Spain to relate well with its neighbouring states (The Rise and Fall of Islamic Spain Full documentary PBS). The independence enjoyed during the Islamic Spain made the residents of Europe to learn many things.
Most of them began fighting for independence many years after the Islamic Spain stopped ruling the country. In the early 19th century, Bosnia had a civil revolution that made it separate into Serbia, Yugoslavia, and Herzegovina. Russia also lost control of the Soviet Union making countries such as Syria to defect from the movement in the late 19th century.
All these happened because people wanted to be in control of their lives and not under the rule of a central oppressive government. In 1991, the USSR failed to command the Soviet Union officially leading to its collapse. This also made it possible for other generations to relate to the fall of the Islamic Spain following over 700 years of controlling Spain.
When the Moors Ruled in Spain Cities of light provided an over view of the rise and fall of the Islamic Spain. On the other hand, when the moors ruled in Spain is equally a re-enactment of the rule of the Moors in Europe for over 700 years. The Moors led Spain and Poland respectively and by the 15th century, the lost control of the two countries in Europe (Al-Andalus History of Islam in Spain).
The Moors were present in different regions in Spain including Granada, Cordoba, Andalucía, and Fes. The society consists of various social forces that contribute towards the development of a uniform culture. Countries get recognition based on the socio-economic, political, and technological forces they have in the world. Religion is an element of the social realm that defines the belief systems of a section of the population.
Islam a renowned religion and Spain a prominent country dominate the discussion. The rise and fall of the Islamic religion in Spain is of great significance to the history of Europe. Prior to the fall of the Soviet Union between 1989 and 1991, Europe was a force to reckon with considering it took control of the Americas about the same period.
Besides, the history of Spain is important because of its close relationship with the world civilisation. Islam was the dominant religion around 1207, but Christianity and Judaism equally commanded crowds of believers. This threatened the survival of Islam in Spain that initially embraced Catholicism.
Tariq ibn Ziyad led the Moors into Spain in 711 AD. Their occupation in Spain was significant to the western civilisation because the Arabs provided an excellent ground for competition with the Islamic Spaniards. Moors came from North Africa and entered Andalus through the Gibraltar Strait. Moors threatened the existence of the Gothic leaders considered one of the most powerful armies in Europe under the leadership of Germany.
The 7th century marked a major economic and socio-political transition for European. Al-Anadlus became the Moors’ territory and they carried out the operations of acquiring other kingdoms from Al-Andalus.
When Moors reached Granada, a section of the Arabs became Muslims instead of converting the populations they found in the territories (Al-Andalus History of Islam in Spain). This empowered the Islamic Spain and there was a conflict of interest between the Arabic Moors and the Muslim Moors in Spain.
The Moors came from Morocco in North Africa and they equally interacted with members of the Abbasid family who caused the Abbasid Revolution in 750 CE to North Africa. The Abbasid family and members of the Marwanid left Syria for North Africa originally ruled Syria under the Umayyad caliphate that was Muslim. As such, some members of the Moors army understood Muslim teachings because of the interaction process.
The forgotten history
According to the producer of the movie; Bettany Hughes, there is part of the Spanish history that many historians forgot. This incorporates the era in which the Moors ruled the land. Though many people discuss the rise and fall of the Islamic Spain, they forget that the Arabs were equally a force to reckon with between 711 AD and the 15th century.
There is evidence that the Arabs introduced arithmetic calculations in Spain including Algebra. At Alhambra Palace in the Granada dynasty, first mathematical calculations occurred when the Arabs invaded the place. Mathematics became important for business and formal education, which was also a project of the Moors in Spain.
In Granada, the Moors converted many Muslims and this was very important for the influence and support they needed in 712 AD (Bollacasa and Althea 40). It was difficult to notice the difference between the Arab Moors and the Muslim Moors because of similar cultures. Other areas of exploration included astrology, which enabled the Moors to predict the weather and seasons of the year.
Moors also promoted art, science, and agriculture even though the Muslims took all the credit for the work. According to historians, the Moors contributed more on the civilisation as opposed to the Muslims who got all the praises for having a sustainable and long-term government.
Science and civilisation
In Spain, the Muslims introduced the lemon tree and the waterwheel, but the Moors introduced Avocados. Without much recognition, the Moors remained subtle in their scientific endeavours often working at conquering countries that were originally under the rule of the Muslims. Before the Moors’ invasion, the Spanish residents referred to the period as the Dark Ages.
About the same time, the Muslims helped in technologically advancing Spain and the society began to see the Renaissance even though the Moors participated actively throughout the period. Instead of fair representation of the Muslim and Arabic Moors, only the Islamic Spain emerged as a strong promoter of the civilisation process (Ahlstrom 21).
Besides mathematics and art, the Moors introduced science in Europe enabling people to become innovative especially in the field of astronomy. It became easy for Spaniards to predict the climatic conditions through astrology including prediction of the future. Ever since, the Spaniards used chemistry, physics, and geography including philosophy to interact with other people in Europe.
A renowned historian, Davidson Basil was quick to note that Moorish philosophy represented the North African civilisation, and it was difficult for the Islamic Spain to accept that change would occur from the black continent.
The Moors designed and established the Cordoba Mosque, which is still important to the people of Spain. The artistic work from the Moors rarely found representation until the beginning of the 18th century when many historians began discussions concerning the rise and fall of the Islamic Spain.
Innovations that generated interest in Spain included the lemon tree and the waterwheel. The lemon tree became very important for medicinal purposes, and additional for meals. Lemon tree gave fame to Spain because the rest of Europe wanted to access the lemon tree. Initially considered a wild plant, it had limited functions in the society because other parts of Europe never identified its medicinal functions.
The waterwheel helped in reducing workload because the Spanish created the machinery for the same purpose. The Umayyad dynasty equally commanded a hug army of Muslims in Syria, but the country’s development could not compare to Spain. Spain used international relations to promote the western civilisation.
According to the rest of Europe, it was important to develop relations with countries such as Spain because the long-term relationship determined equal stability in other countries.
By establishing long-term relations between Spain and other countries and Europe, the countries had the assurance of enjoying the innovative products from the Spanish empire. Islamic Spain also led through peaceful means that attracted other European states enabling them to develop mutually beneficial relationships with Spain.
People identify the Moors with their art and ability to use the precious stones for beautifying edifices and ornaments. They included jasper and porphyry among other precious stones, which they also sold to the neighbouring Poland and Bosnia. Art only formed a section of the western civilisation that the Moors promoted.
Agriculture was another source of recognition for the Moors because they also introduced the lemon tree, oranges, avocados, dates, cotton, and rice among many cash crops and fruits.
The Moors did virtually everything to ensure that western civilisation survived even without the recognition of the group of people. Though situated in Al-Andalus and Cordoba the Moors introduced many things in Spain. The Muslims had influence because they commanded many territories in the country providing them with requisite support from the population in Spain.
When the Moors first came to Spain, they had the responsibility of introducing formal education considering the population considered many illiterate, but creative individuals. Without the reading and writing capabilities, it was difficult to spread innovation to other parts of Europe. People referred to the era of the Moors as the period of the Renaissance after the Dark Ages.
Formal education found acceptance in Spain at a very slow rate and the Moors already had 17 higher education institutions in various territories they acquired in Spain. This contributed to the spread of the reading and writing cultures in Spain. Some of the territories that benefited from the Universities included Cordoba and Granada.
Through formal education, it was easy for the Spanish population to document their innovative stories. In educating the population, Arabic words found way into the Spanish language. After introducing the Al-Andalus, many people began relating to the Arabic language because some words had to begin with the prefix (Alexy 90). Formal education helped the society in sharing ideas and the civilisation spread throughout Europe.
Philosophers such as Aristotle found a way of communicating their ideas in a common language that people across Europe could understand because they went through informal schools, but were capable of interpreting facts through people who studied in formal schools.
The Moors’ end came in the 15th century around the same time as the Islamic Spain. The Arabic language started to gain prominence because the Moors spread their texts throughout the land. Before the end of their term in Spain, Christians, particularly the Catholics destroyed the materials making it impossible for the Arabs to control Spain.
The Christian invasion caused the downfall of both the Moors and the Islamic Spain (Bollacasa and Althea 41). Catholics targeted the territories that experienced the influence of the Moors including Granada and burnt about 100, 000 religious texts. This completely interfered with the spread of the Moorish culture in the region.
It took many years of sacrifice for various intellects to write the texts and destruction of the same discouraged them from continued production of Arabic literature.
Christians wanted to dominate Spain as they did before and during the Dark Ages. Enlightenment was good for the people, but the Moors had not room to convert almost 79% of the population. This would result in the disappearance of the traditional Spanish culture, which Christians could not allow.
Works cited Abadi, Saeed Akbar. An analytical and critical study of Islamic history: the rise and fall of Muslims from the pious caliphs to Abbasid Spain and Moghal dynasties. New Delhi: Adam Publishers, 2002. Print.
Ahlstrom, Sydney E.. A religious history of the American people. New Haven: Yale University Press, 1972. Print.
Alexy, Trudi. The mezuzah in the Madonna’s foot: oral histories exploring five hundred years in the paradoxical relationship of Spain and the Jews. New York: Simon
The Global Sports Retail Industry Report (Assessment) essay help online free: essay help online free
Introduction The global sports retail industry has achieved a rapid growth over the last ten years. It is also expected to continue growing over the next five years, with an estimated growth rate of about 6% per annum to reach about $130 billion by 2020 (United Nations 2014). The rapid rate of growth in this industry is due to a number of factors.
However, the major factor contributing to the industrial growth and development at a faster rate is the dynamism in the demand for sports goods. For instance, studies have shown that there is an increase in the demand for sports goods or sport-style products in various parts of the world, especially Asia.
The purpose of this paper is to develop a comprehensive report based on the industrial analysis of the global sports retail business. It will examine the industry based on the conventional techniques of industry analysis, including forced field analysis, porters 5 forces, PEST and SWOT analysis.
This paper argues that the sports industry stands a better chance to develop rapidly over the next five years, giving corporate and other players a good chance to improve their economic development and financial health.
Force field analysis Force field analysis is an important tool in the process and technique of decision-making (Lewin 2000). It aims at analyzing the forces for and against industrial or corporate change in order to provide corporate leaders with information needed to make effective decisions.
In addition, the technique helps corporate leaders communicate the reasons behind their need for change in the corporate management area, which makes it easy to convince stakeholders that a change or project is needed. In particular, the force field analysis model yields information that has two effects (Cartwright 2009).
It can provide information that supports the idea of change, thus calling the corporations involved to go ahead with a project, a change of a program.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The forces favoring the growth of the sports retail industry Population growth: The increased rate of world population is an important factor supporting the rate of growth for sport retail industry. In particular, the growing demand for sports and sport-style products is high in areas with a high rate of population growth, especially in a number of Asian countries (Cai
Marketing Plan for the Samsung Galaxy Tablet Essay college application essay help
Introduction Marketing refers to “the set of institutions, activities, and processes for creating, communicating, delivering, and exchanging goods and services that have value for customers, partners, and the society”. Thus, marketing aims at identifying and satisfying customers’ needs effectively.
Marketing is crucial to an organization’s success. It enables an organization to “integrate and align its resources and functions to an overall goal of customer satisfaction”. Effective marketing requires a marketing plan.
A marketing plan refers to “a written document that describes how an organization intends to reach its target market”. It entails a situation analysis, an organization’s goals, marketing strategies, and marketing mix decisions. This paper discusses the marketing plan for the successful development, commercialization, and introduction of the Samsung galaxy tablet into the market.
Situation Analysis Strengths
In the past decades, Samsung has emerged as one of the most competitive companies. Samsung boasts of several strengths. First, it focuses on producing electronic devices with a hardware system, which is compatible with most software and operating systems.
This has enabled Samsung to have an edge over its competitors such as Apple. As a result, “Samsung’s Android mobile phones and tablets have gained a huge market share as opposed to Apple’s iOS and OS X”.
Second, Samsung is one of the most innovative mobile phone companies. For example, “in 2011 Samsung was among the top patent assignees in the United States of America”.
The acquisition of several patents has enabled it to surpass most of its competitors. Additionally, the company has won several awards for its products’ designs, which are user friendly and unique. Samsung also has a major focus on designing environmentally friendly products.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Third, the company has a strong financial base because it has a significant market share in a number of its products’ categories. Moreover, Samsung’s manufacturing firms are located in countries where the cost of production is relatively low. As a result, it incurs low costs of production; hence, it can offer its products at a lower price.
Fourth, Samsung has managed to market its brand effectively. It is among the top rising brands. “From 2011 to 2012, the company’s popularity rose by 40 percent”. This rise was mainly attributed to strategic marketing techniques. For example, the company uses varied avenues such as sporting events to market its products.
Despite its strengths, Samsung faces a number of challenges. First, the company lacks its own software. Software production can enable a company to attain a high profit margin. It also helps to popularize a company’s product and promote its brand loyalty. Therefore, Samsung is disadvantaged compared to its main competitors such as Apple.
Second, the company has businesses in a number of industries. Thus, “it might lose focus by competing in several industries”. In the past years, Samsung has been found guilty of patent infringement. Consequently, this has had a negative effect on its reputation.
Third, Samsung is one of the largest electronic companies in the world. Nonetheless, the company experiences a relatively low gross profit margin due to the company’s aggressive price cuts on its products.
Samsung has numerous opportunities that it can seize in order to enable it expand further. For instance, “the smartphone market in India is one of the least penetrated among the Asian countries”. Therefore, its strong presence in India can enable it to maximize gains in India’s smartphone market.
The introduction of smartphones and tablets has led to a major increase in the demand for application processors. Fortunately, “Samsung is one of the main manufacturers of application processors for tablets and smartphones”. Therefore, Samsung stands a better chance of meeting this demand because it has a superior experience in the production of processors.
We will write a custom Essay on Marketing Plan for the Samsung Galaxy Tablet specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Samsung is also one of the dominant players in the tablet market. Therefore, the company has high chances of expanding its niche in the tablet market by producing unique and high quality tablet models.
Samsung has a large patents portfolio. As a result, it has a competitive advantage over it rivals. Therefore, it can be able to acquire more patents through acquisition of other firms.
Samsung faces a number of threats to its business operations. First, the smartphone market in the developed countries is highly saturated; hence, it might not reap major gains in the developed countries.
Second, rapid technological change is also a major threat to the company. Currently, Samsung is under pressure to keep on producing new products at a faster rate. However, this is often difficult whenever a company aims at being innovative and successful because innovations take considerable time.
Third, Samsung is prone to experience major price wars. For instance, the company has been offering its products at a relatively lower price compared to its competitors. Therefore, its competitors may also follow the trend. Unfortunately, this will significantly erode Samsung’s profit margins, which are already low.
Industry Trends and Competition Samsung is one of the major companies in the tablet industry. Others include Apple, Asus, Acer, and Nokia. All the players in the tablet industry have continued to produce new tablet models. For example, at the beginning of 2014, Asus introduced the Transformer Book TD300. “The new tablet model by Asus switches instantly from Windows 8.1 to Android and back”.
In a similar manner, Apple has also developed new tablet models such as the iPad Air, which “has a thinner aluminum body chassis, identical to the iPad mini”. Furthermore, the tablet market is likely to expand due to an anticipated decline in the use of laptops. A number of people have adopted tablets because of their convenience.
Tablets are portable and effective compared to laptops and desktops. Consequently, there has been a rise in the demand and supply of tablets in the market. This has led to a stiff competition among various companies. Therefore, the price and quality of a tablet plays a critical role in determining customers’ purchasing patterns.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Marketing Plan for the Samsung Galaxy Tablet by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The Organization’s Mission Statement A mission statement is a statement of purpose. It explains the reason for the existence of an organization. It guides the decisions and actions of an organization. A mission statement for a commercial company should comprise three major elements.
These include “the key market, the contribution of the organization, and the distinction of its product or service”. Therefore, Samsung will adopt the following mission statement: “to be the most successful electronic company in the world by developing user friendly tablets that brings a lively experience to all internet users.”
Performance goals The company will pursue the following goals. First, the company aims at realizing a monthly turnover of $500,000. Second, the company aims at supplying the Samsung galaxy tablet to the major online stores by the end of the first month after its launch. Third, the company plans to distribute the Samsung galaxy tablet in all Asian countries within the first six months.
Marketing strategy A marketing strategy should “enable an organization to concentrate its resources on the optimal opportunities with the major aim of increasing sales and achieving sustainable competitive advantage”. A marketing strategy is one of the most essential elements of a marketing plan.
A number of marketing strategies are often developed as long-term plans. In such a case, an organization is often required to develop a tactical plan. A tactical plan spells out what an organization aims at achieving within a period of one year.
There are different types of marketing strategies that a company can adopt. The choice of a particular marketing strategy is largely determined by the situation analysis.
For instance, the strengths and opportunities identified in the situation analysis determine the strategy that a company adopts. In most instances, a company’s success is determined by its strengths and opportunities. Similarly, the choice of a marketing strategy depends on an organization’s mission statement, as well as, the company’s goals and objectives.
Some of the marketing strategies include the product differentiation strategy, cost leadership strategy, and the market focus strategy. The product differentiation strategy involves the creation of a product or service that is distinct from one’s competitors. Therefore, a company that adopts this strategy will have to ensure that its product has specific attributes that are unique from other products in the market.
On the other hand, the cost leadership strategy is intended to enable a company to attract cost-sensitive customers. Thus, a company will sell its product at a relatively lower price compared to its competitors. This strategy is most suitable for a company, which incurs lower production and marketing costs.
The market focus strategy requires a company to describe its market scope. Thus, a company can choose to have a narrow market scope or a broader market scope. Additionally, “a company may opt to specialize in the production of a particular product in order to meet the unique needs of customers in a given market segment”.
Samsung will adopt the product differentiation strategy. This strategy will be most suitable for commercialization and introduction of the Samsung galaxy tablet into the market. The Samsung galaxy tablet has a distinct model from other tablets in the market.
Its model is user friendly and can enable internet users to enjoy lively internet browsing. For instance, the Samsung galaxy tablet has a wider screen, which can enable a user to perform multiple tasks. Additionally, the Samsung galaxy tablet is lighter; hence, portable.
Market Segmentation Samsung targets people who are eighteen years and above. The company targets adults because the galaxy tablet will facilitate their activities. For example, the tablet has several applications with varied functions. The Samsung galaxy tablet will also be suitable for both male and female users.
For instance, the galaxy tablet has different colors such as black, yellow, and silver. Thus, users have a chance to make a choice between the colors available. Additionally, the Samsung galaxy tablet is lighter. As a result, it can easily fit into a jacket’s pocket or in a handbag.
Samsung also targets all professionals in various fields. For instance, the galaxy tablet will be suitable for businesspersons who use the internet several times in a day to communicate with clients.
It is also suitable for professionals who may wish to prepare and make presentations. The galaxy tablet will also be suitable for professionals who travel regularly. Therefore, the Samsung galaxy tablet can enable them to work while travelling.
Integrated Marketing Mix Product
Samsung galaxy tablet is seven inches long. It has two cameras and is compatible with a flash disk. “The Samsung galaxy tablet uses Android 2.2 with market support”. It also has a number of pre-installed applications. Finally, “the Samsung galaxy tablet has five default home screens”.
The Samsung galaxy tablet will cost approximately $600 to $500. However, the price will differ from one country to another. One of the major price determinants for the Samsung galaxy tablet will be the market situation in a given country. For instance, factors such as market competition and cost of operations incurred by distributors will influence the local prices in various countries.
Location and Distribution
Samsung dealers will distribute the Samsung galaxy tablet to all regions within their respective countries. The tablet will be available in the major retail stores in various countries. In addition, customers will also have the privilege to purchase the tablet from online stores.
Samsung will use various advertisement channels to market its galaxy tablet. For instance, Samsung will use both print and electronic media for advertisement. The company also intends to organize major sales promotions in the first three months.
Summary and recommendations for the execution of the plan This marketing plan aims at maximizing Samsung’s profits. It provides a detailed description of the company’s strengths such as a large market share, superior experience in the production of electronic devices, and sustained innovation. The company intends to use the product differentiation strategy as its marketing strategy.
The company should take note of the following factors in order to execute the marketing plan effectively. First, the company should conduct regular evaluation in order to determine progress. It should use the evaluation results to make improvements where necessary.
Second, the company should ensure a timely distribution of the tablets immediately after the launch of the galaxy tablet. Third, the company should minimize costs in the execution of the marketing plan in order to increase its gross profit margin
Conclusion From the above discussion, it is evident that a marketing plan is a crucial tool that enables a company to have an edge over its competitors. It provides a situation analysis that spells out a company’s strengths and opportunities. Therefore, a marketing plan helps to focus a company’s operations, goals, and decisions.
References Jurevicius, O. (2013, May 13). SWOT Anayses. Retrieved from Strategic Management Insight: https://www.strategicmanagementinsight.com/
Feminist Pro-Porn During Sex Wars Thesis college application essay help: college application essay help
Introduction Feminist Sex Wars of 1970s and 1980s were acrimonious debates about a number of issues relating to sex, and the role of women in this context. In the debate that was uniquely feminist in nature, the focus was on various issues about sex and how different members of the society viewed it. One of the main issues was pornography and how it impacted on the fight for equality in the society.
The anti-porn feminists argued strongly against porn. To this group, pornography portrayed women as objects for sexual gratification for men. It takes away the dignity from women, leaving them empty. On the other hand, the pro-porn feminists held that, pornography did not have any negative connotation about women. They argue that the actors are consenting adult men and women who believe that what they are doing is morally right.
According to Martindalei, the pro-porn feminists were opposed to the idea of the anti-porn feminists that women should avoid exposing their privacy before the camera. This was seen by the pro-porn feminist as an oppressive approach of dealing with the issue.
In the current society, women, just like men, should be allowed to express their sexual orientation without any prejudice. This is one of the ways of empowering women. For this reason, pornography should not be viewed from a partial angle of just looking at the female actress. It should be taken from a holistic form where the analysis should focus on both male and female actors.
Both are involved in the industry, and it would only be fair to analyse the industry by addressing this fact. Giving a biased focus on men gives the impression that women are still the weaker sex than men in the society. This is what the pro-porn feminists were opposed to in this war.
They argued that both parties are equal and that if the anti-porn feminists thought that women in the pornographic films are used as objects, then they should show maturity in the fight for equity by defending the men in those films as well. In this research, the focus will be on feminists who were pro-porn during the sex wars in the 1970s and 1980s.
Feminist Sex Wars According to Jeffreysii, the feminist sex war was one of the unique revolutionary debates that had the main players as women. Men played a partial role in these debates, preferring to let women fight their own battle. This scholar says that there was a growing discomfort among many women about the issue of sexuality.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The film titled ‘Snuff’ which was produced in 1976 sparked the public debate on the role of women in the society, and the effects of pornographic films. Andrea Dworkin was one of the pioneers of this debate. She was concerned about the perception that the society, especially men, had towards women.
To her, women were seen as objects meant to offer sexual gratification to men. She argued that this was not only demonstrated in prostitution that was common in New York and various parts of the world, but also in pornographic films. It was a concern to her that the government was ignoring the issue of pornography as it was gaining popularity in the society.
When this debate started, many thought that it would be a revolutionary debate that would pitch women on one side, and men on the other side. Andrea Dworkin was able to convince women that pornography was wrong. She traversed the country and organised public rallies to denounce it. She argued that, pornography was the main factor that led to increased cases of rape in the country.
She was able to get the backing from other staunch human rights activists such as Ellen Willis, Susan Griffin, and Kathleen Barry. It is strange that Kathy Acker and Susie Bright were some of the followers of the anti-porn feminism during its early days. Andrea was seen as a hero who opened a topic that no one had dared talk about, and most women were in support of her efforts.
In the early 1980s, there seemed to be a shift of ideology from among some of the followers of Andrea. Led by Susie Bright, a section of women started approaching this debate from a different point of view. While the anti-porn crusaders used public forums such as rallies to champion for the crimination of pornography in the country, a new outfit that was pro-porn took a scholarly approach.
They wrote books and articles in the newspapers criticising the ideology of the anti-porn crusaders. Susie was particularly concerned of the approach that anti-porn crusaders had taken about issues of pornography and commercial sex workers. According to her, the sex workers went to the streets out of their own free will to earn a livingiii.
Their concern is to offer service to willing people and get paid out of this, just like a painter or a gardener. The claim that this was a patriarchal-motivated act was, therefore, not convincing to her. Similarly, she believed that, pornography was offering women the opportunity to get liberation when talking about the issue of sexuality.
We will write a custom Thesis on Feminist Pro-Porn During Sex Wars specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Women, just like men, should be allowed to enjoy sex and express their views freely without feeling intimidated. Criticising women who act in pornographic films and ignoring the fact that men are also part of the action is unfair to women. It is a clear demonstration that this group feels that women are lesser beings when compared to men.
Similarly, appearing to defend women who act in these films and ignoring that men are also part of the action is unfair to women. This is so because it emphasises the belief in the society that women are weak and need a constant protection.
To Susie, this was wrong, and demeaning to women that the pro-porn activists claimed to protect. It would be important to focus on the events that took place in this war in order to understand how the pro-porn feminists fought to make their voice be heard and their contributions be appreciated in this debate.
Samois Samois was the earliest pro-porn feminist group to be started in the United States in 1977. It gave rise to what would be called feminist war because till then, the war against pornography and prostitution seemed to be a fight between men and women. However, this group of lesbians came out to strongly oppose the arguments put forth by the anti-porn activists.
One factor that brought members of this group together was that they were lesbians. They analysed principles laid by the anti-porn activists and realised that their practice was part of what was criticised by this group. This made them feel outsiders to the movement. According to Nestleiv, the name Samois was taken from a story titled ‘Story of O’ where one of the main characters was a lesbian.
The founders of Saimos were convinced that women deserve to be given the right to define their sexual orientation. They argued that men were living in a free world where no one questioned their choices. However, this was different when the issue concerns women. The society still had the belief that women should be closely controlled, and this denied them the liberty to make any choices.
In particular, this group was determined to fight for the rights of the lesbians as they realised that the arguments of the anti-porn feminists were against their freedom.
It is important to note that this group was not very successful because it was the first organisation that was coming out publicly in support of pornography and prostitution in the society. Most of their contributions were made in the print media, avoiding public rallies for fear of a possible attack by the extremists.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Feminist Pro-Porn During Sex Wars by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The group was criticised by the anti-porn feminists, especially the Women against Violence in Pornography and Media. They were seen as a thorn in the flesh, fighting against the principles that were viewed as acceptable by women. Gayle Rubin and Pat Califia were some of the founders of this group. This organisation only lasted for six years, and in 1983, it split up to various smaller groups.
The split was caused by infighting among members who disagreed on some of the fundamental principles. For instance, while all members of agreed on the need to fight for the rights of lesbians in the society, a section were opposed to violence in pornography, a view that was shared by the anti-porn feminists. The disagreements led to the split of the organisation in 1983, with members forming realignments based on their personal principles.
One of the biggest groups formed after the split was The Outcasts which lasted until 1997, later changing its name to The Exiles. This new group was pro-porn, arguing that the parties involved in pornography are consenting adults. Some of the members of this group published articles and books in support of their view towards this philosophical war.
Lesbian Sex Mafia In 1981, a sex-positive feminist Dorothy Allison founded a group she named Lesbian Sex Mafiav. She was concerned of the criticism that the lesbians, bisexuals, transsexual, and sexual women were facing in New York. They were forced to live in fear of possible attacks from the anti-porn feminists.
Most of them were forced to hide their sexual orientation because of the momentum that the anti-sex feminists had gained in this state. According to Allison, the anti-porn feminists were rigid minded, with principles that belittled women they claimed to protect. In one of her publications, Allison claimed that men had thrived in the field of sexuality as they were free to express themselves and decide on the sexual orientation.
On the other hand, women have lived in a society where they are expected to be dormant when it comes to issues of sexuality. They are supposed to be recipients and not initiators. To Allison, this era was long gone, and it was the right time to allow women to make the decision about their own sexuality, a freedom that was enjoyed by men.
She believed that controlling women sexuality in any way was the equivalent of taking power away from women and handing it over to men. This is contrary to the belief of the pro-porn feminists who believed that their principles centred on empowering women.
Some of the principles that this organisation strongly supported included fantasy role playing, fetishes, sadomasochism, unrestrained sexual expressions, and alternate gender identities. It is important to note that some of these principles were strongly opposed by the anti-porn feminists formed the basis of this organisation.
For instance, this organisation strongly supported sadomasochism as they considered it a practiced that allowed women to express themselves in various forms as long as they were not forced into the act. However, the anti-porn feminists considered this one of the worst acts that belittled women and made them be seen as objects of pleasure for men. This was a major point of disagreement among these two warring parties.
According to Meikavi, while one party saw this as a demonstration that women were in bondage and used the way men desired, the other section felt that this was another form of expression for women. Another fundamental disagreement between Lesbian Sex Mafia and the anti-porn feminists was on alternate gender identities.
The anti-porn feminists were conservatives who believed that women shall remain women and they should be proud of this fact when expressing their sexuality. On the other hand, the Lesbian Sex Mafia believed that women could alternate gender identity when expressing their sexuality as this formed the basis of lesbianism.
According to this group, for one to be a lesbian, she must have a feeling that she is a man in her sexual orientation, and this will make men unattractive to her. She will view men to be of her same gender. For this reason, she will be attracted to other women. This essentially means that there is an alternation of gender identity. Lastly, these two groups largely differed on their view of unrestricted sexual expression.
The two groups claimed that they supported unrestricted sexual expression of women. To the anti-porn feminists, women should be respected, and be allowed to make their own choices on the people they would want to be intimate with in their lives. Their romantic lives should not be subject to filming because the pleasure generated from the intimacy should be enjoyed by the two parties, and not a third party.
They should not be used as the objects of sexuality by men who may be interested in funny exploration of the body of women. This is contrary to the view held by the Lesbian Sex Mafia. To this group, women should be granted total freedom to express their sexuality. Those who wish to act in pornography should not be restricted simply because they are women.
Women who are interested in watching pornographic should be given the liberty to do so because men have never been restricted from such films. The group also argued that women should not be restricted in their dressing code, something that anti-porn feminist was very critical about.
The Mafia sought to give total liberation to women, handing them the power to choose their personality in as far as sexuality was concerned. This organisation remained very strong during the feminist sex war, especially due to its liberal approach to various issues of sexuality.
Membership was open to women aged 18 years and above. The group would organise play parties where members would watch erotic movies or practical plays by some of the members. They would also sell sex toys to its members or other parties that visited their dungeons.
This was seen as an open defiance to the moralist approach taken by the anti-porn feminists, a fact that that intensified the war. Their act received massive criticism, especially in some of the rallies in New York organised by Andrea Dworkin. They were seen to be the force that was acting against the right course that would liberate women from the bondage.
The group was bringing a new approach to the war against pornography and male dominance in the area of sexuality. Women were now doing what Dworkin and her movement had associated men with, and the group had a substantial following. This was seen as a betrayal to the women in the society according to Dworkin.
While they were busy fighting for some of these vices from being committed by men to women, a section of women were not committing the same acts to fellow women, and publicly justifying their course. Dworkin and her movement realised that the real enemy in their fight for liberation was not men, but fellow women.
On the other hand, the pro-porn feminists viewed the anti-porn feminists as the real enemies of the fight for their total liberation. Herbert says that, the development of these two strong factions in this debate made men completely withdraw from the war to let the women find the course they thought was the best for all.
In fact, the only parties that joined in the battle were the pornographic film producers and religious leaders because of their vested interests. The research by Nestle shows that this group still exists in New York and various parts of the United States, and it has held to its initial principles so dearly.
Feminists against Censorship The feminist war was not just fought in the United States. It was also experienced in Europe, especially in the United Kingdom. According to Meika, unlike the United States that was seen to be more liberal, the United Kingdom had strict laws concerning possession and use of pornographic materials in the society.
This is very different from what was the case in the United States. In the U.S., the law was defining production and usage of pornographic materials only focused on individuals who were below the age of 18 years. To adults, there was no censorship to the materials, and this was what anti-porn feminists were fighting against. They wanted clearly defined laws that would help regulate the industry.
As the feminist revolution swept across the Europe, British women realised that they were unfairly treated by the law that largely favoured men. It was illegal to be in possession of pornographic materials, but this law seemed only applicable on women. The majority of consumers of pornographic materials were men, but the most of those who were prosecuted for this crime were women.
The law gave powers to the Queen of England to confiscate any pornographic materials found within the kingdom, but this law was unfairly applied. It was a common knowledge in the 1980s that the number of gays in the country was higher than that of lesbians. They also went public over their sexual orientation quite often than the lesbians who still feared stigmatisation from members of the society.
This meant that only a small fraction of the smaller population of lesbians was easy to identify in this society during this time. However, it was strange that the police rarely raided homes of the gays to look for the pornographic materials. This meant that women were targeted in such raids simply because they were women.
To fight what they considered social injustice against female sexual orientation and freedom, a group of scholars, lesbians, and their sympathisers started Feminist against Censorship in 1989. This was a network of women that were focused on what they viewed as social injustice directed towards women in the society.
The network was spearheaded by Roz Kaveney and Linda Semple who started organising feminists’ forums in the City of Londonvii. It is important to note that this network was different from the other pro-porn feminist organisations in the United States.
Unlike the American organisations that were registered and with their own membership, this remained a forum for discussion for those who supported the course. It had no membership other than the two pioneers who were involved in organising the rallies for the members whenever this was necessary.
It is also important to note that the context under which this group operated was very different from what other pro-porn groups in the United States operated. In the United States, there were no clear laws that censored pornographic materials among adults. In the United Kingdom, this law existed, and was seen to be subjective in nature by the feminists.
Although the wave of anti-porn feminists’ activities was felt in the United Kingdom, its impact was largely felt in the United States where the groups organised public rallies to champion for their course. For this reason, the pro-porn feminist movement received backing from many women in the United Kingdom than was the case in the United States where there was a divided opinion.
Feminist against Censorship was particularly against government’s censor against pornographic materials. They argued that these materials should be confiscated from children. However, adults should be given the liberty to choose whether or not to consume these materials. The group was particularly concerned of the impartial implementation of the law of confiscation of these materials.
They complained that police officers were harassing women in the society by constantly organising unwarranted search for these materials on homes of the lesbians.
At times, such police raids would come late in the night, infringing into the rights of privacy, especially when the raids took place when the couples were intimate. The movement considered this a deliberate effort by the law enforcers to intimidate them based on their sexual orientation.
According to Jeffreys, the co-founders of this movement were very intelligent ladies that were able to bring women in this society into a near similar approach of reasoning in this fight. For instance, in 1990, the two organised a rally in London to protest against women in this society.
In their protest, they were keen not to publicly champion for the rights of lesbians because they knew some of their supporters abhorred lesbianism. For this reason, they tied the rights of lesbians to that of every other woman in the country. They gave the image that they were fighting for the rights of all women in the United Kingdom.
When talking about night raids, they were keen to mention that the police unfairly targeted women, and not lesbians. When talking about pornography, this movement was very keen because it was aware that many women had a low opinion about it. For this reason, they mentioned that men in the society were at liberty to use the pornographic materials without police harassment, a right that was not common among women.
In this context, they supported the pornography without directly saying so, and this made many women rejected to pornography change their opinion towards it. Their arguments were more inclined to empowering women and allowing them to enjoy their rights, other than liberalising pornographic materials.viii
This was the group managed to instil the spirit of rebellion on many women, and pornography was largely viewed merely as an object in this rebellion. For this reason, many women viewed it as a lesser social evil as compared to the discrimination they faced in the public.
Many contended that if pornography could be used to liberalise the society and free women from the bondage, then it was an acceptable social evil. This saw many women make contributions in newspaper articles and public rallies criticising the censorship of pornographic materials in the country. This group is believed to be still active in the country.
Feminists for Free Expression In the late 1989, there was a group of women who were thinking of forming a group that would be more vibrant in supporting the rights of women to express their sexuality without feeling intimidated. This group was that the Lesbian Sex Mafia was not fighting for the rights of a section of women, especially the prostitutes within various cities in the United States.
As its name suggests, the Lesbian Sex Mafia was also viewed as a society for lesbians. Most of their activities also showed more inclination towards lesbianism other than overall protection of rights and freedom of women sexuality. As a result, some of these women felt that their views were not fully represented in the ongoing feminists’ wars. This formed the basis of the formation of this new organisation in the late 1989.
The founders of these groups included Candida Royalle and Veronica Vera who were human rights champions. In the past, they had come out strongly to champion the rights of prostitute and a time when mentioning a world about prostitution by women was considered taboo in this society.
They argued that this new organisation would be focused on fighting for the interests of all women in the society, irrespective of their profession, religion, sexual orientation, or social status.
According to Nestle, this organisation attracted a high number of prostitutes within the City of New York. In fact, many thought that it was specifically meant for prostitutes, a fact that made some women shun it during its inception. However, the founders were able to convince pro-porn feminist that this organisation was focused on fighting for the rights of all women.
It only happened that prostitutes formed part of the women in the society and, therefore, they were rightfully presented in the movement. During its early days, the society had a slogan which stated, “Let us stop hypocrisy by legalising abortion.” Veronica Vera criticised Andrea Dworkin and her group saying that in prostitution was not unique to the United States.
She was against criminalisation of prostitution in the society that made prostitutes look like criminals. According to her, men were hypocritical by stating that prostitution should be legalised while the truth is that they form 100% of the market for prostitutes. For a crime of prostitution to be committed, there must be the presence of a prostitute and the client.
If prostitution is a crime, then both parties are liable and should be answerable to their actions. However, this is not the case. Some states have criminalised the prostitution, making the lives of prostitutes in those states unbearable.
According to Vera, criminalising prostitution does not bring the act to an end, but only makes the process more complex for women. For instance, the report by Barton ix observes that prostitutes who practice in the states where prostitutions are illegal suffer a lot in the hands of the law enforcers.
Some come to their joints, not to arrest them because of their crime, but to harass them and demand sexual favours. In this regard, the law does not help to protect the women from molestation from men. On the contrary, it takes away power from women, leaving them vulnerable to sexual abuse from men.
The law enforcers know that these prostitutes have no ability to report them for the molestation because their business is criminalised. This makes them commit such atrocities without a second thought. For this reason, this group believed that the prostitution should be decriminalised in order to hand over power to women.
Prostitutes should be treated just like labourers or physiotherapy and probably allowed operating with a license that would see them pay tax. According to Nestle, there is always an irony when it comes to criminalising acts such as prostitution or use of hard drug. It makes it more attractive to the youth who are rebellious in nature. It also eliminates the ability of the government to levy a tax in that sector.
It becomes a black market. Burns says that black markets are always thriving, because they do not have to operate under the strict laws of the state. This society argued that this is what is making prostitution even more popular and dangerous in the society. It is done without regulation, and some of the main players involved are the very law enforcers who are expected to arrest the prostitutes.
Feminist for Free Expression did not restrict its programs to fighting for the rights of prostitutes. It was also vocal in fighting for the rights of women who decided to act in the pornographic films. Their message was very clear on pornography. To them, pornographic materials may pollute the minds of those who are aged below 18 years.
For this reason, children under the age of 18 years should neither participate in the production of the pornographic materials or be allowed to watch the materials. However, adult women, just like men, should be allowed the freedom to choose on whether they want to participate on the production of the films or not.
During the first forum they held in 1989 when they were still largely seen to be part of Lesbian Sex Mafia, Candida stated that they were strongly opposed to criminal gangs that kidnapped women and young girls and subjected them to prostitution against their wish.x
To them, this constituted a crime that should be prosecuted in a court of law. She also stated that using any form of force, whether financial or psychological, to force women to act in a pornographic film was illegal and they rejected it as a vice that degrades women.
However, she was very categorical that most women in this industry were acting out of their own free will. In fact, some of them even had websites where they sold their pornographic films which they were the main actors. It is wrong to claim that such individuals are forced into the act.
Developing legislation that prohibits pornography would render these women jobless. It is their wish to be in this industry, and they believe that they are making decent earning out of it. It would only be fair to have laws that would protect them as they do what they consider appropriate. The group was also critical of the laws that prohibited consumption of pornographic materials by adults.
Although it did not have direct links with the British Feminists against Censorship society, it shared their views about consumption of such materials. The group became very active in 1990s when it became apparent that it had broken away from Lesbian Sex Mafia.
The Impact of Feminist Sex Wars The feminist sex wars finally came to an end, and just like any other conventional wars, there were losers and winners. It is important to analyse the impacts of this war in order to determine the winners and losers of the war.
Expansion of the pornographic industry Following the feminist sex wars, the pornographic industry has experienced massive expansion over the years. When Andrea Dworkin and Susie Bright were fighting over the position that women should take about pornography, the industry was very small, and the society was very cautious of any pornographic materials. However, this changed in the 20th and 21st centuries.
The more the war between the two factions raged on, the more the society talked about pornography and the more it became acceptable. At first, people viewed the topic as taboo. However, this war provided a forum where people could talk about this issue freely and address some of the myths and misconceptions about pornography.
According to Meika, the United States along produces about 13,000 pornographic films in a year. The society has come to embrace these materials. This researcher also notes that almost 90% of these films have some form of aggression by men towards women.xi
This is part of what the anti-porn feminists were against during the war. Even the pro-porn feminists stated that although they were not opposed to pornography, they disapproved of the violent acts that men in these firms expressed towards women. They championed for a pornography that was free from any form of violence, especially those that are directed towards women.
Increased rates of prostitutions There has been a drastic rise in the cases of prostitution, not only in the United States, but also in other countries around the world. According to Jeffreys, the industry of prostitution has boomed even beyond the pro-porn feminists who were fighting for the rights of prostitutes.
In some countries, the industry is legalised and earns such countries good revenue of form of taxation. The war game prostitutes a voice and they can now come out freely and defend their profession, something that was very rare before the war. They feel that the society has finally accepted their profession.
High number of children below 18 years accessing pornographic materials According to Hewittxii, the number of children aged 14-17 who access pornographic materials has skyrocketed. In fact, this report states that 99% of boys, and 86% of girls within this age bracket have accessed pornographic materials in one way or the other. This is one of the fundamental issues that the anti-porn feminists were determined to eliminate during this war.
Most of minors get these materials from online sources such as YouTube and other pornographic websites. Some of the girls get the materials from adult men, especially those with ill intentions towards them. The pornographic materials have serious negative impact on these minors, especially young boys.
Increased cases of child prostitution One of the concerns for both the pro-porn and anti-porn feminist is that the war has led to increased child prostitution in the society. During this war, both sides stated clearly that they were against child prostitution. Susie Bright once stated that her organisation was strongly opposed to child prostitution and that the best way of addressing the issue is to talk about it.
This was one of the rare principles that both sides of the divide shared. They both believed that a child should be protected from prostitution as one of their fundamental rights. However, the report by Meika indicates that the war did not spare children.
They were constantly subjected to a society that was full of discussion of sex-related issues. Some became involved in sexual activities out of curiosity. They wanted to know more about what was constantly discussed in social forums, along the streets, and in the mass media. This was a war that was lost by both parties.
Introduction of sex tourism Sex tourism was something that was unheard of when the feminist sex wars begun in the 1970s. However, Nestle argues that sex tourism can be directly attributed to the feminist sex wars of the 1980s and 1990s. During the war, the society was made to form a different opinion about sex, pornography, and prostitution. These were three words that were rarely spoken in the society then.
However, the war made society rethink about the topic and each faction came to its own conclusions. For the section that embraced pornography and prostitution, they viewed it as normal for the society to talk about sex. During this time, prostitution gained entry into the field of tourism. Male tourists started gaining more preference towards regions where prostitution was common than those areas that restricted it.
There was a shift from the love of animals to the love of women and men who offered sexual satisfaction to the male and female tourists. This became common in the third world countries that were under the burden of poverty. Tourists from Europe and the United States would flock into these countries not only to enjoy the beauty of nature, but also to get the pleasure offered by the prostitutes, some as young as 12 yearsxiii.
Reasons Why Pro-Porn Feminists Won the War According to Jeffreys, although there are cases when one would consider both factions to have lost in the battle, the truth is that the anti-porn feminist lost this war in totality. It is evident from the above impacts that the pro-porn won the battle only that sometimes their success went beyond or even against their expectations.
One of the main reasons why the pro-porn feminist won the war is that they targeted the younger generation and convinced them that their ideology was meant to protect women and men in equal measure. On the other hand, the anti-porn feminists received massive support from the aging population who were conservative.
As time went by, the older population became irrelevant in this debate, making the ideologies of the anti-porn feminists irrelevant. Another factor is that the pro-porn feminists were secretly backed by men who make the highest percentage of the consumers of pornography. Although this war was largely a feminist battle, men played some role in ensuring that the anti-porn feminists were defeated in this war.
Nestle attributes this success to the fact that the pro-porn were genuine in this war, while a section of the anti-porn feminists were only there to protect their reputation. Some of the anti-porn feminists were consumers of the pornographic materials, but to hide their true identity, they joined the anti-porn feminists. This contributed to their course being defeated.
Conclusion The feminist sex wars of 1970s and 1980s sharply divided women into two factions. The first faction was the anti-porn feminists who were opposed to pornography and prostitution in the society. This group argued that, pornography where women were treated like slaves or sex objects was detrimental to the fight for equity that was gaining pace during this period.
These feminists stated that the way these women were treated in such movies was the same way some men treated in real life scenario. After watching such materials, men would try to implement them on their wives and girlfriends. They also argued that prostitution was a clear demonstration that women were objects meant to offer men sexual gratification.
For these reasons, law should be established to criminalise pornography and prostitution. On the other hand, the pro-porn feminists championed for decriminalisation of pornography and prostitution, arguing that women who were in this field had made their own choices as adults. They argued that the law should only focus on protecting children and women who were forced into the industry against their own free will.
To them, these laws would only limit freedom of women. The women who had considered pornographic industry or prostitution as the best means of earning their income should not be criminalised in any way.
The impact of these wars is that there has been increased pornography and prostitution in the society. It is evident that the pro-porn feminists women the war as many countries around the world became more liberal on the issue of pornography and prostitution.
Bibliography Barton, Bernadette. Stripped: Inside the Lives of Exotic Dancers. New York: New York University Press, 2006.
Burns, Lynda. Feminist alliances. Amsterdam: Rodopi, 2006.
Cossman, Brenda. “Pornography, Feminism, and the Butler Decision.” Bad Attitudes 3, no.2 (1994): 54-135.
Herbert, Walter. Sexual violence and American manhood. Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 2002.
Hewitt, Nancy A. No Permanent Waves: Recasting Histories of U.S. Feminism. New Brunswick, N.J: Rutgers University Press, 2010.
Jeffreys, Sheila. The lesbian heresy: a feminist perspective on the lesbian sexual revolution. Melbourne: Spinifex, 1993.
Juffer, Jane. At Home with Pornography: Women, Sex and Everyday Life. New York: New York Univ. Press, 1998.
Lishinsky, Rose. “On Our Backs Porn.” Off Our Backs 15, no. 3 (1985): 29-121.
Lyndon, Neil. No More Sex War: The Failures of Feminism. London: Sinclair-Stevenson, 1992.
Martindale, Kathleen. Un/popular Culture: Lesbian Writing After the Sex Wars. Albany: State Univ. of New York Press, 1997.
Meika Loe. “Feminism for Sale: Case Study of a Pro-Sex Feminist Business.” Gender and Society 13, no. 6 (1999): 705-732.
Nestle, Joan. The persistent desire: a femme-butch reader. Boston: Alyson Publications, 1992.
Susie, Bright. “Welcome to OnOurBacks: The Best of Lesbian Sex.” On Our Backs 1, no. 4 (1985): 1-75.
Footnotes Kathleen, Martindale, Un/popular Culture: Lesbian Writing After the Sex Wars (Albany: State Univ. of New York Press, 1997), 87.
Sheila, Jeffreys, The lesbian heresy: a feminist perspective on the lesbian sexual revolution (Melbourne: Spinifex, 1993), 35.
Lynda, Burns, Feminist alliances (Amsterdam: Rodopi, 2006), 110.
Joan, Nestle, The persistent desire: a femme-butch reader (Boston: Alyson Publications, 1992), 39.
Walter, Herbert, Sexual violence and American manhood (Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 2002), 48.
Loe, Meika “Feminism for Sale: Case Study of a Pro-Sex Feminist Business” Gender and Society 13, no. 6 (1999): 732.
Jane, Juffer, At Home with Pornography: Women, Sex and Everyday Life (New York: New York Univ. Press 1998), 49.
Rose, Lishinsky “On Our Backs Porn” Off Our Backs 15, no. 3 (1985): 29
Bernadette, Barton, Stripped: Inside the Lives of Exotic Dancers (New York: New York University Press, 2006), 54.
Bright, Susie, “Welcome to OnOurBacks: The Best of Lesbian Sex” On Our Backs 1, no. 4 (1985): 45.
Brenda, Cossman, “Pornography, Feminism, and the Butler Decision” Bad Attitudes 3, no.2 (1994): 78.
Nancy, Hewitt, No Permanent Waves: Recasting Histories of U.S. Feminism, (New Brunswick, N.J: Rutgers University Press, 2010), 121.
Neil, Lyndon, No More Sex War: The Failures of Feminism (London: Sinclair-Stevenson1992), 63.
Project Management – A Reflective Report for STEPS Report a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help
Executive Summary This report provides a comprehensive personal reflection for the plan set for the STEPS project at the UoB. Started in December 2013 and completed on May 1 2014, STEPS is a project that seeks to enhance students’ access to funding for improving their experience in a career.
It focuses on introducing, changing and enhancing various aspects of the student experience that the student community at the University of Bedfordshire (UoB) identifies as ripe for change in the modern times.
The idea is to foster original, inventive and pioneering approaches as well as mainstream ideas for a student funding project. It seeks to address all aspects of student to experience as they move through the university system, beginning with outreach through school transition to the alumnus status.
Students are the partners in the project while the application for the funds is open to individual students, individual alumni, and groups of students and student-staff collaborations. In addition, where possible, the project must be initiated and co-created and co-led by students.
Product scope and product management The benefits of including Project Product Description
Project product description is the initial step in defining the requirement for the beneficiaries of the project funding (the clients). This description is based on the specific needs of the students, alumni and student-staff groups, who are the client of the project. Thus, we need a detailed description of the needs of every individual and groups targeted by StEP.
The decision to initiate and establish the project was based on the realization that students undergo various kinds of stress and problems throughout the course and even after leaving the university, especially prior to obtaining their desired employment.
Therefore, the project product description provides an in-depth analysis and explanation of the funding services (product) that the project will offer to help students make a significant impact on their experience as they move through the university system and after leaving the institution (Clark 2009).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The section communicates the link between the problems faced by students and the possible methods for solving these problems and enhances the experience (Packendorff 2005).
Secondly, a project product description is an important input to the process of iteratively developing the business case.
With a good and informed understanding of the capacity required by the funding project, the project managers and leaders are in a better position to develop a comprehensive definition and understanding of the most suitable output that is expected from the project in the form of services meant to support the student experience (Packendorff 2005).
Thirdly, the project product description for StEPs project is a high level overview of what the project has been set to provide to the students.
Our objective in developing a comprehensive product description for StEPs is based to provide adequate and concise information so that the managing team develops a clear scope and limits. The scope limits define the framework in which the managing team describes a detailed component product description as well as facets during the processes of planning and implementation.
Therefore, we have used a well-defined project product description in the StEPs project to define the scope of the project. It also allows for change during the development and implementation of the project and a new baseline to be set based on the changes. In addition, the StEPs product description defines the quality expectations of the students.
Within this context, it has been noted that students expect to develop knowledge, skills and experience they need to fit into their desired career and fields. It is expected that students obtain these skills through interaction with the education system, which comprises of both the academic knowledge and contact with colleagues, staff and corporate fraternity that works closely with the university (Archibald 2007).
We will write a custom Report on Project Management – A Reflective Report for STEPS specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Fourthly, the project product description for StEPs has been sued to define the acceptance criteria, responsibilities as well as a method for the funding services offered to students and student groups. Within the scope of the project, there are limitations for funding, beyond which the project is not in a position to provide its services.
For instance, funding for mega-projects that aim at developing huge business relationships involving the staff or other parties in partnership with the student cannot be met, despite having a good idea of making an impact on student experience in and out the university.
Finally, the product description for StEPs project has been used to state what is important in the least amount of space and time needed so that we can clarify the requirements for a good understanding of the services the project is offering.
The benefits of including a Product Breakdown Structure in StEPs
Our StEPs project has a comprehensive product breakdown structure (PBS) based on the model described by PRINCE2 (Kerzner 2003). It is a hierarchical structure that seeks to break down the final product in its basic and specific constituent sub-products.
It helps the managing and planning team to think the products needed to build the final project product. It also helps the planning team to clarify all the required work in the creation of the final set of services and products (Lewis 2000).
Within the StEPs project, PBS has been used as an iterative component that works in conjunction with the process of developing the product description, user scenarios, product flow chart and acceptance tests.
PBS helps us to visualize the StEPs product and its components, which helps us to improve the communication as well as reduce misunderstandings when developing and managing the project. In addition, it helps us break down the product into its sub-components in order to allow us to identify components that have value as early as possible during the development process (Packendorff 2005).
In turn, this gives us the capacity to determine and define the components that can be developed in the later stages of the project development cycle. In addition, the PBS works in conjunction with the product flow diagram in identifying the order component products that should be built (Archibald 2007).
Not sure if you can write a paper on Project Management – A Reflective Report for STEPS by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The benefits of including Product Descriptions in StEPs
We have used a product description as part of the product-based planning for the StEPs project in order to establish the criteria for client acceptance, which will help us in identifying the student groups or individuals that meet the required conditions for funding. In addition, product descriptions act as checklists for the deliverables of our project at StEPs.
Reflection on the Business case
The business process for our project StEPs is primarily Web-based. We have developed a comprehensive, effective and user-friendly website for StEPs project through which the project management and planning team will communicate and relate with the student clients. The web-based business has a number of benefits for the entire project since it was initiated in December 2013.
First, a web-based business allows the StEPs project to run throughout the day, week, month and year because it provides us with a global access, where the clients have the freedom to visit the website and interact with the project using their user-end (Snyder
Job Description Report (Assessment) college admission essay help
Introduction Formulation of a job description requires a proper job analysis. This entails identification of the tasks to be performed by employees (Clark 2013, pp. 5-7). It also involves classification of the skills required to perform a given task (Clark 2013, pp. 5-7). This paper examines two job descriptions and the skills required in each of them.
Purchasing Agent Job Description Job Duties
The purchasing agent will be required to perform the following functions. First, he or she will be required to procure equipment and office furniture. The agent will ensure that the company’s procurement rules are followed systematically during the procurement process (Edwards 2013, pp. 23-25). Second, the agent will be required to negotiate for better prices during the purchase of various goods and services.
Third, the agent will advise the management on the challenges that can affect procurement activities (Edwards 2013, p. 25). Thus, he or she will be required to prepare daily procurement reports.
Fourth, the agent will be expected to sort and file documents. Finally, the purchasing agent will investigate and solve problems associated with the procurement process. This will entail collecting and analyzing information about market trends (Edwards 2013, p. 30).
Experience and Skills Required
An applicant for this position must have at least five years experience in procurement or supply chain management. Therefore, the agent must have a comprehensive understanding of procurement policies and procedures (Edwards 2013, p. 26). He or she must have basic computer and accounting skills.
The applicant should be able to prioritize tasks, work in a busy environment, and meet set deadlines. The agent must also have excellent documentation, communication, and negotiation skills. Finally, the agent will be required to adhere to the highest level of professionalism (Edwards 2013, p. 26).
The position requires a person with a university degree in supply chain management or procurement. However, individuals with a diploma qualification will be considered if they have at least seven years experience.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More General Manager Job Description Job Duties
The general manager will be required to perform the following duties. First, the manager will provide leadership and forecast the company’s performance goals (Sloma 2012, p. 14). Therefore, he or she will be required to develop a new strategic plan to facilitate growth and maximize profits. Second, the general manager will be required to evaluate the performance of the company periodically (Sloma 2012, p. 14).
Third, the general manager will recommend measures to improve the performance of the company (Sloma 2012, p. 15). In this case, he or she will be expected to inform the board of directors about the performance of the company. Fourth, he or she will be responsible for building the image of the company (Sloma 2012, p. 17). Finally, the general manager will be required to attend management-training workshops regularly.
Experience and Skills Required
An applicant for this position must have the following skills and experience. He or she must have served in a senior management position for at least four years. The candidate must have superior skills in strategic planning and management (Sloma 2012, p. 15).
He or she must have good communication and coordination skills. The candidate must also possess proficient computer skills (Sloma 2012, p. 16). In addition, the applicant should be able to improve the company’s performance.
An applicant for this position must have a postgraduate degree in business administration or any social science. The company will also consider applicants who are currently pursuing postgraduate studies and have four years experience in management.
Personal Skills Match for the General Manager Position
My skills and academic credentials are relevant to the aforementioned job description. For instance, between 2009 and 2013, I served as a general manager in an oil company in my hometown. Therefore, I have four years experience in management. I prepared and reviewed the company’s short-term and medium-term plans. Thus, I possess good planning skills that will enable me to develop a strategic plan.
Additionally, I was in charge of organizing in-service training programs for employees. The training programs were meant to equip employees with new skills and to sensitize them on the emerging issues in the oil industry.
We will write a custom Assessment on Job Description specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Through regular training programs, I managed to improve the performance of many employees. This led to an overall improvement in the performance of the company. Currently, I am pursuing a postgraduate degree in strategic management.
Justification for Selecting the General Manager Position I have selected this position because of the following reasons. First, I have relevant academic qualification. For example, the position requires a person who is currently enrolled in a postgraduate degree program. Second, I have good mentoring skills in business administration. Moreover, I have enough experience in management.
Conclusion The discussion in the foregoing paragraphs has revealed that a job description is very important. It enables a company to recruit qualified employees by developing clear job requirements. Thus, companies should always develop job descriptions for their employees to improve their performance.
References Clark, M 2013, The Job Description Handbook, Bang Printing, New York.
Edwards, M 2013, Recruiting and Hiring Advice, Eagle Publishers, London.
Sloma, R 2012, No-Nonsense Management, A General Manager’s Primer, Beard Publishers, London.
Organic Agriculture – Business Model Canvas Research Paper cheap essay help: cheap essay help
Key Partners The key partners of the company include retailers (supermarkets), suppliers of farm inputs, and consultants. The reasons for collaborating with retailers include the following. First, it will enable the company to achieve economies of scale in distribution. Established retailers such as supermarkets have branches in all parts of the country, which will enable the company to reach a large number of customers at a low cost.
Second, the partnership will enable the company to acquire the customers of its partners.1 For instance, customers who purchase consumer goods in supermarkets are also likely to buy organic foodstuffs during their routine shopping activities. This will facilitate quick market penetration.
Finally, the partnership will reduce the risk of overtrading.2 Since the company has limited funds, it will lack adequate working capital if it invests in establishing its own retail outlets in the first two years. This risk will be prevented by collaborating with independent distributors (retailers).
Collaborating with consultants who have expertise and experience in organic agriculture will help in eliminating uncertainties when making production decisions. The consultants will assist the farm manager to select the best farming methods in order to achieve the desired production level and product quality.
Developing long-term partnerships with suppliers will enable the company to benefit from reliable access to farm inputs. This will help in preventing interruption of the production calendar, which may occur due to limited availability of key inputs such as seeds.
Key Suppliers The main suppliers of the business will include landowners, manufacturers of farm inputs, and the Municipality of Abu Dhabi. The business will have to establish long-term relationships with landowners in order to access adequate land for its farming activities.
The Municipality of Abu Dhabi will be the main supplier of water for irrigation. The municipality is a key supplier because access to water will determine the farm’s output level. The municipality has a high bargaining power since there are no substitute sources of water for farming in Abu Dhabi.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In this regard, the company will focus on water conservation in order to avoid shortages. It will also endeavor to pay its water bills in time in order to avoid disconnections.
The products of suppliers of farm inputs will determine the quality of the organic foodstuffs that will be produced by the company. Therefore, farm inputs will be purchased from suppliers who differentiate their products by using organic raw materials to manufacture key supplies such as pesticides and fertilizers. This strategy will enable the company to use the right farm inputs in order to obtain the best results.3
Key Resources from Partners The most important resources that will be obtained from partners include production/ farming technology, land, farm inputs, and distribution services.
Effective farming technology is a major determinant of success in organic farming, especially, in Abu Dhabi where natural resources such as land and water are scarce. Thus, the company will collaborate with consultants and independent research institutions to acquire the best organic farming technologies.
The company will only be able to achieve its production objectives if it can access fertile land in Abu Dhabi. However, access to land is likely to be a challenge in future due to the expected increase in urbanization and industrialization.
As the demand for land increase, the cost of leasing or purchasing it will rise significantly. Thus, the company will focus on purchasing land in the medium term to avoid the expected increase in lease fee in the long-term.
Key Activities Performed by Partners Consultants will provide technical advice to the company concerning the farming methods that it should adopt to achieve its business objectives. This will include provision of services such as testing soil and water quality.
We will write a custom Research Paper on Organic Agriculture – Business Model Canvas specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The consultants will also lead the company’s research and development projects. They will conduct periodic research activities on behalf of the company to facilitate innovation. The outcome of the research activities will be used to improve the company’s farming activities.
The key responsibility of retailers will be to distribute the company’s organic foodstuffs. This will involve selling the products directly to customers.
They will also collaborate with the company’s sales team to conduct marketing activities such as merchandising. The retailers will collect valuable feedback from customers through their sales and marketing systems. The feedback will enable the company to understand customers’ tastes and preferences.
Suppliers will provide the materials and equipment that will be needed to produce organic foodstuffs. These include seeds, fertilizers, pesticides, greenhouses, and irrigation equipment. The suppliers will be responsible for installing and maintaining key resources such as greenhouses and irrigation equipment to avoid failure.
Figure 1 and 2 show the type of greenhouse and drip irrigation equipment that will be used for farming. The company will also collaborate with certain suppliers to produce differentiated farm inputs. For instance, it will collaborate with producers of seeds to develop seedlings that suit its quality standards and farming needs.
Figure 1: Greenhouse
Figure 2: Irrigation equipment
Key Activities Value Proposition
The company’s value proposition is to produce and sell high quality organic foodstuffs in Abu Dhabi and other parts of the UAE. Delivering this value proposition requires the following activities. To begin with, the company will be directly involved in organic farming.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Organic Agriculture – Business Model Canvas by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This will involve producing a variety of organic fruits and vegetables. In the long-term (the next ten years), the company will diversify its brand portfolio by processing and distributing fresh fruit juice.
Sourcing and procurement of various supplies will be required to create the value proposition. The company will source the best seeds in order to produce organic foodstuffs with high nutritional value. Once the company begins to process fresh fruit juices, it will collaborate with other producers of organic foodstuffs to obtain adequate supply of fruits. This will help in scaling up production to cater for increased demand for fruit juices.
The company will also establish training and capacity building programs to improve its employees’ ability to focus on best practices in organic farming. The training programs will target the farm workers.
Specifically, on-the-job training and off-the-job training programs will be provided to workers to improve their skills and knowledge in organic farming.4 In the long-term, the company will extend the training programs to its employees who will be involved in manufacturing fresh juices. In this case, the objective of the training programs will be to promote product and process innovation.
Supermarkets will be the main distribution channel through which the company’s products will be sold in the short-term. In the medium term, the company will establish its own retail outlets to supplement the sales from supermarkets. Distributing the products through these channels will require the following activities.
The first activity will be to build a network of retailers to distribute the products. The company will use selective distribution to reach its target customers. Selective distribution involves using several but not all outlets that are available in a given geographical area to reach customers.5
In this regard, the company will collaborate with retailers who are known for quality, affordability, and reliability to maintain a consistent brand image.
The main advantage of using selective distribution is that it will enable the company to select the best performing retailers, thereby avoiding the risk of wasting scarce resources in developing non-performing distributors. Selective distribution is also appropriate because consumers of organic foodstuffs often shop around to find the best products from reliable retailers.
Supply chain management is the second activity that will be required to distribute the products. The supply chain activities that will be performed are summarized in figure 3.
Figure 3: Supply chain activities
The first supply chain activity will be to procure the best farm inputs from reputable suppliers. The next step will involve using the farm inputs to produce various organic fruits and vegetables. After harvesting, the fruits and vegetables will be transported to the company’s warehouse where they will be cleaned and packaged according to retailers’ requirements.
From the warehouse, the company will transport the products directly to retail outlets where they will be sold to customers. The company will focus on reducing the time required to transport the fruits and vegetables from the farm to the retailers to preserve their freshness and natural tastes.
The company will maintain long-term relationships with members of the supply chain to ensure effective production and distribution of its products.6 Coordination of the supply chain activities will be done by the company using business-to-business e-commerce platforms. This will help in reducing the cost of managing the supply chain.
The company will use the social media to build relationships with customers (consumers of organic food). Specifically, it will use Facebook, Google , and Twitter to engage the customers in conversations about its products.
The aim of the conversations will be to provide vital information to customers such as the stores where the products will be sold and the health benefits of consuming them. The company will also participate in events such as agricultural trade fairs and seminars to build strong relationships with consumers of organic foodstuffs.
The company’s main source of revenue will be production and distribution of organic fruits and vegetables. The main activity that will be required in this revenue stream will be obtaining as many sales orders as possible from retailers. In order to secure large orders, the company will negotiate for adequate floor space in the retail outlets to boost sales.
The company will also use its marketing communication mix to promote sales through the retail channel. Specifically, it will use advertising, merchandising, and loyalty programs to motivate potential customers to purchase its products.
As sales increase in the retail outlets, the company will receive large orders. This will improve the chances of achieving the revenue and profitability targets that have been set for the short and medium term.
Key Resources Value Proposition
The key resources that are required to deliver the company’s value proposition include the following. First, adequate human resources will be required. Specifically, the company will require cheap and reliable supply of labor to produce organic foodstuffs. The farm workers will require adequate skills and knowledge on various farming activities such as planting and controlling pests in order to create value to the company.
Generally, access to cheap labor will reduce the cost of production. The resulting cost savings will be used to support innovation initiatives to improve product quality. In addition, the savings will enable the company to sell its products at a competitive price in order to overcome competition.
Second, financial resources will be required to deliver the desired value proposition. Organic agriculture is capital intensive because it is based on advanced farming technologies.7 For instance, the company will require adequate funds to install and run an effective irrigation system.
It will also have to purchase and use greenhouses to protect the crops from adverse weather conditions such as very high temperatures and strong wind. Moreover, the company will have to finance research activities in order to produce crops whose qualities meet the expectations of consumers. In this regard, the company will raise capital from different sources to meet its cash requirements.
In the short and medium-term, the company will depend on the capital contributed by its owners and retained earnings to finance its activities. It will also obtain credit from local commercial banks to supplement its internal sources of funds. In the long-term, the company will raise venture capital to finance expansion activities such as extending its product line and joining new markets.
Third, the company will require intellectual capital to deliver its value proposition. Intellectual capital refers to the information and knowledge resources that can be employed to improve profits, acquire new clients, develop new products, and reduce operating costs. The knowledge and information that will be required to produce and market the company’s products will be obtained from internal and external sources.
The company’s employees will be the main internal source of information and knowledge. The employees’ expertise in organic farming will be leveraged through staff development and training programs.
Consultants and independent research partners will be the main external sources of information and knowledge. They will use their expertise and experience to advise the company on the best farming practices that it has to adopt to deliver its value proposition.
The main resources that will be required to distribute the products include employees with the right skill set in sales and marketing, as well as, physical assets such as delivery trucks and sales premises. Talented employees will be required to assist customers at the retail outlets to boost sales.
In addition, the marketing team will require adequate knowledge of the market in order to develop the right marketing strategies. Although the company will hire employees with expertise in sales and marketing, it will also focus on developing talent internally to improve the effectiveness of its distribution system.
Market intelligence is the main resource that will be required to develop relationships with consumers of organic foodstuffs. The company will also need an effective customer relationship management (CRM) system to develop strong relationships with the retailers. Market intelligence refers to external data or information that shed light on market dynamics such as changes in customers’ tastes and preferences.8
Market intelligence will be obtained through marketing research, which will be conducted biannually. The results of the marketing research will help in building relationships with consumers by providing information that will facilitate product development. The company will use an online CRM system to improve its relationship with retailers.
The system will capture vital information such as the types of products that the retailers prefer to stock, payment history, and the size of orders made by various retailers. This information will help in understanding the needs of the retailers. As a result, the company will be able to address the retailers’ needs in time in order to improve its relationship with them.
The company’s value proposition will focus on three areas namely, risk reduction, affordability, and cost reduction. The company will help consumers to reduce the negative health effects of eating processed foods, inorganic vegetables, and genetically modified foodstuffs. Empirical studies indicate that these foodstuffs cause diseases such as cancer, obesity, and diabetes.
In the UAE, the prevalence of lifestyle diseases such as obesity and diabetes is very high. The diseases account for nearly 20% of the deaths in the country every year.9 Scientists have proved that organic foodstuffs help in preventing diseases such as cancer, obesity, and diabetes.
It is against this backdrop that the company will focus on producing organic foodstuffs with high nutritional value to enable the residents of the UAE to maintain healthy lifestyles. Figure 4 shows the organic vegetables (tomatoes) that will be produced.
Figure 4: Organic tomatoes
The company will also help consumers to eliminate the risk of eating substandard or contaminated foods. In order to achieve this objective, the company will endeavor to meet all the quality standards that have been set by Abu Dhabi Food Control Authority. It will also strive to meet international quality standards that are used in the global food industry.
These include Global G.A.P certification, organic product certification, and ISO certification.10 Achieving these certifications means that the company will have to comply with high food quality standards. As a result, it will supply safe foodstuffs that consumers can trust.
Affordability is one of the major factors that determine access to organic foodstuffs in the UAE. Organic foodstuffs are often expensive in the country due to high importation and production costs.
The company will create value to customers by adopting low cost production technologies to reduce the prices of organic food in the UAE. In addition, the company will eliminate importation costs by producing organic food within the country. The resulting reduction in retail prices will enable many customers to afford organic foods.
The company will also create value to retailers by reducing the costs that they would incur to source high quality organic foodstuffs. The cost of producing and delivering the products at the retailers’ premises will be borne by the company.
Moreover, the retailers will not incur additional monthly costs since they will be using their existing employees and floor space to sell the products. The cost savings coupled with increased revenue will improve the retailers’ profits.
The company’s main objective will be to address consumers’ health needs. Apart from addressing this need through production of organic foods, the company will integrate the ‘healthy living’ campaign in its marketing programs. One of the factors that explain the low consumption rate of organic foodstuffs is lack of adequate information concerning their health benefits.11
The company will bridge the knowledge gap by using public relation initiatives such as press release to educate the residents of the UAE on the importance of eating organic foods.
The company will also collaborate with non-governmental organizations (NGOs) that promote healthy living to provide public education on the health benefits of organic foods. As the public becomes more informed, the consumption of organic food will increase. This will reduce the prevalence of lifestyle diseases while improving the company’s revenues.
The company targets three market segments. These include the working class, the affluent, and individuals who are already suffering from chronic lifestyle illnesses. The working class and individuals who are suffering from lifestyle diseases have similar needs. In particular, people who are working are interested in preventing the diseases that they are likely to acquire due to their sedentary lifestyles.
Similarly, those who have already acquired lifestyle diseases are interested in healthy living to prolong their lifespan.12 In this regard, the company will serve the two market segments by supplying organic fruits and vegetables with high nutritional value. The same products will be supplied in the affluent market segment where consumption of high quality organic foods is the norm.
However, the affluent will benefit from additional services such as ability to make large purchases directly from the farm. In this case, the products will be delivered directly to the consumer’s premise. These personalized services will enable the company to charge premium prices in the affluent market segment to improve its profits.
The company will satisfy the following needs in the market. In the consumer market, the company will address the customers’ need for newness and accessibility. The residents of the UAE need to break away from the tradition of eating imported inorganic foods that are often contaminated and have low nutritional value.
The company will enable consumers to access fresh in-season fruits and vegetables to meet their dietary needs. In the affluent market segment, supplying high quality fruits and vegetables will enable customers to express their social status. Specifically, the high product quality will create an aura of luxury, which the affluent need to maintain their social status.13
Customers who are working have little time to spend on shopping for their groceries. Thus, they need to purchase their groceries in convenient places to save time. The company will address this need by collaborating with retailers whose outlets are located in strategic places within the central business districts of urban areas. This will help customers to access the products easily.
The company will also use retailers’ online sales platforms to sell its products. Online shopping solutions will enable busy customers to purchase the organic fruits and vegetables without visiting physical stores.
The retailers’ main need is to access reliable supply of high quality organic foods. In order to address this need, the company will employ big data analytics to study consumers’ purchasing behavior. This strategy will enable the company to predict the types and quality of products that customers are likely to purchase in specific geographical areas.
A clear understanding of purchasing patterns will help in ensuring effective capacity planning. As a result, the company will be able to supply adequate products to satisfy retailers’ sales needs. Generally, a reliable supply will enable retailers to retain their customers and to improve their revenues.
Customer Relationships Expected Relationships
Consumers of organic foods expect personal assistance within the retail stores. Customers often need adequate product information before making a purchase decision. For instance, new customers would want to access information on issues such as the products’ origin, their quality, and their prices. Customers normally expect to find this information from sales personnel within the supermarkets.
In addition, customers need assistance with purchasing activities such as weighing the fruits and vegetables or selecting the right products. Old customers and expats who are not able to understand Arabic are likely to seek assistance from sales personnel who can speak in English.
By contrast, young and well-informed customers expect self-service in supermarkets. They expect the retailer to display a wide variety of products on the shelves so that they can make appropriate choices.
Retailers, on the other hand, expect automated services. They expect to maintain their relationship with the company using e-commerce business-to-business platforms. This will enable them to access automatic services such as placing orders, making inquiries about product availability, and making their payments.
Retailers prefer e-commerce systems because they reduce operating cost and improve communication among trading partners. Retailers also expect to maintain a close relationship with a dedicated personal assistance. They expect the company to assign one contact person who will be responsible for handling their inquiries and managing their accounts.
The company has made provisions for both self-service and personal assistance to improve its relationship with the consumers. The sales area will have at least two sales associates to assist the customers with the purchase process. The associates will provide all the information that customers need to make purchase decisions. They will also assist with activities such as product selection.
The company will also collaborate with the retailers to design the sales floor in a manner that promotes self-service. This will include creating enough space between shelves to facilitate movement.
The company’s merchandisers will ensure that the products are displayed in an attractive manner and vital information such as prices and product descriptions are clearly indicated as shown in figure 5. These initiatives will enable customers to shop without seeking assistance.
Figure 5: Sales floor
Since the company will be using online supply chain management (SCM) and CRM systems, the retailers will be able to access automatic services. The online SCM system will handle activities such as placing orders, sharing transaction information, and making payments.
The online CRM system, on the other hand, will be used to handle retailers’ inquiries by providing the information that they need to sell the products. A dedicated accounts manager will be hired to maintain strong relationships with the retailers. The accounts manager will address the needs of the retailers such as ensuring timely processing of orders and delivery of products.
Cost of the Relationships
Automatic and self-service will require high initial capital to build the infrastructure. For instance, the company will have to hire an IT company to create and install an effective e-commerce system.
Similarly, redesigning the sales floor to facilitate self-service might require a substantial amount of money. However, providing automatic and self-service will be cheap in the long-run since the company will not incur additional costs to deliver them.14
Maintaining relationships with customers through dedicated personnel is likely to be expensive in the short-run when sales are expected to be low. For instance, the company will have to pay the accounts manager on a monthly basis. However, the expected increase in sales in the medium term and long-term will justify the cost of providing personalized services to consumers and retailers.
Customers expect to be reached through a variety of media platforms that are easy to access. In addition, they expect the company to distribute its products through distribution channels that are easy to access. Thus, the company will reach the customers in the following ways. To begin with, it will create awareness about its products through advertising. The adverts will be aired on popular TV and radio channels.
Moreover, the adverts will be posted on popular magazines and newspapers to reach as many customers as possible. Given the high penetration rate of smartphones and computers in the UAE, the company will also use the social media to create awareness about its products.
The company will assist customers to evaluate its value proposition by requesting them to fill out feedback forms that will be available at the retail outlets.
Customer complaints forms and suggestion boxes will also be available at the retail outlets to enable customers to convey their concerns to the company. Customers will also have the opportunity to raise their concerns about the products through online communication channels such as email.
Consumers will have the opportunity to purchase the products through three channels. These include select supermarkets, the company’s retail outlets, and retailers’ online stores. The main objective of using the three channels is to increase brand visibility.
Specifically, it will enable as many customers as possible to access the products. For instance, large supermarkets can reach customers in nearly all parts of the country. Direct deliveries will be made to customers who will make online purchases.
The distribution channels will be integrated both vertically and horizontally. Vertical integration will be achieved after the company establishes its own retail outlets to sell its products directly to the customers. Horizontal integration will be achieved through cooperation with independent retailers to sell to customers.
The main advantage of vertical integration is that it will enable the company to have more control over its products. It will enable the company’s sales executives to use their vast product knowledge to provide excellent customer service.
Vertical integration will also enable the company to eliminate the costs associated with using third party distribution channels. For example, the company will not have to share its revenue with the retailers if it has its own distribution system. As a result, the company will make high profits.
Horizontal integration, on the other hand, will enable the company to save the cost of establishing a nationwide distribution system. This will prevent liquid constraints that the company might face in the short-run.
Customer Segments Selected Segments
The company will focus on creating value for the mass market, which has a huge sales potential due to its large size. Undoubtedly, every person in the UAE is interested in high quality foodstuffs. This means that revenues can be maximized by targeting all customers who are able to afford organic fruits and vegetables.
The mass market consists of the individuals who will be purchasing the company’s products for personal consumption. The working class and people who are interested in healthy living will be considered as part of the mass market.
The company will also serve the niche market to improve its profitability. The niche market consists of the affluent, as well as, fine restaurants and hotels. In the last decade, hotels and restaurants in the UAE have embarked on serving organic foods to demonstrate their commitment to sustainability by promoting organic agriculture.
The hotel and restaurant market segment is expected to grow in future as economic performance of the country improves. The company intends to take advantage of this growth by producing organic fruits and vegetables for the hotel and restaurant industry.
Most Important Segment
The mass market will be the most important segment, which the company expects to be its main source of revenue. This perspective is based on the fact that household expenditure on groceries tend to be stable throughout the year.
Households are not likely to reduce their expenditure on food unless the economy suffers a shock that has negative effects on consumption in the private sector.15 In this regard, the company expects a steady growth in sales in the mass market.
The niche market, on the other hand, is characterized by fluctuations in demand. Sales are high during the summer and holiday seasons when individuals and families prefer to eat in restaurants and hotels rather than their homes. Sales are also high during events such as the Dubai Shopping Festival and trade fairs that attract visitors from other countries.
However, sales decline significantly during the winter when families prefer to remain indoors. Nonetheless, hotels and restaurants are important customers because of their ability to make large purchases. They are also willing to pay premium prices to access high quality organic fruits and vegetables.
Customers in the food industry are willing to pay for freshness, high nutritional value, and high hygiene standards. Currently, customers are only paying for convenience due to the limited supply of organic foods that meet their expectations. Specifically, customers are forced to purchase the foodstuffs that are available in the market irrespective of their quality standards due to lack of substitutes.
Since customers are willing to pay for high quality, the company will focus on selling organic fruits and vegetables as its main revenue stream. Nearly, 90% of the company’s revenue will be attributed to product sales due to limited investment in alternative businesses.
The company has strategically chosen to focus on product sales since producing organic fruits and vegetables is its core competence. The company will focus on serving markets in different geographical areas in order to avoid the losses that it would make by serving only one market.
Product sales will be based on dynamic pricing. This pricing strategy involves setting prices according to market conditions. For instance, during high demand seasons the company will increase its prices to ration the limited supply of its products.
However, it will reduce the prices during the low demand seasons to attract and retain customers. Dynamic pricing will enable the company to achieve its marketing objectives. For instance, price reductions will facilitate expansion of the market share.
Apart from product sales, the company will generate revenues through asset sale and leasing. Idle assets will be sold so that the company can use the proceeds to finance key business processes such as product development and marketing. The assets will be sold through negotiations to enable the company to obtain the best deal.
The company will also lease farm equipment and land when they are not in use. The lease fee will improve the company’s returns on assets. Fixed pricing will be used to lease the assets. In particular, the lessee will pay a predetermined price that will not be changed during the lease period.
The business model will be cost driven because organic farming is associated with significant fixed and variable costs. The fixed costs will include the salaries of farm workers, consultancy fee, warehousing, and lease fee.
The company has to achieve economies of scale in production in order to reduce the negative impact of the fixed costs on its profits. The variable costs include expenditure on farm inputs, water for irrigation, electricity, marketing, and transportation.
The most important fixed costs include lease fee, constancy fee, and salaries. The company has to pay lease fee in order to access adequate land for farming and premises to sell its products. Similarly, it has to pay the workers to perform various farming activities such as planting and nurturing the crops.
Consultancy fee is also important since the company will require external expertise to improve its productivity. Nearly all variable costs are important. The company has to purchase farm inputs and spend on marketing and transportation in order to deliver its value proposition.
Land is the most expensive key resource. The company will spend at least AED 250,000 annually to lease five acres of land in Abu Dhabi. The high lease fee is attributed to the ever-increasing demand for land in the country. Greenhouses are also very expensive. At least AED 78,516 will be required to purchase three greenhouses in the first year.
However, expenditure on greenhouses is expected to reduce in the medium-term. This expectation is based on the fact that new greenhouses can be used effectively for up to four years.16 Increased competition among suppliers is likely to reduce the cost of greenhouses in future. Farm inputs are also key resources that are very expensive.
The annual expenditure on farm inputs is expected to average AED 45,000. Inadequate food supply in the global market will increase the prices of farm inputs as farmers focus on increasing their productivity.
Irrigating the farmland will be the most expensive activity. At least AED 65,000 will be spent annually on irrigation. The high cost is attributed to the water shortage in Abu Dhabi. The Municipality of Abu Dhabi charges high prices to discourage wastage of water.
Marketing is another expensive activity that the company will have to invest in to reach its customers. Marketing cost is expected to average AED 32,000 in the first three years. The expected improvement in economic growth will boost business activities, thereby increasing demand for advertising services. This will increase the cost of advertising in the medium-term.
In sum, the high fixed and operating costs call for implementation of effective cost reduction measures. Some of the measures that the company will implement to reduce costs include recycling wastewater and using cheap digital marketing platforms such as the social media.
Bulk purchases will enable the company to reduce the cost of acquiring farm inputs. In addition, optimizing the production capacity will help in achieving economies of scale, which in turn will reduce the overall cost of production.
Bibliography Al-Awadhi K
Study of Asthma Essay college essay help near me
Table of Contents Introduction
Ecological Causes of Asthma
Control of Environmental Asthma in the US
Recommendations to Reduce Asthma Globally
Introduction Asthma is one of the endemic diseases in the US and developing countries. Although asthma affects individuals of all ages, infants and teenagers are more susceptible to it than adults. Asthma is a respiratory disorder that causes inflammation of the respiratory system.
Some of its common symptoms include breathing difficulties, chronic coughs, and chest pains. Asthma is one of the major factors that hinder children from attending school regularly. It also causes sleeping difficulties in children. This essay discusses the measures that can be taken to mitigate environmental causes of asthma.
Ecological Causes of Asthma There are many factors that cause asthmatic conditions. However, environmental degradation is the primary cause of asthma in children. Generally, children inhale more air, consume more food, and imbibe more fluid than adults.
They also have a weak respiratory system and immunity compared to adults. Children can be exposed to several ecological hazards at home and school. Thus, they are more vulnerable to environmental causes of asthma than adults are.
Children exposed to the following environmental hazards can develop asthmatic conditions. There is a considerable proof that environmental hazards such as viruses and allergens can cause asthma.
“Indoor airborne allergens are often produced by house dust mines, cockroaches, and animal fur”. Smoking of cigarettes in poorly ventilated houses can cause asthma. Furthermore, outdoor air toxins such as ozone, allergens, and smouldering firewood can cause asthmatic conditions.
Control of Environmental Asthma in the US In the US, the government has developed a comprehensive strategy to mitigate environmental causes of asthmatic conditions in children. This strategy encompasses various interventions aimed at ensuring that children are safe from environmental hazards that cause asthma.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The government has been funding research activities aimed at finding out the major causes of asthma. Through research activities, the government has developed comprehensive measures to mitigate environmental hazards. For instance, public institutions, social amenities, and residential properties must be properly constructed and maintained to reduce environmental hazards such as air pollution and allergens.
Smoking in public is prohibited by the government to prevent unnecessary air pollution. Moreover, public health officials in the US have introduced community health based programmes aimed at creating awareness on the ecological causes of asthma.
This project involves educating local communities on the importance of sanitation in residential areas. For instance, parents have been advised to ensure that their children play in environmentally safe places. In addition, parents have been advised not to smoke indoors.
Recommendations to Reduce Asthma Globally Current research findings in the US indicate that prevalence of asthma has reduced significantly due to proper implementation of community based asthma eradication programs. Consequently, other countries should develop clear-cut strategies to mitigate prevalence of asthma.
Environmental degradation can be mitigated through enactment and implementation of stringent laws. For instance, smoking should not be allowed in public because it leads to air pollution. Moreover, community based programs should be introduced to create awareness on causes of asthma.
Such campaigns can mitigate the prevalence of asthma in the world. Nonetheless, asthma eradication projects may require many resources. This challenge can be overcome through fund raising initiatives.
Conclusion This essay has revealed that asthma is a serious health challenge in many countries due to environmental degradation. Nonetheless, prevalence of asthma can be mitigated through reduction of environmental pollution.
We will write a custom Essay on Study of Asthma specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More References American Lung Association. (2003). Trends in asthma morbidity and mortality. New York: Sage.
Institute of Medicine. (2000). Clearing the air: Asthma and indoor air exposures. New York: National Academy Press.
Oatman, L. (2007). Reducing environmental triggers of asthma in homes of minnesota children. Minnesota: Minnesota Department of Health.
The Software Engineering Debate Compare and Contrast Essay argumentative essay help
Table of Contents Summary of First Paper
Summary of Second Paper
Comparing and Contrasting the Two Papers
Software Engineering is a relatively new discipline in comparison to the traditional engineering disciplines. It is therefore not surprising that there is a debate regarding whether this new discipline is indeed an engineering discipline. This paper examines the views of two authors who hold opposing views on the status of software engineering.
Summary of First Paper In the paper titled “Software Engineering: What is the problem”, Loka asserts that software engineering is neither an engineering discipline, nor a scientific undertaking (110).
He is of the view that software development is an art similar to teaching or writing. In this sense, software development involves issuing instructions to computers just like a teachers issues instructions to students. This makes it similar to teaching and not engineering.
The second reason the author adduces to his view that software development is not an engineering activity is the lack of standardized approaches to software development. In the traditional engineering disciplines, engineers use standard processes to develop engineering solutions.
In this regard, any engineer can take over a project carried out by another engineer and deliver the same results. In software development, developers use individualized approaches and deliver results through different methods.
The article proceeds to examine several incidental issues affecting the deployment of software in organizations. The author writes that many organizations end up with software solutions that do not solve their problems because of poor problem identification by software developers.
In traditional engineering disciplines, problem identification is an integral part of the engineering design process. Engineers rarely make products that do not address specific needs.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Finally, different software developers tend to use different approaches to solve software problems because each developer has individual strengths and weaknesses. This leads to incremental solutions that give rise to a product that no single person understands. Organizations must retain many software developers to maintain the software. Organizations that find themselves in this situation end up spending more money maintenance.
Summary of Second Paper The second paper addresses the place of software engineering in relation to the traditional engineering disciplines. The paper is a self-assessment of the software engineering field. The paper relays the identity crisis that software engineers face when it comes to raising the distinction between software engineering and programming.
The paper also discusses the debate in the mid eighties regarding the identity of software engineers at the time. Software engineers often asked whether they were scientists, mathematicians, or engineers. The consensus developed at the time was that they fitted in the three categories. Software engineers use mathematical models to solve problems.
The writers felt strongly that software engineering is an engineering discipline. In their view, software engineers use disciplined approaches to solve software problems. These models are very close to the models used by traditional engineering disciplines. However, the approaches somewhat differ because of the unique aspects of software projects in comparison to conventional engineering projects.
In the second part of the article, the authors were critical of several practices among software engineers. First, the authors stated that the failure rate of software projects is very high. They stated that a third of all software development projects fail and a third do not address the main problems.
The rest of the projects are successful though they are usually above budget and out of time. The second criticism is that software engineers do not adapt fast enough to change. This leads to the release of obsolete software.
The authors recommended several changes in various aspects of software engineering. They recommended that software engineers need more training on how to work in engineering teams that handle software design separately from software development. In conclusion, the authors urged software engineers to learn more from the traditional engineering disciplines in order to deliver better results.
We will write a custom Essay on The Software Engineering Debate specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Comparing and Contrasting the Two Papers The two papers have two main similarities. First, the two papers agree that software engineers do not use disciplined approaches in their work, as compared to other engineers. This affects the quality of their work and leads to higher product failure rates. Secondly, the two papers agree that the discipline of software development is still in its formative stages.
In this sense, the two papers agree that software developers need to work hard to develop their trade in order to respond to current global challenges effectively. Thirdly, the two papers were similar in their aims. The two papers were seeking to provide solutions that can help to improve software development practices.
The main difference between the two papers is their conceptual framework. The first paper starts with a fixed position that software development is not an engineering discipline. The second paper recognizes the identity crisis related to software engineering, but looks at it as a new engineering discipline.
The second difference is that the first paper treats software development as a one-stage process, and assumes that a software developer should solve all the problems associated with software development.
The second paper looks at software development as a multistage process that requires the expertise of different professionals. In this sense, the second paper presented a more detailed inspection of the shortcomings of current software engineering practices.
Personal Opinion The discussions presented in the papers reviewed were very stimulating. The second paper was more persuasive in regards to the status of software engineering. The job of a software engineer is an engineering job. The only difference between the work done by software engineers and the work done by traditional engineers is the areas of focus and tools. The four main reasons for this are as follows
First, all software development projects arise from clear needs in the market, or from perceived needs arising from research. This is very important because all engineering projects arise from a stated need in a given market. Secondly, software developers use structured methods to solve software problems.
In this sense, software developers are similar to engineers. The degree of usage of these structured methods is what varies. Software developers tend to use various methods to address the problems at hand. In this sense, software developers may seem like artists. This situation arises because software developers can use different methods to arrive at a given solution.
Not sure if you can write a paper on The Software Engineering Debate by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Thirdly, software developers deploy systems that interact with other systems in a similar manner to the work of other engineers. Software has interfaces that allow humans to control it. This is very similar to all other engineering products. Just as a car has a start button, software requires a trigger to launch it.
When a driver presses the accelerator, the car moves forwards because the car has systems that convert the depression of the accelerator into forward motion. In the same way, a user can click on a button on the software interface to get certain results. This shows that software packages are functional systems that interact with the environment. This makes software engineering products.
Works Cited Denning, Peter J and Richard D Riehle. “The Profession of IT: Is Software Engineering Engineering?” Communications of the ACM (2009): 24-26. Print.
Loka, Raghavendra Rao. “Software Development: What is the Problem?” The Profession (2007): 110-112. Print.
Blogging about Fashion Analytical Essay essay help online: essay help online
Table of Contents Introduction
Social Influence and Blogging about Fashion
Frequency and timely updates
Effects of Blogs on the Consumer Buying Behaviours
Introduction The emergence and extensive rise of digital technologies has widely enabled organisations and their consumers to interact and connect with one another through the internet platform. According to Deuze (2006, p. 68), utilisation of such has encouraged consumers to share their opinions, feelings and judgements of the products and services offered to their esteemed associations through the online platform with no much efforts.
This has led to emergence of several online cultures as mediums for communication. In the use of online cultures, Yang (2003, p. 50) indicates that blogging is among the oldest and most traditional form, which started to emerge in the late twentieth century. Many authors have varied definitions of blogs due to its complexity.
Technically, as Deuze (2006, p. 69) notes, blogs refer to websites that comprise of discrete entries, posts, or websites with contents written by a blogger. The contents are arranged in a reverse sequential order organised into categories. In the same way as noted, the advancement in technology has impelled a drastic shift in blog usage and concept development (Wright 2005, p. 7).
In general, online culture can be categorised into several contents that include an individual’s personal views and news, advertising, and customer services, internal information sharing, insight in professional issues, knowledge management application, and civil engagement function.
As cited in Rocamoran (2011, p. 409), just like other blogging, fashion blogging has exponentially grown across the globe (Denegri-Knott and Molesworth 2013, p. 57). Moreover, numerous researches assert that the fashion industry has many well-known and famous bloggers as compared to other industries such as politics, food, tourism and travel industries.
Fashion bloggers, as empirical research indicates, can influence the industry either directly or indirectly. Furthermore, as Kuhn (2007, p. 20) indicates, bloggers, apart from using their likes and dislikes to influence the way certain brands or products are presented, they can launch new trends in their respective industries and publicly discuss issues that companies are afraid to discuss in public.
Social Influence and Blogging about Fashion Among the most popular use of online culture is the capability to socialise and form social links with other online users. This is possible regardless of the geographical locations and temporal margins (Rothaermel
Organizational DNA Analysis Evaluation Essay college admissions essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Evidence of Band Element Present from the Focus Case
Organizational Challenges and Opportunities in this Band Area
Leverage of Opportunities to Meet Organizational Aims
Introduction Threadless is a company that deals with the manufacture of T-shirts worn by all individuals in the society. Since its inception in the year 2000, the company has witnessed tremendous growth that has led to its expansion from a small apartment of about 900 square feet to an area that covers extensive parts of North America. The growth attracted firms and persuaded them to request for collaborations and partnerships.
To elucidate the growth of Threadless, it is imperative to analyze it using organizational DNA. Organizational DNA has four bases that include information, decision rights, structure, and motivators, which are useful in the growth of a company.
Therefore, the essay analyzes Threadless from the perspective of motivators, a component of the organizational DNA band, using the evidence, challenges, opportunities, as well as leverage of the opportunities.
Evidence of Band Element Present from the Focus Case The unique strategy that Threadless presents to its target consumers is a brilliant strategy that facilitates consumer involvement in the design and manufacture of its products. Since the organization uses a social networking platform that is easily accessible to all members of the society from all demographics, it is able to be at par with what consumers expect in the market.
According to Parsons and Maclaran, an understanding of clients’ expectations is very crucial for the growth and progress of an organization (22). As opposed to other organizations that employ extensive market surveys, researches, and promotions to identify consumer expectations in the market, the organization employs a strategy that incorporates marketing and presentation of customer needs through a social platform.
Thus, it is evident from the case of Threadless that it does not only emphasize on achievement of customer expectations, but it also strives to keep abreast with consumer trends and dynamics in the clothing industry.
Through the social networking platform, which the organization uses, several clients are able to present their proposed designs and have them converted into finished products. The act of involving consumers in decision-making process and using their proposals to manufacture finished T-shirts makes the organization build trust among its target consumers.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The social networking creates an avenue of sharing ideas and art works; hence, provides an environment where consumers and employees listen to one another while exchanging their ideas concerning improvement of product quality. When employees and clients interact and exchange their ideas, the organization acquires the ability to deliver products of good quality, and hence, derive satisfaction from the achievement.
Moreover, satisfaction expressed by consumers after receiving products of their perceived quality compounds the level of satisfaction that employees of Threadless hold.
Motivation occasions from the achievement of organizational goals and acquisition of a corresponding appreciation from the subject organization (Podmoroff 16). It is imperative to understand that employee and consumer satisfaction is a key ingredient that catalyzes employee motivation and commitment, and thus sustain delivery of products required by potential clients.
Organizational Challenges and Opportunities in this Band Area Some of the challenges associated with the Threadless relates to the limited capacity of its staff to make decisions that can propel it to a higher level. Moreover, due to the spontaneous growth of the organization that took a snowball design, it experienced a challenge in supplying its products to the target consumers.
From the case, it is clear that the organization has inadequate financial ability to meet the spiraling demand for its products, which was about 30 million in the year 2008 (Daft 427). When it commenced its activities in the year 2000, the Threadless expected to witness a gradual growth and steady revenue base.
Conversely, soon after its introduction, the strategy occasioned a spontaneous growth that spiraled out of its control. Merger with other organizations that are bigger than the organization can be a practical strategy in the quest to amplify the market share and supply of products that the organization manufactures and supplies in the market.
The main opportunity that the organization enjoys is its ability to engage its employees and potential customers through a social networking platform. From the platform, employees identify consumer needs, preferences, and expectations, whereas clients get the chance to relay their suggestions. As a result, the organization reduces the costs associated with promotion and marketing.
We will write a custom Essay on Organizational DNA Analysis specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Interaction between employees and potential consumers is a rare opportunity and a very practical platform that does not only lead to manufacture of products that match client expectations, but also initiate employee motivation. Remarkably, the platform facilities an environment where the organization easily accesses feedback from customers and use it in bridging any present knowledge gaps related to product quality.
According to McMeekin, some factors dictate consumers to purchase products in line with their preferences (12). Therefore, development of a platform where consumers interact with employees enables the organization to understand and cope with the ever-changing consumer needs.
Leverage of Opportunities to Meet Organizational Aims The act of social networking that employees and potential consumers in the organization practice is among the measures that the organization can utilize in the resolution of its challenges. Since social networking results in quick and efficient conveyance of feedback concerning product quality, organizations can identify the needs of clients and quickly bridge the gaps that affect product quality (Zarrella 3).
Furthermore, the culture of hard work, transparency, good relationship, and communication that the organization nurtures among its employees facilitates resolution of its challenges in terms of production, supply, and delivery of its products.
The culture also promotes productivity and enhances employee motivation and commitment. The ability to interact and exchange ideas with its potential consumers is a very vital opportunity that helps the organization to control and manage its challenges.
Works Cited Daft, Richard. Organization Theory and Design. New York: Cengage Learning, 2010. Print.
McMeekin, Andrew. Innovation by Demand: An Interdisciplinary Approach to the Study of Demand and Its Role in Innovation. Manchester : Manchester University Press, 2002. Print.
Parsons, Elizabeth, and Pauline Maclaran. Contemporary Issues in Marketing and Consumer Behaviour. New York: Routledge, 2009. Print.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Organizational DNA Analysis by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Podmoroff, Dianna. 365 Ways to Motivate and Reward Your Employees Every Day- with Little Or No Money. Atlantic: Atlantic Publishing Company, 2005. Print.
Zarrella, Dan. The Social Media Marketing Book. London: O’Reilly Media, Inc, 2009. Print.
Polar Sports Company Case Study best essay help: best essay help
Introduction Polar Sports is one of the successful companies in the United States. In 1992, Richard Weir formed this company because he was motivated to make superior skiwear products. Since 1992, Polar Sports has been growing steadily. Today, it is one of the leading manufacturers of high-end sportswear in the US. This company experienced rapid growth in the late 1990s because it had good marketing and advertisement strategies.
For example, it sponsored a number of play-offs. Moreover, it endorsed some gifted athletes who excelled in international competitions. Thus, its products gained high reputation in the market. Hence, it sold many goods in the past few decades. Nonetheless, the prosperity of this company dropped slightly between 2008 and 2009 due to economic decline in the US.
In 2001, Thomas Johnson was appointed vice president of this company. Unlike other companies, Polar Sports has been producing most of its products seasonally. Currently, it is experiencing production and marketing challenges. Therefore, this essay examines the production and marketing trends of Polar Sports. It also recommends measures that can be used to overcome these challenges.
Situational Assessment of Polar Sport Market Position Polar Sport mainly targets high-end consumers. Thus, it produces unique products that attract high-end consumers. Polar Sport has been able to compete favorably in the market because it is producing high quality products. Nonetheless, some of its products are quite expensive due to high cost of production. Therefore, high prices affect marketability of its products.
Moreover, demand for its products has not been constant per annum. Hence, it has been producing most of its products when they are highly demanded. Thus, it can make huge losses if sports events reduce. Moreover, it faces serious competition from its rivals. Thus, it has to monitor market trends regularly to enable it increase its sales volume.
Market, Operational, and Financial Analysis Quantity of Sales under Seasonal Production
Through seasonal production of goods, the amount of sales grew tremendously from $4.65 million in 2001 to about $ 16.36 million in late 2011. Due to production of high quality products, the sales volume of this company was expected to reach $18 million by 2012. Nonetheless, the success of the new items was dependent on the market forces. Thus, seasonal manufacturing of goods led to significant increase in sales.
Operation Costs under Seasonal Production
Production activities were labor intensive under seasonal manufacturing of goods because designers had to develop new products regularly to make the company competitive in the market. Polar Sport strived to deliver orders on time. Hence, it had to increase its workforce. In this case, new workers were trained and existing ones were requested to work overtime.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Seasonal production led to over working of machines. This often led to frequent breakdown of machines, which led to high maintenance costs. In 2012, the cost of operation was expected to be approximately 24 percent of sales. Therefore, seasonal production activities had many challenges, which led to high operation expenses.
Volume of Sales under Level Production Model
Polar Sports decided to adopt level production because seasonal manufacturing of goods led to a high cost of production. In 2012, the vice president of Polar Sports anticipated a high demand for new products. He also thought that the company would save approximately $480,000 by reducing overtime payments and repair costs.
Moreover, the company would save about $600,000 through minimizing the cost of hiring and training new employees. The price of commodities sold was presumed to be 60 percent and would remain constant if the company adopted level production. Level production was expected to increase sales because goods would be produced regularly.
Operation Costs under Seasonal Production
Level production had some challenges. Intensive production of goods led to high maintenance costs. High rate of manufacturing distinct designs of sportswear led to regular modification of machines. This led to regular repair of machines. Furthermore, level production required hiring and training of new employees.
It is important to note that the challenges of level production occurred due to poor implementation strategies. For example, the company did not purchase appropriate machines for large-scale production of goods. Instead, it used small machines that could only produce limited amounts of products. Thus, over utilization of small machines led to inefficiency in production of goods.
Therefore, this company should develop proper strategies to facilitate implementation of level production. Indeed, level production has a great potential to reduce operation costs if it is properly implemented. For instance, level production can facilitate quick production of highly demanded goods.
Analysis of the Current Financial Situation of the Company
Through seasonal production of goods, Polar Sport had a net income of $897,000 in 2011. Financial analysts expected the net income to reach approximately $1,147,000 in 2012. At the end of the 2011 financial year, Polar Sport had not repaid loans worth $826,000. The local bank that financed it was willing to give it a maximum credit of $ 4 million in 2012. Polar Sport repaid its loans at an interest rate of 11 percent.
We will write a custom Case Study on Polar Sports Company specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The current financial situation of Polar Sport is not good because it has to repay a huge loan within the stipulated time. Moreover, it is repaying the loan at a high interest rate. High interest rates affect profit margins; hence, leading to losses.
Moreover, the financial situation of this company may not improve in the near future because it is planning to restructure its production activities. Restructuring of production will lead to high expenses. Thus, it must look for more funds to implement a new model of production.
Market Influences to be considered in Restructuring Production
The managers of this company should consider the following factors when restructuring production. First, they should be able to predict future demand for various goods to avoid producing irrelevant items. Second, they should assess the potential impacts of the new model of production on the capital needs of the company.
Third, they should predict how a given model of production would affect financial income and expenditure. For example, they should adopt a cost effective model of production that will mitigate operation expenses. Last, managers of this company should monitor new products introduced by its rivals to avoid duplicating goods.
Solutions to Current Production Challenges
At present, Polar Sport Company needs to increase its sales volume in order to make more profits. In this case, it should produce goods that are demanded throughout the year regularly. Conversely, it should produce products that have a low demand seasonally.
Polar Sport should adopt level manufacturing of products because of the following reasons. First, level manufacturing will increase production and sales. Therefore, it will be able to make profits throughout the year.
Second, level production will reduce the cost of production in future since goods will be produced a head of demand. Thus, it will be able to mitigate unnecessary production costs such as overtime allowances. Level production will facilitate production of superior products since designers will not hurry to complete urgent orders.
The following production issues should be taken into consideration when adopting level manufacturing of goods. First, this company should invest in better technology that will lead to efficiency in production. For instance, it should acquire sophisticated production equipment that will reduce wastage of materials.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Polar Sports Company by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This will lead to a significant reduction of operating costs. Indeed, large-scale production is cheaper than small-scale production of goods. Second, it should produce most of its products in countries such as China and India because they have cheap labor.
Proper implementation of level production model will require additional financial resources. Thus, it will have to seek more capital to buy better machines. It will also need more resources to hire and train additional workers. Furthermore, level production will require quality control measures.
Currently, Polar Sport does not have adequate income to facilitate implementation of level production. Thus, it should seek funds from financial institutions to acquire modern production equipment and to hire more workers. Alternatively, it can buy new machines on credit and pay manufacturers within a given period. It can also acquire machines through lease agreements.
Conclusion Polar Sport Company can make more profits if it adopts proper production and marketing strategies. Therefore, it should adopt level production because it will lead to increase in sales.
The Future and Strategies of Apple’s Brand Research Paper college admission essay help: college admission essay help
Table of Contents The Future of Apple’s Brand
Strategies that Apple can Use to Prevent Going Down
Apple Incorporation’s Future
The Future of Apple’s Brand Apple Incorporation is a leading producer and marketer of innovative products. The company’s brand is acceptable in every part of the world. Apple succeeded because of Steve Jobs’ leadership skills. Many economists have examined why the company’s brand might be in jeopardy. The success of Apple’s brand depends on the strategies employed by its leaders and managers.
Phil Schiller is a professional leader at the company. Schiller safeguards the company’s brand reputation (Burrows
OBE Workplace Diversity Report custom essay help
A summary of the paper shows that the debate focuses on the impact of implementing a diversity training program to fight workplace discrimination.
Organisations implement diversity training programs as an afterthought when they have lost cases of employee discrimination. The paper discusses the advantages, disadvantages, and the practical implications of the diversity training program using different and practical examples.
The advantages of workplace diversity programs include the ability to transform individuals to enrich their knowledge, respond to social needs, improve intra-group and interpersonal relationships, address personal prejudice, avoid impulse management, practice personal accountability, improve problem solving abilities, become a better workforce, plan well, and attain greater levels of complexity for the organisation to achieve competitive advantage in its operations (Colquitt, Conlon, Wesson, Porter
World War II Innovations Essay essay help: essay help
Introduction The period following the end of World War II was characterized with a great deal of technological development, probably as a consequence of the victories achieved by the Allied forces. The aftermath of World War II set in motion a wave of innovations that proved to be greatly beneficial in improving the living standards of the global population.
Such advancements in technology were a direct consequence of the experiences gained during the several years of the War. An urgent need was felt to innovate in order to have more technologically advanced weaponry that would allow having the much required edge in winning the war. The potential for technological development had been thus created during the Second World War itself.
After it ended in 1945, the available resources and technology could be gainfully used in the development of consumer goods that led to improved standards of living on a global basis. The technological innovations in this regard were made in several fields such as Linguistics, Medicine, Weaponry, Intelligence and Communication in addition to the technological progress made in manufacturing and service industries (Castells 45).
The rapid advancement in technology during World War II was primarily inspired by the propensity to research and devise military strategies that would allow penetration and sabotage of enemy forces and supply lines respectively.
In addition, innovation in technology was also inspired by the enhanced ability of the military to use technology in gathering intelligence, which was gainfully used in obtaining the much needed information about military capabilities and movement of enemy forces.
After the World War II ended, the technology developed till that time could be further innovated in creating a virtual technological revolution that transformed the lives of humanity in the coming decades (Gray 36). World War II heralded noteworthy technological innovations in the areas of nuclear technology and information technology that revolutionized ways of living in the 21st century.
Nuclear Technology Invention of Nuclear Reactor
The invention of the atomic bomb by the United States and its allies eclipses any other innovation made during World War II. Named as the Manhattan Project during World War II, the nuclear program of the Allies led to catastrophic consequences for the Axis forces, particularly in the context of the bombings on Hiroshima and Nagasaki, which led to the death of millions of people.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Although the initial objective of the Manhattan Project was to use nuclear technology in establishing reactors for the generation of electricity under the auspicious leadership of Italian physicist Enrico Ferni, the need to annihilate German, Italian and Japanese forces during World War II made the Allied leadership to focus on developing the first atomic bomb.
It was under the leadership of Enrico Fermi, who is recognized as the father of the atomic bomb because of his exhaustive research and positive outcomes in developing nuclear power, that the US made use his technology in establishing several nuclear power plants across the entire country (Russell 93).
Further innovations in nuclear technology were made by Enrico Fermi after the end of World War II, leading to major breakthroughs in reducing dependence on electricity generated through coal fuel and hydro power. This was made possible because of the innovation that led to the availability of cheaper, environmentally friendly and reliable nuclear generated electric power.
Innovation of Radiology Medicine
Besides its significant role in leading the green revolution through generation of environmentally clean energy, innovation in nuclear technology during World War II allowed wider application in medicine, especially in radiology therapy and imaging.
The use of nuclear technology in medicine can be traced back to the campaign initiated by the Polish Physics and Chemistry Nobel Prize laureate Marie Curie just before the beginning of World War II. Marie Curie embarked on a campaign to collect radium for use in radiology medicine.
She is credited with the establishment of globally recognized research institutes of radiology medicine, including the Curie Institutes in Paris and Warsaw. Nuclear medicine finds wide application in radiology treatment of different cancerous malignancies with the use of techniques such as neoplasm and radiology imaging.
Radar Technology The innovations in radar technology during World War II helped in making improvements in the aviation industry and its associate role of uplifting the living standards of the global population. Such innovations also helped in enhancing national security from the perspective of external and internal aggression. Radar technology involves the use of radio waves in the detection of far-off objects.
We will write a custom Essay on World War II Innovations specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Such objects may include ships, aircrafts, submarines and a wide-range of missiles and rocket weaponry. Innovation of radar technology during World War II led to improvement in bombsights and radar capabilities, which were inspired by their increased use in World War II. Radar technology is even regarded as the defining innovation that tilted the balance in favor of the allied forces during World War II.
Later, it also heralded the revolution in both military and civil aviation in the contemporary world. Radar technology was invented immediately after World War II began, but significant improvements in the technology were made during the war through research and development, mainly for military purposes.
This new technology allowed the use of applications with which approaching enemy aircraft and ships could be detected.
Vaccines Collaborative arrangements were made between the military and academia in efforts to prevent war-exacerbated diseases, particularly pneumococcal pneumonia and influenza and such initiatives led to the innovation of disease prevention vaccines.
Wartime research programs on preventable disease are recognized for having led to the improvement and innovation of 10 new vaccines for treatment of a series of virulent preventable diseases (Godin 121). Besides, wartime research in health and medicine science and technology led to innovations relative to substitute blood samples such as plasma, antibiotics such as penicillin and insecticides such as DDT.
Nevertheless, the innovation of vaccines stands out as the most important achievement in the area of medical and health technology during World War II. Such vaccines involved development of highly effective, safe and licensed antibiotics and microbial preventative therapy for immunization against several diseases, which did not exist before the War began.
Electrolysis Chemistry, Digital Technology
Climate Change Problem Response Essay a level english language essay help
It is surprising to note the current trend the world is taking towards responding to the global climate change. Large corporations are increasingly realizing that global warming is real and affects every person, society, institution and nation. The author of the statement makes it clear that the recent reports in some of the world’s popular newspapers are really surprising.
According to the author, a number of large corporations in the modern world are realizing that they cannot make profits without proper and effective measures to deal with the problem. Moreover, the author notes that the current efforts by some of the large companies in the world to help in reducing the impact of global warming have a negative impact on shareholders.
The resources needed to reduce global climatic change are no doubt huge and not the task of a single corporation, but a combined effort by all societies, institutions and corporations alike (Gelbspan 34).
Nevertheless, it is surprising to note that some large corporations are using global warming (climate change) as an opportunity to make profits, attempting to utilize the idea of providing products and services that seek to manage the symptoms of the problem but benefiting from the deeply rooted causes of the situation.
Thus, it is clear that the author has based the argument on three important observations – corporate realization that climatic change is real, the economic impact of using corporate resources to manage global warming and the corporate utilization of opportunities posed by global warming to make profits.
This response takes into account the three observations to develop a comprehensive analysis of the problems. In addition, it takes into account evidence from modern reports on corporate behavior, which have appeared in newspapers, such as New York Times, to reflect on the situation.
First, it is worth noting that the author is concerned with corporate response to the climatic change, than to the phenomenon itself. Citing several newspaper and corporate reports in the recent past, the author notes that the current response to the problem has changed significantly (Ives A17).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Citing the example of Coca Cola corporation, the author argues that a number of corporations have come to the realization that global warming is not a theoretical notion, but a real phenomenon that affects their profitability (Davenport A23). For instance, Coca Cola lost a profitable operating license in India because of a serious shortage of water.
It is clear that the company was taking little, if any, efforts to conserve water resources in the region. The author seems to argue that the company was not aware or ignored the fact that it was set to lose if little or no efforts are made to conserve water resources as a part of protecting the environment.
In a broader sense, the company is an example of many corporations that tend to ignore the issue of global warming, assuming that it is a theoretical notion or a problem that cannot have a significant impact on their business.
Thus, the author uses the Coca Cola experience as an example to portray the fact that corporations will be the biggest losers if global warming and other aspects of climatic change are ignored. In addition, the author argues that global corporations are the major causes of the problem, yet they do not know that they are also the biggest losers if they do not make efforts to cope with the problem.
Citing the examples given in the New York Times, the author further moves to a relatively new argument, claming that the current and future efforts by corporations to take an active role in fighting global warming are not only difficult, they also affect the corporate practice. For instance, the author argues that the cost of dealing with the problem is high, making corporations reduce the value of their shareholder’ equity.
From an in-depth view, it is worth noting that the author wanted to show that the corporate worth of causing global warming is not significant, but the impact on corporate business is unbearable. In other words, the author wanted to say that companies have always ignored the idea of taking an active role in reducing the problem of global warming.
In fact, it has been shown that multinational companies are the biggest perpetrators of global warming, yet they are not aware that they are the largest users of the natural resources.
We will write a custom Essay on Climate Change Problem specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More From this view, the author points out that that the biggest users of the natural resources are the largest cause of the global warming problem and eventually the biggest losers. It is clear that the author’s point of view on the matter is that the corporate world should take the leading role in dealing with the problem of global.
The third major issue discussed in the commentary concerns the corporate use of the opportunities that global warming has presented to make profits. The author seems to be concerned with a number of organizations that are increasingly pretending to manage the impacts of climate change, yet they are out to make money.
For instance, the author gives the examples of Bayer and Nephila Capital, which have started making plans to use the impacts of global warming to make profits. For example, Bayer has announced that it was developing various products to help the world population deal with the impacts of global warming.
It has set up plans to develop such products as eye and nose ointments, that will help people alleviate allergies that are likely to result from the changing in tree and plant cycles, and quality mosquito nets to help population deal with malaria when mosquitoes start moving to areas that are increasingly becoming warmer, thanks to global warming.
On its part, Nephila Capital is trying to trade water resources, pretending to be protecting sources, yet it is out to make huge profits. These cases provide clear examples that some corporations are aware that climate change is real, yet they want to help in treating the symptoms of the problem but retain the cause, which will most likely lead to profitability.
A deep analysis of the statement reveals that the corporate world has already realized that global warming is not a scientific hypothesis but a real phenomenon. While some have decided to take a leading role in dealing with the problem, others are busy setting up plans to take the advantage of the problem to make more profits (Revkin A7).
In addition, some organizations realized that they cannot take a leading role in managing the problem, because their profitability and net value is likely to reduce. Thus, the statement provides the readers with the dilemma associated with the corporate realization that global warming is real and effective. The author seems to raise the question “with the realization that global warming is real, what should the corporate world do?”
Works Cited Davenport, Carol. “Industry awakens to the threat of climate change.” The New York Times, 23 Jan 2014, A23. Print.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Climate Change Problem by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Gelbspan, Ross. Boiling Point: How Politicians, Big Oil and Coal, Journalists and Activists Are Fueling the Climate Crisis—And What We Can Do to Avert Disaster. New York, Basic Books, 2013. Print.
Ives, Mike. “Slowly, Asia’s Factories Begin to Turn Green.” The New York Times, 7 Jan 2014, A17. Print.
Revkin, Andrew. “Industry Ignored Its Scientists on Climate.” New York Times, 23 April 2009, B7. Print.